JP2023031081A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To make it easier to grasp the state of a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine having performance control means capable of controlling a game-related performance includes confirmation means capable of confirming a game-related set value and performance display means capable of displaying a performance. In a setting confirmation state in which a set value can be confirmed by the confirmation means, the performance control means causes the performance display means to be in different display modes from a state before resetting of the performance control means and a state during power shutdown, at the time of resetting of the performance control means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 92

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine that allows the user to grasp the state of the game machine by means of a display device or the like (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-58504 A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in grasping the state of the gaming machine.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to make it easier to grasp the state of a gaming machine.

According to a representative embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine provided with effect control means capable of controlling game-related effects, confirmation means capable of confirming game-related set values and effect display means capable of displaying effects are provided. wherein, in a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed by the confirmation means, the production control means, when the production control means is reset, changes the production display means to a state before resetting and during power shutdown. The display mode is different from the state of .

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the gaming machine.

It is a perspective view of the game machine viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production|presentation control system of a game machine. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first half of the main processing; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the main processing; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure game process. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting mouth switch common process. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a specific area switch monitoring process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big-hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of support hit determination processing. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a variation pattern setting process. 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of 2-byte allocation processing; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of sorting processing; 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during a special figure fluctuation|variation. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of time saving end setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of production mode information check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of processing during a special figure display. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a support operation setting process; 10 is a flow chart showing a procedure of a role game process; It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the accessory usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big-hit completion|finish setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure game processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a procedure of gate switch monitoring processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric prize-winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of process transition setting processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process during a normal figure display. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the process during normal per figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal electric operation transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal electric remaining bulb processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of end processing per normal figure. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of external information editing processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process; FIG. 4 is a time chart showing how external information or test signals are transmitted; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of the production control device. 9 is a flowchart showing received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing; 10 is a flowchart showing single-shot command processing; It is a flow chart showing a look-ahead pattern system command process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows design system command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of hit system command processing. It is an example of a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state. It is another example of the game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state It is a table showing the number of times of time reduction corresponding to the symbol that is the type of hit of the special figure fluctuation display game, the prescribed number of remaining reservations, and the like. It is a diagram showing the characteristics of the normal map fluctuation display game and the normal electric operation. Timing chart showing game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern per probability), normal pattern state, general pattern state, special figure 2 reservation number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is. Timing chart showing game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern per probability), normal pattern state, general pattern state, special figure 2 reservation number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is. Timing chart showing game state, normal pattern probability (normal pattern per probability), normal pattern state, general electric state, special figure 2 reservation number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is. In the second embodiment, it is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating the transition of the game state. In the second embodiment, it is a table showing the number of time-savings corresponding to the symbol that is the type of winning of the special figure variation display game, the prescribed number of remaining reservations, and the like. In 2nd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows about the characteristics etc. of a normal figure fluctuation display game and normal electric operation|movement. In the second embodiment, from the time saving state as a specific game state to the transition state (normal game state to digest the remaining hold), the game state, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), the general figure state, the general electric state, It is a timing chart showing the number of special figures 2 pending. It is a front view of a game board according to a third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating transitions of game states in the third embodiment; In the third embodiment, it is a table showing the number of times of time reduction corresponding to the symbol that is the type of hit of the special figure fluctuation display game, the prescribed number of remaining reservations (the number of prescribed remaining reservations), and the like. In 3rd Embodiment, it is the table which put together the operation|movement situation of time saving about the case where the operation opportunity of time saving new from each game state generate|occur|produces. It is a figure explaining the display of the batch display apparatus which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows about the characteristics etc. of the normal figure fluctuation display game in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows about the characteristics etc. of normal electric operation|movement in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of variation pattern setting processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a change start information setting process according to the third embodiment; FIG. It is a table showing the setting situation of the variation pattern table according to the third embodiment with respect to each game state and special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2). FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an effect screen of a display device according to a third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process according to the third embodiment; FIG. In the third embodiment, it is a time chart showing the on/off state of jackpot 1 to 4 signals as external information. In the third embodiment, it is a time chart showing how the test signal is output to the test-firing test device. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating winning easy state signals 1 to 4 corresponding to medium support and high support in the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a table showing how a firing position specifying signal is output according to the third embodiment; FIG. It is a time chart which shows the state of the output of the firing position designation|designated signal which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. In the third embodiment, in the case of a small hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game, it is a time chart illustrating the opening operation of the upper big winning opening, the ON / OFF operation of the lever solenoid, and the like. In 3rd Embodiment, in the case of the small hit result of a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is a time chart which illustrates opening operation|movement of an upper big prize-winning opening, ON/OFF operation|movement of a lever solenoid, etc. FIG. In a 4th embodiment, it is a circuit diagram showing wiring normally connected from a decoration control board (the 1st circuit board) of a production control device to an LED board (the 2nd circuit board). FIG. 12 is a circuit diagram showing a state in which terminals at both ends of the harness are connected to the connector while being displaced one by one in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 83B is a circuit diagram showing a state in which the terminals at both ends of the harness are connected to the connector while being displaced one by one to the opposite side of FIG. 83A in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a connection configuration of wiring from a decoration control board (first circuit board) of a modified example of the fourth embodiment to a board decoration motor, a drop right board, and a drop left board (a plurality of second circuit boards); FIG. 11 is a detailed diagram 1 (upstream side) showing the details of the connection configuration of the FFC connection of the modification of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a detailed diagram 2 (downstream side) showing the details of the connection configuration of the FFC connection of the modification of the fourth embodiment; As a comparative example, it is a circuit diagram which shows the conventional wiring normally connected to the LED board from the decoration control device of the production|presentation control device. A circuit diagram showing a state in which the terminals on one side of the harness are connected to the connector while being shifted one by one, and a state in which the terminals on both sides of the harness are connected to the connector by being shifted by one, for the conventional wiring of the comparative example. It is a circuit diagram showing It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. 14 is a table for explaining an example of display changes of the performance display device, the payout display device, and the display device (liquid crystal display device) when the state of the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment changes. It is an example of transition of display when it shifts to a setting change state (under setting change) by restarting after an error such as a main abnormality occurs, and is sub-reset during the setting change. It is an example of transition of display in the case of transitioning to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation in progress) by restarting after the occurrence of an error such as a main failure, and sub-resetting during the setting confirmation. It is an example of transition of display in the case of sub-resetting after an error such as a main abnormality occurs again in restarting after the occurrence of an error such as a main abnormality. This is an example of display transition when a sub-reset is performed during a setting change after an error such as a main error has occurred during the initial operation of the movable accessory and the mobile accessory has been restarted. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a procedure of movable body control processing according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a display device and an example of a pending display mode and a mode display mode in relation to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the relationship (A2410) at the time of +1 update of the test signal and the set value for work (probability set value) related to the probability setting change/confirmation process in relation to the fifth embodiment;

[First embodiment]
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Note that front, back, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions seen by the player during the game.

[General view of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The game machine 10 has an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to an island facility via a hinge so as to be freely opened/closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15 . In addition, the left end of the opening/closing frame is a shaft attachment end to be attached to a hinge, and the right end is an open end to be opened by rotation.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that makes a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Also, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back side of the game board 30. can be done.

Various frame-constituting members are arranged on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

Decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged at the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15. As shown in FIG. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs therein, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the game machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19a. The lower speaker 19 b is arranged at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12 . These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a protruding effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and protrudes forward (toward the player) is arranged. The projecting effect unit 13 is a effect device that performs light emitting effects and the like according to the progress of the game. A lighting member arranged inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15 . The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball shooting device (not shown).

The upper tray unit further includes a performance operation device for receiving input operations from the players, a ball lending operation device for receiving input operations from the players, and a decoration device 22 for performing light-emitting performance or the like according to the game state. .

The effect operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operating device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or execute an advance notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Also, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the game is not being executed.

The game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. In addition, the special game state is, for example, a state with a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a time-saving state or a variable display game as a specific game state (variable probability state, probability variable state), a big hit state (special game state ), a small hit game state (small hit state). As described above, the game machine 10 has a plurality of game states with different occurrence probabilities of special results, and the game control device 100 (game state selection means, setting means) selects one game state from among the plurality of game states. (Setting) to set the current game state.

Here, the probability variable state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There is one that continues until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Furthermore, it is also possible to always generate the variable probability state when a big hit occurs without determining whether or not to generate the variable probability state by the big win symbol random number.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by the player when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display section 26. - 特許庁A ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and a return button 28 is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. These are buttons operated by the player. The balance display portion 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the game state, and is provided in the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Beneath the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper tray unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, there are an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball shooting device (not shown) and a game ball capable of being stored. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operating handle 24 is arranged in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operation handle 24 , the ball shooting device shoots game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30 . The shooting speed of the game ball shot from the ball shooting device is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operating handle 24 increases. That is, the ball shooting device can change the shooting force (speed) of shooting the game ball into the game area in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be played in various shooting modes with different shooting force. Can shoot balls. The shooting modes include left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32 .

The lower tray 23 is arranged below the upper tray unit with a predetermined gap from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a vertically passing through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball extraction hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball extraction hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-like game board main body 30a that serves as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by shooting game balls from a ball shooting device into a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 . In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, etc. are arranged as members for changing the flowing direction of the game ball.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached to form a window that serves as a display area for the variable display game. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 is arranged as a performance display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40 . The display device 41 is not limited to having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbols) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big win display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

The center case 40 also has an inflow port 40a to a warp passage 40e for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning port 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball rolling on the stage portion 40b enters the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win prizes.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided in the upper part and the right part of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 . Inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed.

A general prize winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40 , and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40 . Winning of game balls into these general winning openings 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35. FIG.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 that provides a condition for starting the special figure variation display game. In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessories, electricity) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts to a state in which game balls can easily flow in by rotating forward. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game balls cannot win the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加When the game ball wins the starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. A game ball is more likely to enter the start winning hole 36 when hitting to the left, and a game ball is more likely to enter the normal variable winning device 37 when hitting to the right.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory, and operates via a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal pattern variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. It opens and changes to an open state (win easy state advantageous to the player) in which game balls tend to flow into the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加If the movable member 37b is not in the open state (easy winning state), the movable member 37b is in a closed state (non-easy winning state, difficult winning state) in which game balls are difficult to flow into the normal variable winning device 37 . In this embodiment, unlike the normal variable prize winning device 37, the start winning port 36 does not have a movable member (opening/closing member) and is always in an open state (open state), but the movable member (opening/closing member) is also possible.

The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 shortens the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game or makes the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, thereby increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state, or special games. By making the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state longer than the easy-to-win state generated in the normal game state in which the game is not performed, the time-saving state (general electric support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. In addition, even in the probability variable state (excluding the latent probability variable state), a time-saving state (general electric support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, there is an attacker type opening the lower winning opening by retracting from the front to the back side by the lower winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7). A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening/closing door 38c is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the state in which the large winning port is closed (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big winning hole, the player is given a predetermined game value (for example, prize balls or the number of reduced time/variable number of times after the end of the big win). A lower special winning opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided in the lower special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. It should be noted that the first special variable prize winning device 38 makes it easier for a game ball to win a prize when hitting to the right.

In the game area 32 above the normal variable prize winning device 37, there is an opening/closing door 39c that opens the upper special prize opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right by an upper special prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). A second special variable winning device 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the state in which the large winning port is closed (closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (special game state advantageous to the player) depending on the result of the special figure variable display game, By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the big winning hole, the player is given a predetermined game value (for example, prize balls or the number of reduced time/variable number of times after the end of the big win). An upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 makes it easier for the game ball to win when hitting to the right. Also, the lower special winning opening switch 38a and the upper special winning opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as a special winning opening switch 43.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39 . When the game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening) after the open/close door 39c is opened by the small win, the big win is decided. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time only during a small hit so that the game ball can easily pass through. In addition, the game control device 100 can detect passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) through a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like. Along with confirming the shift, information indicating that there was a V prize (specified region passing command, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control device 300, which will be described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

That is, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine (1+2 type machine). In this embodiment, when the second special variable winning device 39 is opened with a small hit, the game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening) in the second special variable winning device 39, and the big win is achieved. Occur.

When the game ball wins the general winning prize opening 35, the starting winning prize opening 36, the normal variable winning prize device 37, and the special variable winning prize devices 38 and 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) controls the winning prize winning port The number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the ball is discharged from the payout device to the upper tray 21.例文帳に追加In addition, the lower game area 32 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize such as a prize winning port. In addition, the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, and their vicinity are provided with LEDs (board decoration device to be described later) that can emit light when a game ball wins a prize. 46) are provided.

In addition, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, a special figure variation display game (a special figure 1 variation display game, a special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 for displaying information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display unit 51 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and a second special figure variation for a variation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) Display unit 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D2), variation display unit 53 for normal figure variation display game (normal figure indicator, lamps D8, D10, D18), and start (hold) of each variation display game It has a storage display unit (special figure 1 reservation indicator 54, special figure 2 reservation indicator 55, general figure reservation indicator 56) for notifying the number of memories. The special figure 1 reservation indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. Special figure 2 reservation indicator 55 is configured by lamps D13 and D14. The general map holding display 56 is configured by lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 has a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp D7), a second game state display unit 58 (second game state display, lamp D17) that lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and a high probability state of a big hit when the game machine 10 is turned on. Third game state display unit 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display unit, lamp D9) for displaying the state, number of rounds at the time of big hit (number of times of opening and closing special variable winning devices 38, 39) A round display portion 60 (lamps D3 to D6) for displaying is provided.

In the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be configured by an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when performing variable display In addition, all LEDs provided as indicators are all lit and all extinguished (simultaneous blinking of all LEDs), cyclic lighting (lighting from any one LED in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals and extinguishing), or multiple may be performed by lighting and extinguishing (blinking) or cyclic lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the normal figure display device 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the general figure indicator 53 can also be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52.

Lamp display device 80, the lamp display units 1, 2 (LED) to perform a variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguished display as symbols (fourth special symbol, fourth symbol to be described later), and each special figure variation It has a lamp display section 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of start (hold) memories of the display game. Note that the lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. In other words, switching between turning off and turning on the lamp display units 1 and 2 is performed in a period of 1/2 of the blink period (for example, 100 msec). While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special figure 1 indicator 51, the special figure 2 indicator 52, and the general figure indicator 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the production control device 300 (described later).

Lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 reserved LED 1, special figure 1 reserved LED 2) display the special figure 1 reserved number (first start memory number) by a combination of off state, lighting state, and blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 pending LED1, special figure 2 pending LED2) display the special figure 2 pending number (second start memory number) by a combination of off state, lit state, and blinking state do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of reservations due to the occurrence of a big hit, but displays the number of reservations in cases other than the state of the big hit (including the case where a reach, which will be described later, occurs on the display device 41). conduct.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by shooting game balls toward the game area 32 from a ball shooting device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstructing nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34, a general prize winning opening 35, and a starting winning opening. 36, wins a normal variable winning device 37 or special variable winning devices 38, 39, or flows into an out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when game balls enter the general winning hole 35, the starting winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning devices 38, 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning hole enters the payout device. It is discharged to the upper tray 21 through.

The normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 . When the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal pattern variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state where the normal pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal pattern fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal pattern fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit. When the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, if the normal pattern start memory number (normal pattern reservation number) is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added ( +1).

The normal pattern start memory (normal pattern suspension) stores a hit judgment random value for determining the hit or miss of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and when this hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the normal pattern variation display game.

The normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed by the normal pattern display device 53 provided in the collective display device 50 . The normal figure display 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit in the case of a lit state as normal identification information (normal figure), and indicates a deviation in the case of an off state. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal pattern random number value extracted when passing the normal pattern starting gate 34 is a winning value, the normal pattern (normal pattern) displayed on the normal pattern display device 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time, by driving the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds x 2 times), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are allowed to win.

Winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and winning to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). A game ball that has won a prize in a starting prize winning port 36 is detected as a prize winning ball in a special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a game ball that has won a prize in a normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is a special figure 2. It is detected as the starting winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detection of the starting prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of 8 times). The number of memories of the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 reservation display 54 and the special figure 2 reservation display 55 for notifying the number of starting prizes of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41 Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 indicator 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 pending). . In addition, the game control device 100, based on the winning prize to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 reservation), the special figure 2 variable display game with the special figure 2 indicator 52 to run.

The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identified by the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 ( It is performed by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after variably displaying special symbols, special symbols).

Also, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (eg, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbols (identification information) composed of the numbers etc. described above are left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol ), the variable display (scroll display) is started in order, and after a predetermined time, the varying symbols are sequentially stopped, and the results of the special figure variation display game are displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various presentation displays such as the appearance of characters to enhance interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), in the lamp display parts 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol ( 4th pattern) fluctuates. After a predetermined time from the start, the variable display of the lamp display parts 1 and 2 stops with "lights out" in the case of a loss, and "lights up" in the case of a big hit or a small hit.

When the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbols, and a jackpot state (special game state) is established. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 are energized to the large prize winning opening solenoids (38b, 39b) (see FIG. 3) so that the large winning opening is opened from the closed state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). converted. In other words, the special variable winning device 38, 39 has a special winning opening that opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls win, during which time the player can win a lot of game balls. Granted.

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a small winning value), a special figure fluctuation display game As a result, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived by the display pattern, and a small win state is entered. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In addition, in this embodiment, although a big hit random number value is used also for determination of a small hit, a small hit value (small hit determination value) differs from a big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning device 38, 39 changes the state of the special winning opening from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b (see FIG. 3). In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small winning state (small winning game state) than in the big winning state (special game state), the game in which the player can win more in the small winning state than in the big winning state The value (the number of acquired balls) is small. In both the small winning state and the big winning state, the big winning opening is opened, but the big winning state may be called the first special game state, and the small winning state may be called the second special game state. For the sake of simplicity, in this embodiment, only the special variable winning device 39 (upper big winning opening) is converted to the open state in the small winning state, and in the big winning state (including the big winning state by V winning during the small winning) A configuration in which only the special variable winning device 38 (lower grand winning opening) is converted to the open state will be described.

Here, the difference between the big win and the small win will be explained.

A big win is a special result that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small win is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag is set for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38,39. Further, the operation of the condition device may mean that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, as in the case of simply winning a small prize lottery. However, as will be described later in this embodiment, if there is a V prize during the small hit state, the conditional device is activated. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. is released.

In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be configured as separate indicators or may be configured as the same indicator, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. is set to In addition, the special figure 2 variation display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, When the execution of the figure variation display game becomes possible, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (special figure 2 pending priority digestion, special figure 2 priority variation).

Regarding the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or the same display may be performed. You may make it perform by a device or a display area. In this case, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may not be executed at the same time.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variation display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch (38a) , 39a) includes a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal object approaches the coil. It is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the game machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch with positive contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in general, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). ) 111, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and the reference clock for the random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 to enable operation. be done.

The power supply device 400 includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as 12V or 5V from a voltage of 32V DC, and a normal power supply unit 410. , It has a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery. A control signal generator 430 for generating and outputting control signals such as .

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. Backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (especially built-in RAM) of the game control device 100 so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal after a predetermined time. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pushed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated. Initialization processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Also, the game control device 100 (main board) is provided with a setting key switch 93 . When the setting key switch 93 is turned on by an operator's rotating operation or the like, the probability setting value (setting value) corresponding to the setting regarding the game condition (game) can be changed. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a set value change switch that can change the probability set value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit, but other game conditions (such as effects) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. For example, the winning probability may be increased as the probability setting value is increased. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute setting changing means (setting changing device 42, setting means) capable of changing settings (probability setting values) relating to game conditions. Instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a unique set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 so that they cannot be operated (inaccessible positions) unless the front frame 12 (body frame) is opened. be done. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 .

As will be described later, when the game machine 10 is turned on (recovery from power failure, power recovery), the game machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON/OFF states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to transition to various states such as a changeable (settable) setting variable state (setting change state, settable state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which probability set values can be confirmed. .

In the present embodiment, the probability setting values are defined, for example, in six stages: probability setting value 1 (setting 1), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most favorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the working setting value (setting) in the working setting value area changes from setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1) to Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5 ) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → . Thus, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For the convenience of explanation, work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to probability setting values 1 to 6, respectively, in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting values and probability setting values are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning them to a numerical range (ie, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (making the working set value and the probability set value the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to six levels. The performance display device 152, which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display, displays the probability setting values for display corresponding to the selected working setting values 0 to 5, for example. etc. In addition, on the front surface of the gaming machine (eg, all-in-one display device 50), information on set values such as probability set values for display (for example, display for reading probability set values 1 to 6) may be displayed. In addition, on the front of the game machine (for example, the collective display device 50), not only during the setting variable state and the setting confirmation state, but also during execution of game control (during execution of game processing described later), the probability setting value for display, etc. Information about setting values may be displayed.

The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores constant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area for the CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers. can be held and stored. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, a part of a plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information This state (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the ready-to-win state.

The ready-to-win state includes a plurality of ready-to-win effects, and the systems (types) of ready-to-win effects with different possibilities (different expectations) of deriving a special result mode (jackpot mode) are normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The degree of expectation (expected value) of the big hit increases in the order of no reach<normal reach<special 1 reach<special 2 reach<special 3 reach<premier reach. Also, the ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when the game becomes a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it becomes a loss). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state has occurred is a state with a high possibility of winning a big hit compared to the case in which the ready-to-win state has not occurred.

In addition, the degree of expectation of the production (notice) suggests the probability that the production will be a big hit when the production is selected, the selection rate of the production when it is a big hit, and the production when it is not a big hit (when it is lost). It can be calculated based on the selectivity or the like.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device, and output the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern, and a small hit pattern for determining a small hit pattern. Design random number, pattern random number per support for determining the later-described time-saving design (stop design per support), variation pattern in special figure variation display game (running time of variation display game in variation display with various reach and reach, etc. A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number or the like for determining the A clock generator is provided for generating a timer interrupt signal and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111a acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a, the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit or lose), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of starting memories Any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables based on the above. Here, the CPU 111a serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to produce a prize ball. control to pay out Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal figure start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning port 36. switch 36a, start-up 2 switch 37a in second start-up winning port 37 (normal variable winning device), winning port switch 35a of general winning port 35, special variable winning device 38, 39 big winning port switch 43 (lower big winning device) It is connected to the opening switch 38a and the upper prize winning opening switch 39a), and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from these switches is input, and a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V is input. A converting interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 and the out ball detection switch 74 . The specific area switch 72 detects passage (V winning) of a game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects game balls passing through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 . The out-ball detection switch 74 may detect only game balls passing through the out port 30b, or may detect all game balls that have been shot into the game area and finished playing.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read into the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the prize winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 , the remaining ball outlet switch 73 , or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126 .

Further, the second input port 123 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame opening detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A signal from a switch 63, a front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., and a signal from a vibration sensor 65 that detects vibration of the game machine 10 are input. .

Also, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

In addition, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating payout abnormality, a shoot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The first input port 122 takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies them to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls (that the tray is full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame). This is a signal indicating whether or not

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as

Also, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each port 122 , 123 , 124 of the input section 120 . The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test-firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. there is A chip enable signal CE output from the game microcomputer 111 is also supplied to a port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 includes a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 for opening the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) for opening the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), an upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) that opens the second special variable winning device 39, and a lever solenoid 86b that operates a lever and opens a specific area 86 for outputting opening/closing data. Two output ports 134 are provided.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 is also provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big win information to the external information terminal 71 . The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game parlor, so that information on the game machine 10 can be sent to an external device. It is ready to be fed to the device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 .

Further, the output unit 130 receives opening/closing data signals of the general electric solenoid 37c and the big winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, and a fourth driver 138c for outputting an external information signal to be supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to an external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via a digit line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500 . The photocoupler 139 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the game microcomputer 111 as in a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code, etc.) output from the second output port 134, and outputs a performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 is provided for driving. In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 consists of a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including dots Dp) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. is not limited to

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another location. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability set value, a role ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), and the number of game balls passed through the winning opening (winning number) and the number of games passing through the out opening 30b. It is the sum with the number of balls. The number of ejected balls can be acquired by counting the signal of the out-ball detection switch 74 or the like. In this embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning opening 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and Special variable winning devices 38, 39 (big winning openings) are included.

The ball output rate is the ratio (percentage) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of fired balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls÷number of discharged balls)×100(%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of winning balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering a prize slot for a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (=so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize mouth. In addition, the role ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big win state and the small win state) obtained by winning the big prize hole out of the total number of prize balls (= big prize hole ratio). , or the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening) (= the so-called role ratio (total role ratio )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) similar to the game microcomputer 111, and a command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 for displaying images on the display device 41. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling sound output for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19 .

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains memory contents even if power is not supplied during a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of performing the operation, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 .

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the display content, instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decoration lamp, controls the motor , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is entered. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to inform the processing status such as the completion of drawing to the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 . The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via the command I / F331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc., transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, the production control command signal (production command) receive as Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. there is

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). Note that the board decoration device 46 may include the aforementioned lamp display device 80 .

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built into the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor inside the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects the initial position etc. and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the production control device 300 having the configuration described above and the electronic components controlled by it, and drives a motor and a solenoid. DC 32 V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC 12 V for driving motors and LEDs, DC 5 V as power supply voltage for command I/F 331, and DC 15 V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. is configured to

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC- A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300 . Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, in the form output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc. signal) to put them in the reset state. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number for judging the hit of the normal game based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal game start gate 34, and stores it in the ROM 111b. is compared with the determination value stored in , and the hit/loss of the normal pattern variation display game is determined.

Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time on the normal pattern display device 53, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is displayed in a stopped manner. If the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal pattern display device 53, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined time (for example, , 3 seconds x 2 times) Control to open is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display device 53 is controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on the starting memory, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game big hit determination The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, the start memory is stored, and based on the start memory, the random value for judging the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit or miss of the special figure 2 variation display game.

And CPU111a of the game control apparatus 100 outputs the control signal (production|presentation control command) containing the determination result of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game and a special figure 2 fluctuation display game to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. Then, after the identification symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, a special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). form.

Also, the effect control device 300 displays a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100 . Furthermore, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, and generates a special game state. Let In the processing for generating the special game state, for example, the CPU 111a controls the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable prize winning device 39 by the big prize winning port solenoid 39b to enable the inflow of game balls into the big prize winning port. .

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. 1 round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) control (cycle game) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (variable probability state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result mode of any special figure variation display game of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game Both are high probability states.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control may be performed to put the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 in the time saving operation state, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 per unit time is more likely than the normal game state in which no special game is performed. In order to control so that the open time is substantially increased, it becomes a general electricity support state. In addition, even in the high-probability state (normal probability state) except for the latent probability state, the normal power supply support is performed in a time-saving state.

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) can be shortened more than usual, and the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game can also be executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (eg, 4 times). In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability, normal pattern hit probability) is set to a high probability higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state. is possible.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern open number of times, the normal pattern open time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, it is easier to win prizes in the normal variable prize winning device 37 than in the normal game state in which special games are not performed, and the number of times the special figure variable display game is executed per unit time is higher than in the normal game state. Can be increased. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Also, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operation state (normal pattern probability is 0). Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transitional state at power-on]
As described above, it shifts to four states (modes) depending on the ON/OFF states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

When the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (settable) (setting change state, settable state). state, setting change mode) (see A1027-A1036 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 6B).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed is entered (Fig. 5B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 6B).

Also, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the state shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode), and the RAM initialization process (RAM clear mode) occurs. process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the game microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 which is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. FIG. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A****".

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address ranges from 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal for prohibiting the firing and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal for prohibiting the shooting, the shooting permission signal is set to the prohibited state, and the shooting of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value to the power delay timer, subordinate control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) program for performing various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting until the is normally activated. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power supply delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, there is no need to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the standby time starts, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to keep operating the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, even without performing such troublesome operations, a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed when the power is turned on can be prevented. can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of timing the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the waiting time (A1008 to A1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus, and determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). If a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), wait until the game machine is powered off.

The game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009) when a power failure has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), and determines whether the value of the timer is 0. (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with troubles at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, if the waiting time is over, the game control device 100 can read and write RWM (Read/Write) such as RAM and EEPROM. memory) is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state of no output) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013 ).

Further, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initialized here. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the content of the initial settings to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150 . For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of performance display device 152 . The game control device 100 sets the number of digits to be used for the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating abnormality of the RAM (RAM 111c in this case) (A1015). Here, a flag indicating an anomaly is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). If it is normal (the result of A1016 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, the game control device 100, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (result of A1017 is "Y"), a checksum for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, game control work area) in the RWM Calculation processing is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal, and the RAM abnormality flag indicating RAM abnormality is cleared (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, the game control device 100, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N", or the result of A1017 is "N"), if the checksum does not match (the result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process during probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. .

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality of the RAM (here, the RAM 111c). It is determined whether or not it is set (A1022). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), the process of confirming the probability setting in steps A1031-A1037 (during setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), steps A1041-1044 RAM initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) or normal power-on (power recovery) processing in steps A1041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1023 is "Y"), the main abnormality that notifies that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) An error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024). The effect control device 300 that has received the command of the main abnormality error notification notifies that the game control device 100 has an abnormality.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 outputs the 7-segment display data (error display data of "E1") at the time of game stop to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 in order to display it on the performance display device 152 (A1025). . Then, ON data of a security signal for notifying the abnormality to an external device (playground internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off. After that, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (turning on both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is performed again to wait for the power to be turned on. It should be noted that, while waiting to repeat the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 and waiting, the interrupt remains prohibited (A1001), timer interrupt processing that can execute special figure 1, 2 game processing and general figure game processing (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, games (special figure fluctuation display game, normal figure fluctuation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, it is assumed that there is an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set even though the setting change operation (turning on both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not executed. , A1024-A1026. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation is not performed. be.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1022 is "Y"), the main abnormality error notification to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) A command is sent to the effect control device 300 (A1024), the 7-segment display data (error display data of "E1") at the time of game stop is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and the RAM is sent to the external device. In order to notify the abnormality, ON data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). It should be noted that, in the same manner as described above, even if the information about the big win remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big win signal are kept off. After that, the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y"), it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct, so the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared. After setting the probability to an initial value (for example, the minimum set value "1") (A1028), a probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1029). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N"), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029). Next, a command during probability setting change is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1030), and the process proceeds to step A1034. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command of changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being changed on the display device 41 or the like.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirming (setting confirming state) process starts. A probability setting confirming flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command during probability setting confirmation is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being confirmed on the display device 41 or the like.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during probability setting change and during probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation (A1034). The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 6B) described later. The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1035). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). If the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, if a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the process at the time of power failure of steps A1055 to A1061 is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and no power failure has occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prohibits the interruption (A1038), and issues a command for ending notification to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1039). In addition, the effect|presentation control apparatus 300 which received the command of the information completion|finish complete|finishes the information that it is during probability setting confirmation or probability setting change.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting has been changed so far, RAM initialization processing (described later) of steps A1042 to A1044 is executed. do. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting has been confirmed until now, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored) normal processing.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041). If the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is "Y"), the RAM areas other than the probability set value area for storing the probability set values are cleared to 0 (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability set values stored in the probability set value area. Furthermore, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure such that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, and the work area and stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. . The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning. be.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). And, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to production control device 300 (production control board) (A1044), it moves to the processing of step A1047.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1041 is "N"), the game control device 100 operates normally because both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off. The processing at the time of power-on (at the time of power restoration) is started, and the power failure restoration processing is executed (A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of restoration from power failure (at the time of power restoration) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirming flag is also cleared here. Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A1046), and step A1047 to process.

In addition, the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command for power failure recovery transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of game machine, special figures 1 and 2 pending Decoration special figure 1 reservation number command and decoration special figure 2 reservation number command indicating the number, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and time saving state, special figure fluctuation in predetermined production mode It includes a number-of-effects information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the command for RAM initialization and the command for power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information commands) are included. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the setting value information command to the production control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The command for RAM initialization includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command displays, for example, a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and informs the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the LED of the board decoration device 46 and the sound of the speaker. Seconds. Further, the command for restoration from power failure includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41 . In addition, the command for specifying the screen is a customer waiting demo command during normal processing for both special figures 1 and 2 (when neither fluctuating nor winning), otherwise it is a recovery screen command.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set.

The bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit permutation pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set them arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers Initial value (big hit design initial value random number), initial value of small winning design random number to determine small winning design (small winning design initial value random number), initial value of support per design random number to determine time saving design (support per design) initial value random number), the initial value of the winning random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit initial value random number), the initial value of the falling lottery random number used in the falling lottery (falling lottery initial value random number), etc.) Save in a predetermined area (A1048) and allow interrupts (A1049). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and destroying the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although it is not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random number, the hit pattern random number (big hit pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, supporter pattern random number), the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate using a generated random number. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the winning symbol random number, winning random number, and falling lottery random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same period as the processing.

In addition, in the winning random number, winning pattern random number, and falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. there is Note that each random number may be updated by a counter with +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear separately without duplication until one round is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the winning symbol random number, winning random number, and falling lottery random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1051), and executes performance display editing processing for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (accessory ratio, payout rate, etc.) may be calculated. Also, when the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). As a result, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power outage has occurred (A1054). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1054 is "N"), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processing of steps A1050 to A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. A decision can be made at the time of re-insertion.

The main processing has been described above. For example, when the setting key switch and the RAM initialization switch are turned on during the processing of steps A1050 to A1054, the determination processing similar to that of step A1021 is performed, and step A1029 Similarly, by setting the probability setting changing flag, it may be possible to switch to the setting variable state (setting change mode) any number of times while the game machine 10 is running.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main process to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process, it becomes equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. Note that when the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an input process of taking in inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being checked (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (result of A1304 is "Y"), probability setting change/confirmation processing for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (the result of A1304 is "N"), based on the output data set in various processes, the actuator such as the solenoid (for example, the big winning opening solenoid 39b) output processing for driving control of LEDs and LED driving control (light emission control) is executed (A1306). Note that when a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (A1307), and furthermore, hits pattern random numbers, hits random numbers, etc. in software. Random number update processing 1 (A1308) for updating , and random number update processing 2 (A1309) for updating the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are executed. After that, monitor whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and monitor errors (front frame and glass frame open) (A1310).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether abnormal ejection of game balls is occurring in the big winning opening (A1311). If the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318), which will be described later, it can be determined that abnormal discharge is occurring. If the abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is "Y"), the processing from step A1315 onwards is executed.

The game control device 100 executes a special figure game process for performing a process relating to a special figure variation display game when abnormal ejection is not occurring (the result of A1311 is "N") (A1312a). Details of the special figure game processing will be described later. Subsequently, a role game process for performing a process for opening the lower prize winning opening of the special variable prize winning device 38 is executed (A1312b). Details of the role game process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern game processing for performing processing related to the normal pattern fluctuation display game (A1313). A segment LED editing process is executed to drive the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (A1314).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes magnet fraud monitoring processing for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and determining whether or not there is an abnormality (A1315). Furthermore, the radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1316).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes vibration fraud monitoring processing for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal ejection monitoring process for monitoring abnormal ejection from the big winning opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, abnormal discharge of the special variable prize winning device 39 is performed based on inputs from the special variable prize winning device 39 from the large winning prize opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning prize opening switch), and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73. is monitored, and an abnormal discharge flag is set when abnormal discharge occurs. In addition, the game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39 passes through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 and is discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1319). Then, performance display monitor control processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1320). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

When the timer interrupt processing returns, the restoration of the interrupt disabled state and the restoration of the register bank designation are automatically performed. Alternatively, a process of returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirm process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (A2402), and the performance display device 152 through the driver 150 (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), set the light-off data as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and output it to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). ).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of probability setting values for display displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among hall officials, etc., if the probability setting values are different but the same big hit probability (and small win probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the big win probability (and small win probability). can be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big win probability (and small win probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1034. Subsequently, ON data of a security signal for informing an external device (amusement center internal management device (hall computer), etc.) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are kept off.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A2407 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting is being checked, the probability setting changing/confirming process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100 is the first timer interrupt processing after the power is turned on when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A2407 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed. (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after power-on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input from the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2409) when it is not the first timer interrupt process after power-on (result of A2408 is "N"). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated.

The game control device 100, when there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (the result of A2409 is "Y"), the working setting value of the working setting value area (RAM 111c or register) in the range of 0 to 5 Along with updating by +1, the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the probability setting value area are updated by +1 corresponding to the working setting value (A2410). As a result, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. When entering the setting change mode, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read out from the probability setting value area (1 subtracted value) may be stored. Note that if the work set value is 5 (probability set value 6) and is updated by +1, it is possible to return to the work set value 0 (probability set value 1). Therefore, the probability setting values 1 to 6 can be repeatedly updated by +1 and switched. Also, every time the probability setting value is updated by +1, or when the game state is switched to a setting variable state, etc., even if a command (setting value information command) that informs the setting value to the effect control device 300 is transmitted. good. Similarly, every time the probability set value is updated by +1, or when the game state is switched to a variable setting state or the like, the test signal may be output to the external test-firing device. It should be noted that these transmissions and outputs are preferably stopped when there is an abnormality such as a main abnormality in the game control device 100 . In addition, when there is a change in the game state such as a probability variable state, a time saving state or a big hit state, or at the start of a special figure fluctuation display game, a command (set value information command) that informs the setting value to the production control device 300 is transmitted. Alternatively, the test signal may be output to an external test-fire test device.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated corresponding to the update of the working setting value. A probability setting value (setting value for work) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (result of A1036 is "Y"), setting for work is performed. A value corresponding to the working set value in the value field may be stored in the probability set value field for the first time. In this way, when a power failure occurs during the setting change (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the probability setting value used for game control, production control, etc. (probability setting stored in the probability setting value area value) can be prevented from being changed with an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1312a) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of special game processing. In the special figure game processing, monitoring of the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and setting of the display of the special figure are performed.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2600). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in a starting winning opening 36 or a normal variable winning device 37 forming a second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and special figure fluctuation display is performed based on the winning. A game result pre-determination is performed to determine a game result based on a prize winning at a stage before the start of the game. Details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring the entry of a game ball into the specific area 86 (V winning opening) is executed (A2601). Details of the specific area switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the upper special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the upper big winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (subtracts only 1) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 update. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100, when the special game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, it corresponds to the special game processing number. A special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to processing is set in the register (A2605). Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the special game processing number (A2607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of variation of the special figure variation display game, sets the variation start of the special figure variation display game, sets the effect, To perform the special figure normal processing to set the information necessary for performing the special figure fluctuation processing (A2608). In addition, the detail of a special figure usual process is mentioned later.

If the game processing number is "1" at step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, etc. During figure fluctuation processing is executed (A2609). For example, in the special figure fluctuation process, set the necessary information such as a symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and set the processing number "2" related to the special figure display process Set and save in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a special figure displaying process for setting information necessary for shifting to the big hit state or the small hit state ( A2610). For example, in the special figure display process, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is operating is set in the condition device operation information area, and the special figure normal processing Set the processing number "0" related to and save it in the special game processing number area. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small win, set necessary information such as a small win fanfare command and a time before opening a small win, and set the processing number "3" related to the small win opening preprocessing to set a special figure. Save in the game processing number area. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A2607, the game control device 100 executes small hit opening pre-processing (A2611). For example, in the small winning opening preprocessing, the opening time of the big winning opening due to the small winning (small winning opening time, for example, 1.6 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, and saved in the upper big winning opening solenoid output data area. On-data is saved, a command during opening of a small win is set as a performance command, a processing number "4" relating to processing during opening of a small win is set, and saved in a special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A2607, the game control device 100 executes processing during opening of the small hit (A2612). For example, in the small hit open process, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 3.0 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "5" related to the small hit remaining ball process is set, and the special figure Save in the game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" at step A2607, the game control device 100 executes small hit remaining ball processing (A2613). For example, in the small hit remaining ball processing, the processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (A2614), then the special figure 1 indicator 51 is executed (A2615). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2616), the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is executed (A2617). Next, a lever solenoid control process (A2618) for controlling the opening operation of the lever solenoid 86b is executed so as to open the lever solenoid 86b during the small hit, and the special figure game process is ended.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start-up switch monitoring process (A2600) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2701), executes hardware random number acquisition processing (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning to the starting winning port 36. (A2703). When there is no winning to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the starting prize-winning port 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not in the right-handed game state (the result of A2704 is "N"), it executes the processing after step A2707. On the other hand, if the gaming state is to hit to the right (the result of A2704 is "Y"), a right hitting instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. - 特許庁

That is, if it is in the general electricity support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state/low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed. . In the case of this embodiment, it is easier to win a prize in the starting prize-winning port 36 with a left-handed hit, and a right-handed hit in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 does not win a prize. Moreover, the game ball does not pass through the normal figure start gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the general electricity support state (time saving state), right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but if there is a prize at the start winning opening 36 during the general electricity support state (that is, during the general electricity support state ), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 sends a right-handed instruction (warning) to the display device 41 etc. by right-handed instruction display. Run with

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), hardware random number acquisition processing is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting winning opening is determined. Judge (A2711). If there is no winning to the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric accessory (normal variable prize winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize to the second start prize winning port (the result of A2711 is "Y"). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state in which the game ball can win (A2712). If the normal electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the normal electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), determines whether the normal electric fraud is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that general electrical fraud is occurring. The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win a game ball when it is closed, and can win a game ball only when it is open. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit value) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) when the electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714). , Executes the special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2715), and ends the starting opening switch monitoring processing. Also, if it is determined at A2713 that the electric power irregularity is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. Special figure starting opening switch common processing, when there is an input of starting opening 1 switch 36a or starting opening 2 switch 37a, is processing that is performed in common for each input.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information about the number of winnings to the monitored starter switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a to a management device outside the gaming machine 10. is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the starting signal output count area of RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting signal output frequency area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, the game control device 100, of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, the update target special figure holding number (starting memory number) corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is the upper limit value (here 4) Determine whether it is less than (A2905). If the special figure pending number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (4 here) (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figures pending to be updated (number of special figures 1 pending or special figures 2 pending number) is updated by +1 (A2906), and the target starting gate winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 as the RWM jackpot random number. Save in area (A2909). Next, the jackpot pattern random number of the special figure variation display game started by detecting the start switch to be monitored is extracted and saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2910). Subsequently, the small winning design random number of the special figure fluctuation display game started by the detection of the start opening switch to be monitored is extracted and saved in the small winning design random number storage area (A2911). In addition, the support winning symbol random number for determining the time saving pattern is extracted, and the support winning symbol random number is saved in the support winning symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2912).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the big win is surely generated by the V winning after the small win, so the small win symbol random number need not be used, and step A2911 is an option and may not be executed. In addition, since there is no small hit result in the special figure 1 variation display game, if the starter switch to be monitored is the starter 1 switch 36a, it is not necessary to extract the small hit symbol random number.

In addition, the small hit design random number, the support per design random number, and the big hit design random number are the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) and the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503) described later. It is used to determine a stop pattern number at the time of a support hit or a stop pattern number at the time of a big win, and a small hit stop pattern pattern corresponding to these stop pattern numbers, a support hit stop pattern pattern or a big win stop pattern pattern.

In this embodiment, in order to avoid confusion, the small winning symbol random number, the support winning symbol random number, and the big winning symbol random number are provided independently. ) are shared, and the small hit pattern (stop pattern number at the time of the small hit, the small hit stop pattern pattern), the support pattern (stop pattern number at the time of the support hit, the support stop pattern pattern), the big hit pattern (at the time of the big hit) Stop symbol number, jackpot stop symbol pattern) may be sorted. That is, when determining a small winning pattern, the range of common random numbers is divided and assigned to each small winning pattern, or when determining a support winning pattern, the range of common random numbers is divided and assigned to each supporting winning pattern. Alternatively, when determining a jackpot pattern, the range of common random numbers may be divided and assigned to each jackpot pattern.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (A2913), and determines the result (game result) of the variation display game in advance. Hold information determination processing (pre-determination processing, prefetch processing) is executed (A2914). In the special drawing reservation information determination process, stop design information (jackpot stop design, small hit stop design, time-saving stop design) Prefetching stop symbol command corresponding to the lost stop symbol) and the first half variation number (pre-reach variation number) and the second half variation number (post-reach variation number) based on the saved variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 Pre-reading variation corresponding to Set the pattern command as a production command. Then, prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting mouth switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations as a production command (A2915), execute the production command setting process (A2916), common to the special figure start mouth switch End the process. In this way, the game control device 100 constitutes preliminary determination means capable of determining in advance the result of the variable display game before the variable display game based on the starting memory is executed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning region of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It constitutes a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory. In addition, the starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning port (starting winning port 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning port (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the specific area switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of specific area switch monitoring processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a small hit is in progress (A3001). If the special game process number is "4" or "5", it can be determined that the small hit is in progress. If it is during a small hit (the result of A3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the condition device is in operation (A3002). If the conditional device operation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is set, it can be determined that the conditional device is in operation.

When the condition device is not in operation (result of A3002 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (A3003). A conditional device indicating that the conditional device is in operation when there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (the result of A3003 is "Y"), that is, when there is a winning (V winning) in the specific area 86 The operating information is saved in the conditional device operating information area (A3004), and the specific area switch monitoring process ends.

If it is not a small hit (the result of A3001 is "N"), if the condition device is in operation (the result of A3002 is "Y"), or if there is no input to the specific area switch 72 (the result of A3003 is " N"), and terminates the specific area switch monitoring process without doing anything.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (A2608) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the role item normal process of the role item game process described later is in progress and the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is 0 (A3200). If the character item is not being processed normally, or if the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is not 0 (the result of A3200 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3215 without starting the special figure variation display game.

The game control device 100 is in the normal process of the accessory, and when the remaining ball counter of the big winning opening is 0 (the result of A3200 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation number (second start memory number ) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is 0 (A3206). Then, if the number of special figures 1 pending is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3211), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (A3211 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (A3212).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares the customer waiting demo command as an effect command (A3213), performs effect command setting processing (A3214), and shifts to the process of step A3215. On the other hand, in step A3211, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (the result of A3211 is "Y"), set "0" relating to special figure normal processing as the processing number (A3215), special figure game processing number The process number is saved in the area (A3216), and the variable pattern discrimination flag area is cleared (A3217). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is "N"), executes the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202), the decoration special corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number Prepare the figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) as an effect command (A3203), and execute the effect command setting process (A3204). Then, the processing shift setting processing during the special figure fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the special figure usual processing is terminated.

In the special figure 2 processing transition setting process, set "1" as the processing number, save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area, clear the customer waiting demonstration flag area, special figure 2 fluctuation control flag Save the fluctuating flag in the area.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the special figure 1 reserved number is not 0 (the result of A3206 is "N"), executes the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207), and the decoration special corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number Prepare the figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 1 reservation number command) as an effect command (A3208), and execute the effect command setting process (A3209). Then, the processing transition setting processing during special figure fluctuation of special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the special figure usual processing is ended.

In the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process of special figure 1, "1" is set as the processing number, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag Save the fluctuating flag in the area.

In this way, by performing the check of the special figure 2 reservation number before the special figure 1 reservation number check, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not 0, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3202) is executed The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 2 pending priority digestion). That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display based on the first start memory. It constitutes a priority control means for executing with priority over the game. In addition, when the special figure 1 change display game is to be executed with priority over the special figure 2 change display game, the determination of step A3201 is performed by special figure 1 reservation number ≠ 0 It suffices to determine whether or not

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3207) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process is executed to set deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A3402). The details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) relating to the special figure 1 variable display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop pattern setting process, the stop pattern number at the time of losing, the support hit, or the big hit, and the losing stop pattern pattern corresponding to this stop pattern number, the support hit stop pattern pattern, or the big hit stop pattern pattern are saved. do. The stop symbol number at the time of the support win or the big win is determined corresponding to the support win symbol random number and the big win symbol random number, respectively.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3405 ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (variation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406). Next, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the fluctuation start information setting process, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed. Also, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the special figure pending number related to the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure variation display game to be started is updated by -1 (decrease by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure usual process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 12 is performed for the second start memory. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first saves a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the variation symbol discrimination area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) relating to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (A3503). Furthermore, the special figure information setting processing which sets the special figure information which is the parameter in order to set fluctuation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the information of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area (A3601). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1), prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3603). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here the first among the special figures 1). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big-hit random number coincides with the big-hit judgment value, big-hit determination processing is executed to determine whether or not the game is a big-hit (A3604).

When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3604) is a big hit (the result of A3605 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 1 area where the losing information is saved in step A3601 with the big hit information. Save (A3606) and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the big hit judgment process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3605 is "N"), optionally, based on the obtained big hit random number value, whether the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit is executed (A3607), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a support hit (A3608). In this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for judging the support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the judgment of the support hit and the big hit judgment). Here, the per support of the special figure fluctuation display game (time saving per) is the time saving result (specific result) that enters the time saving state from the next special figure fluctuation display game, corresponding to this time saving result, The effect control device 300 can display the time saving pattern on the display device 41 as a result of stopping the decoration special figure variation display game.

If the special figure variation display game is a support hit (the result of A3608 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the support hit information by overwriting the support hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A3601. (A3609), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the special figure variation display game is not a support hit (the result of A3608 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated without saving the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is one of "big hit", "support hit (time saving hit)", and "lose", and there is no "minor hit". It should be noted that steps A3607-A3609 are provided as an option, these may be omitted and the result of the special figure 1 variable display game may not be provided with "support per (time reduction per)". Also, it is possible to provide a "small hit" as a result of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 1 area, but since the big hit and the support hit do not overlap, the support hit information may be saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. This process performs the same process as the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 14 for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1), prepare (A3702), and clear the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number 1 reservation) to 0. (A3703). It should be noted that the reservation number 1 use is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory of which digestion order is the first (here, the first among the special figures 2). After that, according to whether or not the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value, small hit determination processing is executed to determine whether or not it is a small hit (A3704).

When the judgment result of the small hit determination process (A3704) is a small hit (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 stores the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3701. is overwritten and saved (A3706), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the special figure variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure variation display game is a support hit based on the acquired big hit random number value. is executed (A3707), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a support hit (A3708). In this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for judging the support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the judgment of the support hit and the big hit judgment). Here, the per support of the special figure fluctuation display game (time saving per) is the time saving result (specific result) that enters the time saving state from the next special figure fluctuation display game, corresponding to this specific result, The effect control device 300 can display the time saving pattern on the display device 41 as a result of stopping the decoration special figure variation display game.

When the special figure variation display game is a support hit (the result of A3708 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the support hit information by overwriting the support hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3701. (A3709), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the support hit determination process (A3707) is not a support hit (the result of A3708 is "N"), optionally the prepared big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. A big hit determination process for determining whether or not may be executed (A3710). When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3710) is a big hit (the result of A3711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit flag 2 area where the losing information is saved in step A3701 with the big hit information. Save (A3712) and end the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3710) is not a big hit (the result of A3711 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is finished while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area.

Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is one of "small hit", "sapo hit (time saving hit)", and "loss". It is also possible to provide a "jackpot" as a result of the two-variation display game.

In the big hit flag 2 setting process, the small hit information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 2 area. , small hit information and support hit information may be saved in the big hit flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3604, A3710) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing will be described. FIG. 16A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. It should be noted that the big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3800), sets the lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A3801), and if the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value, It is determined whether or not there is (A3802). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot. The upper limit judgment value may differ between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the variable probability state) and the high probability state (variable probability state).

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3802 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a loss (other than a jackpot) as the judgment result (A3804), and ends the jackpot judgment processing. do.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (A3803). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "Y"), the decision result is set to be a failure (other than the jackpot) (A3804). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3803 is "N"), a big hit is set as the judgment result (A3805). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit determination process]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3704) in the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 16B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. In addition, the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special figure reservation information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3900), and determines whether the value of the big hit random number of the target (special figure 2) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value. Judge (A3901). It should be noted that the small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. The small hit upper limit judgment value may differ between the low probability state (ordinary probability state other than the variable probability state) and the high probability state (variable probability state).

Of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game becomes a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the judgment of the small hit, but the configuration of providing the unique small hit random number is also possible.

When the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 2) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the deviation as the judgment result (A3903), End the determination process.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A3901 is "N"), the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 2) is the small hit upper limit judgment value It is determined whether or not it is greater than (A3902). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), the deviation is set as the judgment result (A3903). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "N"), a small hit is set as the judgment result (A3904). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process is terminated. In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value are set so that the small hit probability is 1/8 (= 12.5%), but the small hit probability is another value It's okay.

[Support hit determination process]
Next, the details of the support hit determination processing (A3607, A3707) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing will be described. FIG. 16C is a flow chart showing the procedure of the support hit determination process. In addition, the support hit determination process is a process common to the support hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also performed in the special figure pending information determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the support per upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (A7001). Next, the lower limit judgment value of the support hit judgment value is set (A7002), and it is judged whether or not the target jackpot random number value is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7003). It should be noted that the support hit means that the jackpot random number coincides with the support hit determination value corresponding to the set probability value and the game state. The support hit judgment value is a plurality of continuous values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the support hit judgment value, and the support hit upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the support hit judgment value. In the following cases, it is determined to be a support hit. In addition, the per support upper limit judgment value may be different between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the variable probability state) and the high probability state (variable probability state).

Of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game will be a support hit and a big hit, or a support hit and a small hit, the range of the support hit judgment value (the lower limit judgment value per support and the upper limit judgment value per support) Between) does not overlap with the range of the aforementioned big hit determination value and small hit determination value. In this embodiment, the random number for the support hit is not provided independently, and the random number for the support hit is used to determine the hit for the support.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A7003 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a failure (other than the support hit) as the judgment result (A7005), and sets the support hit. End the determination process.

In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (the result of A7003 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value. is determined (A7004). If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A7004 is "Y"), the determination result is set to be off (other than support hit) (A7005). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the support hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A7004 is "N"), the support hit is set as the judgment result (A7006). When the determination result is set, the support hit determination process is terminated.

In the support hit determination process, support hit determination (time reduction determination) is performed by a lottery using a big hit random number value. In the support hit judgment (time reduction judgment) as a lottery, when the big hit random number matches the support hit judgment value (time reduction judgment value), the result of the support hit result (time reduction result, specific result) is obtained and the time reduction is set. be. The support hit determination value is different from the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value.

In addition, in order to make a difference, the probability of winning per support (range of judgment value for support per hit / range of random numbers for jackpot) may be different for each probability setting value, and for convenience, support for each probability setting value The winning probabilities may be the same. Set the winning probability per support so that setting 1 (or low setting side) is easy to win per support, setting 6 (or high setting side) is difficult to win per support, and the disadvantages of low setting are set. It may be relaxed, or it may be set on the contrary to meet the expectation of the player who expects that it is easy to win the support hit on the high setting side. Also, the winning probability per support may be changed monotonously from setting 1 to setting 6, or may not be monotonous, such as changing every two stages of setting. The odd-numbered setting and even-numbered setting may have different winning probabilities per supporter to increase the player's interest in estimating the probability set value.

In addition, the winning probability of the support may be differentiated between the low probability of the jackpot probability (other than during the variable probability state) and the high probability (during the variable probability state), or may be the same for simplification. Even if you set the winning probability per support so that it is easy to win during low probability (other than during variable state) and difficult to win during high probability (during variable state), even if you mitigate the disadvantage during low probability Alternatively, it may be set to match the expectation of a player who expects that he/she can easily win the support prize during a high probability. For example, the winning probability for the supporter may be set so that the winning for the supporter is won only during the low probability (the winning probability for the supporter is zero during the high probability), and the disadvantage during the low probability may be alleviated.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may have different winning probabilities per support for sharpness, or may be the same for convenience. For example, in order to increase the support hit in the general electric support state (time saving state and probability variable state), the winning probability of the support hit in the special figure 2 variable display game may be made larger than the special figure 1 variable display game. Conversely, in order to improve the interest of the game in the normal game state, the probability of winning per support in the special figure 1 variation display game may be made higher than in the special figure 2 variation display game. In short, the probability of winning per support in one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is set to zero, and the support hit only in the other special figure variation display game. may occur.

When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is the support hit result (time saving result), the stop symbol (stop symbol number, stop A time-saving pattern (time-saving pattern number, time-saving pattern pattern) is set as a pattern pattern), and the time-saving state is entered from the next special figure fluctuation display game. That is, in this case, it suddenly becomes a time-saving state without going through a big hit (suddenly time-saving). Also, in this case, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the time saving pattern is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the time saving pattern (decorative time saving pattern) is displayed as the decoration stop pattern by the production control device 300 in the display device 41. .

The time-saving symbols displayed on the display device 41 include, for example, "1, 1, 3" in which only the left symbol and the middle symbol are aligned. There are no restrictions on time-saving patterns if they are decided in advance, but there are regularities such as "1, 2, 3" where the numbers are arranged in order, or "1, 3, 1" where only the left and right patterns are aligned. However, it is preferable because it is easy for the player to remember. A plurality of time saving patterns may be prepared, and the number of special figure fluctuation display games in which the time saving state continues (time saving number of times) may be determined for each time saving pattern.

The lamp display parts 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 emit light in a specific manner as a fourth special pattern (fourth pattern) in the case of the time saving result (time saving pattern), unlike the case of the big hit result or the small hit result. do. For example, the lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit light in a warm color such as red in the case of a big hit result or a small hit result, and in the case of a time saving result (time saving pattern), a neutral color such as green or blue Light may be emitted in a color system or a cool color system (that is, a color other than a warm color system). Moreover, it will be in a light-extinguishing state in the case of a deviation. Therefore, when the time-saving pattern is displayed as the stop pattern, the player can be prevented from erroneously recognizing that a big win has occurred, and the player can easily grasp that the time-saving winning has occurred.

In addition, if the number of special figure fluctuation display games executed after the end of the jackpot state (excluding the number of times in the probability state) reaches a predetermined number of times (so-called ceiling number of times, short-time ceiling), even if you do not win the support Enter a time-saving state (play time). At this time, if the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 are turned off, and if a small win or a big win, they emit light in a warm color. At this time, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 may emit light as a fourth pattern in a cold color in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the time-saving state is entered unless a small win or a big win is made. . The predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times) is, for example, 500 times. In this case, the special figure display device or the display device 41 displays a missing pattern (a time saving pattern may be used) or a small hit pattern (if it is a small hit without a V prize) as a stop pattern, and the next special figure fluctuation display game. Enter the short-time state from. In this case, the time saving pattern displayed on the display device 41 is, for example, "3, 3, 5" in which only the left pattern and the middle pattern are aligned ("1, 1, 3", which is the same as in the case of time saving due to the support hit result). ) and so on.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4001). When the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (result of A4001 is "Y"), the jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (A4003), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area of RWM (A4004). This process selects the type of special result.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51) and the stop design in the display device 41. Then, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired, saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area of RWM (A4007), the fanfare information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the fanfare information area (A4008). These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4009). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state after the end of the big hit (with or without time saving), and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and special figure 2 big hit end process described later. Subsequently, the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbol A to be described later) is saved (A4010). After that, the process proceeds to step A4020.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control device 100 optionally determines whether or not the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (A4011). If the support per flag 1 is per support (the result of A4011 is "Y"), load a random number from the pattern random number storage area per special figure 1 (reservation number 1) (A4012), per special figure 1 support A pattern table is set (A4013). Then, referring to the special figure 1 per support symbol table, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4014). Subsequently, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4015). After that, time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4016), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop design pattern is saved (A4017). After that, the process proceeds to step A4020.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "N"), and when the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (the result of A4011 is "N"), The stop design number is saved in the special figure 1 stop design number area (A4018), and the lost stop design pattern is saved in the stop design pattern area (A4019). After that, the process proceeds to step A4020. It should be noted that if the process (A3607-A3609) related to the support hit in the jackpot flag 1 setting process is not executed, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4001 is "N"), without executing steps A4011-A4017 , to step A4018.

After steps A4010, A4017, and A4019, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 1 command as a production command in a decorative special figure 1 command area (A4020 ). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an effect command setting process (A4021). Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 .

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4022), and clears the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (A4023). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop design setting process is ended. It should be noted that, by the symbol variation control process described above, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol pattern or the stop symbol number (jackpot symbol, time-saving symbol, missing symbol, etc.) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol 1 display device 51.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop design setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, whether or not the small hit information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (A4101). When the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the big hit design random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit design random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 jackpot design table is set (A4103), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area of RWM (A4104). This process selects the type of special result.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball wins V by opening the second special variable winning device 39 with a small hit, and a big win occurs immediately after the small win, so the special figure 2 variable display game is a small win. Even if the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, the big hit pattern random number is loaded. However, it is also possible to load the small winning design random number (A2911) and acquire the stop design number corresponding to the small winning design random number. In this configuration, when the V prize is won (when the result of A3003 in FIG. 10 becomes "Y"), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded, the stop symbol number is acquired, and the processing from step A4107 to A4110 is executed. good.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 2 display device 52) and the stop design in the display device 41. Then, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop pattern number is acquired, saved in the RWM special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (A4107), the fanfare information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the fanfare information area (A4108). These information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4109). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state after the end of the big hit (with or without time saving), and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and special figure 2 big hit end process described later. Subsequently, the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbol BG to be described later) is saved (A4010). After that, the process proceeds to step A4121.

On the other hand, if the small win flag 2 is not a small win (the result of A4101 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big win flag 2 is a big win, that is, the big win information is saved in the big win flag 2 area. (A4111). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A4111 is "Y"), the process moves to step A4102 and later, but the special figure 2 big hit pattern table and the special figure 2 big hit stop pattern information table that are different from the case of the small hit may be used.

When the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4111 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (A4112). When the support per flag 2 is per support (the result of A4112 is "Y"), load the random number from the special figure 2 per support pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4113), and the special figure 2 per support A pattern table is set (A4114). Then, referring to the special figure 2 per support symbol table, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4115). Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4116), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area ( A4117). Thereafter, the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (A4118), and the process proceeds to step A4121.

The game control device 100 determines that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4111 is "N"), and the support hit flag 2 is a support. If it is not hit (the result of A4112 is "N"), save the stop pattern number at the time of loss in the special figure 2 stop pattern number area (A4119), and save the losing stop design pattern in the stop design pattern area (A4120). . After that, the process proceeds to step A4121.

In addition, in this embodiment, since "big hit" is not provided as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game, the process of step A4111 is optional and need not be executed. That is, when the big hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4101 is "N"), the process of step A4112 may be performed without executing step A4111.

After steps A4110, A4118, and A4120, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decoration special figure 2 command as a production command in a decoration special figure 2 command area (A4121 ). By the above processing, the stop pattern corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes an effect command setting process (A4122). The decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 .

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4123), and clears the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) to 0 (A4124). ). In addition, when the small hit design random number (A2911) is extracted, the special figure 2 small hit design random number storage area (for reservation number 1) may be cleared to 0. After that, the special figure 2 stop design setting processing is ended. It should be noted that, by the symbol variation control process described above, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol pattern or the stop symbol number (jackpot symbol, time-saving symbol, lost symbol, etc.) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol 2 display device 52.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning port 36, and the normal variable winning device 37 detects the game ball. A variable display game executing means for executing a special figure 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variable display game execution control means for controlling execution of the variable display game based on the determination result of the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of special figure information setting processing (A3404, A3504) in special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing are explained. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without time saving) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, but the production mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. One production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the like. In addition, based on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, etc., the variation may be directly distributed.

The game control device 100 first sets the first half variation group selection pointer table (A4201), and acquires the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, set the first half fluctuation group selection offset table (A4203), and acquire the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) and the stop pattern pattern (A4204) .

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used for selecting a fluctuation group later. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of loss, so in cases other than loss, the number of holds does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. A variation group includes multiple variation patterns, and when determining a variation pattern, first select a variation group, and then select one variation pattern from this variation group. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the second half variation group selection pointer table (A4207) and acquires the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the presentation mode information (A4208). Next, the second half fluctuation group selection offset table is set (A4209), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop design pattern are acquired (A4210).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the second half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special figure information. End the process. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the presentation mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing fluctuations in the second half (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, only in the case of loss, the rate of reach changes according to the number of holds (the rate of reach is lower when the number of holds is large), so in cases other than losses, the number of holds is distributed in the second half as a result. does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting process (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation form from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half fluctuation pattern is set, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets the variation group selection address table (A4301), acquires the address of the second half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2, prepares (A4302), and selects the target variation pattern random number The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (A4303). In this embodiment, the structure of the second half variation group table is different for winning and losing. Specifically, the size is 1 byte for winning, and 2 bytes for losing. Since the probability of winning is lower than the probability of losing, and even 1 byte is sufficient, the size of the winning is 1 byte from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used at the time of winning. In addition, since the probability of losing is higher than the probability of winning, and it is desired to produce more diverse effects, the size for losing is set to 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure variation display game is a loss (A4304), and if it is a loss (the result of A4304 is "Y"), performs 2-byte distribution processing (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If it is not lost (the result of A4304 is "N"), sorting processing (A4306) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A4307.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the address of the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the allocation, prepares (A4307), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding (for formula 1) to load the variation pattern random number 2 and prepare (A4308). Then, the allocation process is executed (A4309), the second half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired, and saved in the second half variation number area (A4310). Through this processing, the second half variation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the variation allocation information 1 and the second half variation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (A4313), and the fluctuation pattern random number from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for reserved number 1) 3 is loaded and ready (A4314). After that, sorting processing (A4315) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (A4316), and the variation pattern setting processing ends. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte allocation process (A4305) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. The 2-byte allocation process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether or not the head data of the selection table (second half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without sorting (that is, "0") (A4401). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, but the latter half defines only the second half fluctuation selection table in which the second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach" Since there is no need for sorting in the variation group table (for example, some variation group tables when the result is a loss), a sorting value of "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting, is defined at the top. .

Then, if the leading data of the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result. (A4407) to end the 2-byte allocation process. On the other hand, if the top data of the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is not a code without sorting (the result of A4402 is "N"), one sorting specified first in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) Get the value (A4403).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A4403 from the random value prepared in step A4303 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (A4404), and the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "N"), the address of the next distribution value is updated (A4406), and then the process proceeds to step A4403. The following processing is performed. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then a new random value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the random value determined in the previous step A4405. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the second half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection tables (second half fluctuation group tables). Then, if it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the data address corresponding to the sorted result is updated (A4407), and 2 bytes End the sorting process.

[Distribution process]
Next, the details of the sorting process (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the procedure of sorting processing. In the distribution process, based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( It is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

The game control device 100 first selects the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in A4302, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). is a code for no sorting (that is, "0") (A4501). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), or first half variation pattern (first half variation number). However, in the case of a selection table that does not require sorting, the sorting value "0", that is, a code indicating no sorting is specified at the head.

Then, the game control device 100, when the top data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code without sorting (the result of A4502 is "Y"), The address of the data corresponding to the sorting result is updated (A4507), and the sorting process ends. On the other hand, if the leading data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, or first half fluctuation A first distribution value specified in the group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is obtained (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the sorting value obtained in step A4503 from the random numbers prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314 (variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, and variation pattern random number 3). Then, a new random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). If the new random number is not smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "N"), the address of the next sorting value is updated (A4506), and then the process proceeds to step A4503. The following processing is performed.

That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table, first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the randomness determined in the previous step A4505 A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, at least one second half fluctuation selection table, second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), or first half fluctuation pattern (first half Any one of the second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from among the variation numbers).

Then, when the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), it updates the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result. (A4507), the sorting process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the variation display game to be started is the special figure 2 variation display game (A4600a). If the variation display game to be started is not a special figure 2 variation display game but a special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A4600a is "N"), clear the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 ( A4601). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (A4603). Furthermore, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value (A4606), and saves the added value (total variable time value) in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4609), and effect command setting processing is performed (A4610). ). Next, -1 update the special figure pending number corresponding to the variation pattern discrimination flag indicating the variation pattern to be started (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (A4611), the random number storage area corresponding to the variation pattern discrimination flag address is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the free area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

First, when the variation display game to be started is the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A4600a is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or a big win. It is determined whether or not (A4600b). When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or a big hit (the result of A4600b is "Y"), the processing after step A4601 in the same way as when the variation display game to be started is the special figure 1 variation display game to run. It should be noted that, unlike the present embodiment, even if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is per support, the configuration may be such that the processing after step A4601 is executed.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is neither a small hit nor a big hit (the result of A4600b is "N"), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a losing result, A fluctuation time value (total fluctuation time value) corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation count (execution number of special figure 2 fluctuation display game) after the end of the big hit is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A4615).

Therefore, the fluctuation time value of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time value of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit are time values that are not fixed and set by sorting (lottery), The variation time value of the special figure 2 variation display game in the case is a fixed time value set for each special figure 2 variation number after the end of the big hit. That is, the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game is subjected to rotation speed control. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small win or a big win to be a fixed time value.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation time value as an effect command (A4616), and executes the processing after step A4610.

It should be noted that, as in the modification described later, when the support state (support mode, general electricity open pattern) related to the aspect (content) of the general electricity support is variable, the fluctuation time value is the number of special figure 2 fluctuations after the end of the big hit In addition, it may be set corresponding to the support state.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. That is, the game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game A variation command including information about a pattern is mentioned, and a command is transmitted to production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during special figure fluctuation.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 is being changed (the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (A4801). If the special figure 2 is not changing, that is, if the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (the result of A4801 is "N"), set the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4802).

On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or a big hit when the special figure 2 is fluctuating (the result of A4801 is "Y") (A4803) . If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit or a big hit (the result of A4803 is "Y"), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (A4802). The display time (stop display time) is the display time of the stop symbol (stop display) that is the result of the variable display game. It should be noted that unlike the present embodiment, even if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is per support, it may be configured to move to the processing of step A4802.

If the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not a small hit or a big hit, that is, if the result of A4803 is "N"), the game control device 100 displays the number of special figure 2 fluctuations after the big hit (special figure 2 The display time corresponding to the number of executions of the variable display game) is set (A4804).

Therefore, the display time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the display time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit are not fixed based on the stop pattern pattern set by lottery, The display time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the case is fixedly set for each special figure 2 variation number (the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game) after the end of the big hit. It should be noted that it is also possible to fix the display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a big hit.

In addition, as described later, when the support state (support mode, general electricity release pattern) regarding the aspect (content) of the general electricity support is variable, the display time (stop display time) is the special figure 2 fluctuation after the end of the big hit It may be set corresponding to not only the number of times but also the support state.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the display time set in step A4802 or A4804 in the special figure game processing timer area (A4805). Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is during general electricity support (during the time saving state) (A4806). If the general electric power is not being supported (the result of A4806 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A4813. If it is during general electricity support (the result of A4806 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not it is a variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (A4807). If it is a variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A4807 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4810.

If the game control device 100 is a variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A4807 is "N"), the time reduction variation number 2 is updated by -1 (decrease by 1) (A4808), and the time reduction variation It is determined whether or not the number of times 2 is 0 (A4809). When the time reduction variation number 2 is 0 (result of A4809 is "Y"), the time reduction end setting process for setting the end of time reduction is executed (A4812).

Game control device 100, when the number of times of shortening fluctuations 2 is not 0 (the result of A4809 is "N"), updates the number of times of shortening fluctuations 1 by -1 (reduces only 1) (A4810), the number of times of shortening fluctuations 1 is 0 (A4811). If the time reduction variation count 1 is not 0 (the result of A4811 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A4813. On the other hand, when the time reduction variation number 1 is 0 (the result of A4811 is "Y"), the time reduction end setting process for setting the end of time reduction is executed (A4812). After that, an effect mode information check process, which will be described later, is executed (A4813).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a process shift setting process during special figure display (A4814). In the special figure displaying process shift setting process, the process number "2" related to the special figure displaying process is set, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area, and the special figure 1 indicator 51 is related to the fluctuation stop. The stop flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area, and the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. After that, the process during special figure fluctuation ends.

[Time saving end setting processing]
Next, the details of the time saving end setting process (A4812) in the special figure fluctuation process will be described. FIG. 25A is a flowchart showing a procedure of time saving end setting processing.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal relating to the time saving end in the external information output data area of the RWM (A4901). Here, the signal related to the time saving end is off data of the big hit 2 signal. As a result, a signal relating to the end of time saving is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71 .

In addition, in the normal game state, the opening time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is very short or the winning probability of the normal pattern variable display game is very low, so there is no winning to the normal variable prize winning device 37 and the second start memory is does not occur. For this reason, when the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 hold) remains as a remaining hold at the time of the time saving end, the output of the on data of the jackpot 2 signal is continued (in this way ), when the variable display of the special figure variable display game related to the last remaining hold stops, the off data of the jackpot 2 signal (signal related to the time saving end) may be output to the external device.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the time saving end in the test signal output data area of RWM (A4902). As a result, a signal relating to the end of time saving is output as a test signal to the test-firing test apparatus. The signal related to the time saving end here is, for example, off data of the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, off data of the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, normal electric role They are OFF data of the object 1 open extended state signal and OFF data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. Then, save the number without time saving in the game state display number area of RWM (A4903), save the low probability & no time saving flag in the normal game mode flag area of RWM (A4904), RWM special game Save special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the mode flag area (A4905).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the RWM time reduction variation frequency 1 region in which the time reduction variation frequency 1 is stored (A4906), and the RWM time reduction variation frequency 2 region in which the time reduction variation frequency 2 is stored. is cleared (A4907). Then, the signal related to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A4908), and the number in the state of hitting to the left is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area of the RWM (A4909).

Thereafter, the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state determination area of the RWM (A4910). Here, the normal base state information is a value indicating a normal game state, which is a period during which a base value (ball output rate in a normal game state) is calculated. After that, the time saving end setting process is ended.

Thus, by executing the time saving end setting process, appropriately from the time saving state (state with low probability of special figure and general electricity support) to normal game state (state without special figure low probability and general electricity support) can be transferred.

[Production mode information check process]
Next, the details of the production mode information check process (A4813) in the special figure fluctuation process will be described. FIG. 25B is a flow chart showing the procedure of effect mode information check processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5001). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of A5001 is "Y"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and the effect mode is selected to continue until the next big hit, for example.

In addition, when the next mode transition information is not an update no code (the result of A5001 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines the remaining number of rotations of the effect, which is the executable number of times of the special figure fluctuation display game until the change of the effect mode. is updated by -1 (A5002), and it is determined whether or not the number of rotations remaining for the effect has become 0 (A5003). Here, the number of rotations remaining in the effect is updated by -1 only when the main special figure variation display game is executed this time, but is also updated by -1 when it is not the main variation display game. Configurations are also possible.

One of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game is determined as the main variation display game according to the game state and the like. For example, the main variation display game (main variation display game) is the one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game that is frequently executed, and the variation display game that is not the main variation display game (secondary variation display Game) is the one of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game that is not frequently executed. In addition, the game control device 100 and/or the effect control device 300 may store information (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating a main variable display game according to the game state or the like.

If the effect remaining rotation number is not 0 (the result of A5003 is "N"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, when the number of rotations remaining in the production becomes 0 (the result of A5003 is "Y"), that is, when the production mode is shifted from the next special figure variation display game, the production mode information address table is set (A5004). , acquires the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the production mode number of the production mode to be transferred, saves it in the production mode number area in the RWM (A5006), and acquires the production remaining rotation number (initial value) of the production mode to be transferred. Then, it is saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area in the RWM (A5007), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired, and saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A5008).

In addition, when the production mode is shifted by the end of the time saving state (time reduction variation number 1 or 2 = 0), the production remaining number of rotations (initial value) of the production mode to be shifted is the specified remaining number of reservations (for example, 4 to 9). The remaining pending number is the number of special figures 2 pending (remaining pending) that are digested after the time saving state ends, and is the number of special figures 2 fluctuations after the time saving ends. Remaining suspension is caused by winning a prize to the normal variable winning device 37 that is opened by a normal game hit during the time saving state. In this way, it is possible to set the remaining reservation digestion mode (FIG. 54) as a production mode corresponding to the digestion of the remaining reservation (special figure 2 reservation, special figure 2 start memory).

Alternatively, when the production mode is transferred when the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 opened by the normal game in the time saving state (corresponding to the latter half opening described later) is completed, the production of the production mode to be transferred remains. You may set the number of rotations (initial value) to the special figure 2 reservation number at that time. As a result, after the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, which is opened by the normal game in the time saving state, is completed, the mode after the normal electric open end (Fig. 54A) is set as a production mode corresponding to the digestion of the special figure 2 pending. Can be set. Furthermore, in this case, the number of production remaining rotations (initial value) of the production mode to be shifted by the end of the time saving state (the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 or 2 = 0) is a predetermined value according to the number of times of time reduction (for example, the number of times of time reduction from 6 subtracted value) to set the pre-commercial power disconnection mode (FIG. 54A).

Furthermore, when the production mode is switched by the end of the time saving state (time reduction variation number 1 or 2 = 0), the production remaining rotation number (initial value) of the production mode to be shifted is the special figure 2 reservation number at that time or It may be set to a predetermined number below the special figure 2 reservation number. In this way, as a production mode corresponding to the digestion of the special figure 2 reservation number or the predetermined number of remaining reservations (special figure 2 reservation, special figure 2 start memory) at the end of time saving, the remaining reservation digestion mode (Fig. 54B) can be set. The number of remaining rotations (initial value) of the production mode that transitions after the time-saving occurrence remaining hold digestion mode, and the number of remaining holds digested in the time-saving occurrence remaining hold digestion mode from the prescribed remaining hold number (for example 10) Can be set to the subtracted value (excess pending number). In this way, it is possible to set the excess retention digestion mode (FIG. 54B) as the production mode after the time saving remaining retention digestion mode.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (including information on the probability state, information on the presence or absence of time saving, and information on the production mode) corresponding to the newly set production mode number as a production command (A5009). , determines whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (A5010). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (result of A5010 is "Y"), that is, if the probability information command has not changed, the presentation mode information check process is terminated.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area when power is restored (result of A5010 is "N"), save the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (A5011 ), an effect command setting process for setting the probability information command as the effect command is executed (A5012).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number as an effect command (A5013), and executes an effect command setting process (A5014). Thereby, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 can acquire the production|presentation remaining rotation speed. Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count 2 is prepared as an effect command (A5015), and effect command setting processing (A5016) is executed. Thereby, the production control device 300 can acquire the time shortening variation frequency 2 . Note that the game control device 100 may similarly prepare the time reduction variation number 1 as an effect command and execute the effect command setting process.

Next, when the new effect mode number is acquired in step A5006, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (A5017), and if it is not the left-handed mode (The result of A5017 is "N"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In addition, in the case of the left-handed mode (the result of A5017 is "Y"), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A5018), the effect command setting process is executed (A5019), and the effect mode End the information check process.

In addition, in the above, regardless of the determination result (A5003) as to whether or not the remaining number of rotations in the production is 0, the number of production rotations command corresponding to the updated remaining number of rotations in the production (A5002) and the updated time A time shortened variation count command corresponding to the shortened variation counts 1 and 2 (A4808, A4810) may also be prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process may be executed.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (A2610) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during special figure display. FIG. 26A shows the first half of the processing during special figure display, and FIG. 26B shows the second half of the processing during special figure display.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the variation of the special figure 1 is executed this time (A5101). That is, it is determined whether or not the display of the stop symbol (stop display) is related to the special figure 1 variable display game. If the variation of the special figure 1 is executed this time (the result of A5101 is "Y"), load the jackpot flag 1 (A5102), clear the jackpot flag 1 area (A5103), and load the jackpot flag 1 is a big hit (A5104).

When the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A5104 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is in operation in the condition device operation information area. (A5105), the process proceeds to step A5106. When the loaded jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A5104 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5111.

Then, the game control device 100 executes a special figure normal process transition setting process (A5106). In the special figure normal processing shift setting process, 0 is set as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area, and the fluctuation symbol determination flag area is cleared. After that, the processing during special figure display is ended.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 loads the big hit flag 2 (A5107) and clears the big hit flag 2 area ( A5108). It is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (A5109). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A5109 is "Y"), the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is in operation is saved in the condition device operation information area (A5110), and the processing of step A5106 transition to If the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A5109 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit or a loss, the process moves to step A5111.

In addition, in this embodiment, since "jackpot" is not provided as a result of the special figure 2 variation display game, the processing from step A5107 to A5110 is optional and need not be executed. That is, after step A5101, the processing of step A5111 may be performed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is currently in the special figure high probability (during the variable probability state) (A5111). When not in the special figure high probability (the result of A5111 is "N"), whether there is a ceiling reached flag indicating that the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed has reached the ceiling number (time reduction ceiling) Determine (A5112).

If there is no ceiling reached flag (the result of A5112 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the ceiling counter value of the RWM ceiling counter area by +1 (increases by 1) (A5113). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the special figure variation display game (including the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game) has reached the ceiling number (A5114). For example, the ceiling count is 500 times. When the ceiling number of times is reached (the result of A5114 is "Y"), the ceiling time saving activation flag indicating that the ceiling time saving occurs and the ceiling reached flag indicating that the ceiling number of times has been reached are set (on) (A5115 ). In addition, it is also possible to configure the ceiling time reduction activation flag and the ceiling reached flag collectively as one flag.

The ceiling reached flag is cleared when a big win occurs, but is not cleared unless a big win occurs. Therefore, once reaching the ceiling number of times, if the time saving number of times ends without hitting the jackpot, the ceiling reached flag remains set (on), henceforth, the ceiling time saving will not occur, and the ceiling The counter value is also not updated.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is in the special figure high probability (in the probability variable state) (the result of A5111 is "Y"), if there is a ceiling reached flag (the result of A5112 is "Y"), the number of times of ceiling (The result of A5114 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (A5116).

Next, when the small win flag 2 indicates a small win (the result of A5116 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a small win fanfare command as a production command (A5117), and executes production command setting processing. (A5118). Then, the decoration special figure 2 command is loaded as a production command from the decoration special figure 2 command area, prepared (A5119), and the production command setting process is executed (A5120). After that, a small hit opening pre-processing shift setting process is executed (A5121), and the process during special figure display is ended.

In the small hit opening pre-processing transition setting process, 3 is set as the processing number related to the small hit opening pre-processing, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area, and the time before the small winning opening (for example, 300 ms) is set as a special figure. Save in the game processing timer area. In addition, a signal relating to the start of a small winning game (for example, turning on a signal for big winning 1 (output with a big winning and a small winning)) is saved in the external information output data area.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit, that is, if the result of A5116 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is a ceiling time saving activation flag indicating that the ceiling time saving occurs. (A5122). If there is a ceiling time saving activation flag (the result of A5122 is "Y"), save the initial value that will be the ceiling time saving number (time saving number of times due to ceiling time saving) in the time reduction fluctuation number 1 area and the time reduction fluctuation number 2 area (A5123 ). The initial values (for example, 704 times and 700 times) of the time reduction variation frequency 1 and the time reduction variation frequency 2 in the case of the ceiling time reduction described above are saved here. The initial value may be determined by lottery. Subsequently, in order to generate a time saving state due to ceiling time saving, support operation setting processing is executed (A5127), special figure normal processing transition setting processing is executed (A5128), and processing during special figure display is completed. In the special figure normal process shift setting process, the process number "0" relating to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

Game control device 100, when there is no ceiling time reduction activation flag indicating that ceiling time reduction occurs (the result of A5122 is "N"), the support hit flag 2 determines whether or not support hit (A5124). Then, if the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (the result of A5124 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (A5125).

If either the support hit flag 1 or the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (the result of A5124 or A5125 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the initial value corresponding to the time reduction determination data to the time reduction variation count. 1 area and 2 areas for shortened variation count (A5126). The initial values (for example, 34 times and 30 times, or 104 times and 100 times) of the time reduction fluctuation number 1 and the time reduction fluctuation number 2 in the case of the support hit result (sudden time reduction) are saved here It will be. Subsequently, in order to generate a time saving state (sudden time saving) by the time saving pattern, the support operation setting process is executed (A5127), the special figure normal process transition setting process is performed (A5128), and the special figure displaying process is ended. .

In addition, the time reduction determination data is set corresponding to the stop design number in the special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) and the special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503). The value (that is, the number of times of time saving) will be determined by lottery based on the pattern random numbers per support.

If both the support hit flag 1 and the support hit flag 2 are not support hit (the result of A5124 and A5125 is "N"), the game control device 100 does not execute the support operation setting process for setting the time saving, Usually, the process transition setting process is executed (A5128), and the process during special figure display is terminated.

As described above, in the processing during special figure display, setting of time saving such as setting of time saving number of times (that is, initial value of time saving variation number of times) is executed with respect to ceiling time saving and sudden time saving. In addition, time saving setting such as setting of the number of times of working hour saving is executed in the jackpot end processing with respect to time saving by the big hit, that is, time saving starting from the end of the big hit state.

In addition, the special figure display process is executed when the special figure game processing timer set by the stop display time (A4805) reaches 0 (A2604, A2610), so the stop result of the special figure fluctuation display game It will be executed when the display ends (or when it ends: including when it ends or just before it ends). Therefore, when the display of the stop result of the special figure fluctuation display game ends (substantially equal when starting the next special figure fluctuation display game if it starts), the number of time reduction fluctuations (A5123, A5126) is set, Time saving state due to ceiling time saving and sudden time saving starts.

[Support operation setting process]
Next, the details of the support operation setting process (A5127) in the process during special figure display will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the support operation setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the time saving start in the external information output data area (A5701). As a result, at the sudden start of time saving due to ceiling time saving and time saving pattern (sapo hit) due to reaching the ceiling number of times, a signal related to time saving start is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and eventually to an external device (hall computer, etc.). Here, the signal related to the time saving start is the ON data of the big hit 2 signal. Then, the timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved in the time saving signal control timer area (A5702). This timer initial value becomes the time for outputting the big win 3 signal by the later-described external information editing process.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the time saving start in the test signal output data area (A5703). As a result, at the start of the ceiling time saving and sudden time saving, a signal relating to the start of time saving is output as a test signal to the test firing test apparatus. The signal related to the time saving start here is, for example, the ON data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, the ON data of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, the ON data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the normal symbol 1 fluctuation ON data of the time shortening state signal and ON data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal. Then, save the number with short working hours in the game state display number area (A5704), save the high probability & short working hours flag in the general game mode flag area (A5705), and save the special figure in the special game mode flag area A time saving flag is synthesized (A5706). Subsequently, a signal relating to right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5707), and a right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5708).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the production mode information address table corresponding to the ceiling time saving or sudden time saving (A5709), special figure 1 stop design setting process (A3403) or special figure 2 stop design setting process (A3503) The address of the table corresponding to the set effect mode transition information is acquired (A5710), and the effect mode number (number of effect mode) of the effect mode is acquired based on the table and saved (A5711). As a result, you can select the production mode that shifts to the beginning of the ceiling time saving and sudden time saving.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of rotations remaining in the effect mode (initial value) based on the table (A5712). For example, the production remaining number of rotations (initial value) is the number of times of reduction in time (initial value of the number of times of reduction in time 1 or the number of times of reduction in time 2). Thereby, for example, the same production mode can be continued until the time saving ends.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the next mode transition information, which is the information about the transition to the next mode of the production mode during the ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction, based on the table (A5713). Then, the special game mode flag and the probability information command corresponding to the production mode number newly set this time are prepared as production commands (A5714), and the prepared probability information commands are saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (A5715 ), an effect command setting process for setting the probability information command as the effect command is executed (A5716). Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state, the presence or absence of time saving (general electric support), and the presentation mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number as an effect command (A5717), and executes an effect command setting process (A5718). Then, the time reduction variation count command corresponding to each of the time reduction variation count 1 and the time reduction variation count 2 (here, the initial value of the time reduction count) is prepared as an effect command (A5719), and the effect command setting process is executed. (A5720).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction determination data area (A5721), clears the effect mode transition information area (A5722), and ends the jackpot ending process.

[Accessory game processing]
Next, details of the accessory game process (A1312b) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the accessory game process. In the accessory game process, the overall process relating to the big win state is controlled.

The game control device 100 first executes a lower prize winning opening switch monitoring process (A5601). In the lower big winning opening switch monitoring process, detection of game balls by the count switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the value of the role product game processing timer by -1 (subtracts only 1) if it is not 0 (A5602). By updating -1, the accessory game processing timer counts the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. Note that the minimum value of the accessory game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether or not the role game processing timer is 0 (A5603). If the accessory game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A5603 is "N"), the accessory game processing is terminated.

When the role game processing timer is 0 (the result of A5603 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 corresponds to the role game processing number. A role product game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to processing is set in a register (A5604). Further, using the role product game sequence branch table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the role product game process number is obtained (A5605). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the accessory game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the accessory game processing number (A5606).

If the game processing number is "0" at step A5606, the game control device 100 executes the usual accessory processing for making settings for the start of the big win (A5607). For example, in the role product normal processing, in a predetermined case, the processing number "1" relating to the fanfare mid-process is set and saved in the role product game processing number area. The details of the accessory normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29 .

If the game processing number is "1" at step A5606, the game control device 100 executes processing during fanfare (A5608). For example, in the mid-fanfare process, the process number "2" relating to the mid-interval process is set and saved in the role game process number area.

If the game processing number is "2" at step A5606, the game control device 100 executes processing during the interval (A5609). For example, in the interval process, the number of rounds is updated by +1, the opening time of the lower grand prize opening is saved in the accessory game processing timer area, the ON data is saved in the lower grand prize opening solenoid output data area, and the round command is issued. It is set as a performance command, a process number "3" relating to the process during jackpot opening is set, and saved in the accessory game process number area.

If the game processing number is "3" at step A5606, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if the final round, During the big hit open processing for setting information necessary for performing the big hit remaining ball processing is executed (A5610). For example, in the process during the opening of the big winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command are set, a process number "4" relating to the jackpot remaining ball process is set, and saved in the role game process number area.

If the game processing number is "4" at step A5606, the game control device 100 sets the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big winning round is the final round, A big hit remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the big hit end process is executed (A5611). For example, in the jackpot remaining ball processing, if the final round is not the last round, the interval time is saved in the role game processing timer area, and the processing number "2" relating to the processing during the interval is set and saved in the role game processing number area. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the role product game processing timer area, the processing number "5" relating to the jackpot end processing is set, and saved in the role product game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" at step A5606, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the character normal process (A5612). For example, in the jackpot end processing, based on the time reduction determination data including the information of the presence or absence of the time saving state after the jackpot end (with or without time saving), after the jackpot state ends Information is set, a process number "0" relating to the role product normal processing is set, and saved in the role product game processing number area.

[Routine processing of accessories]
Next, the details of the character product normal processing (A5607) in the aforementioned character product game processing will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the accessory normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the condition device is in operation (A5801). When the condition device operation information is saved in the condition device operation information area (A3004, A5005, A5010), that is, there is jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 or jackpot flag 2, or the specific region 86 (V winning If there is a winning (input to the specific area switch 72, V winning), it can be determined that the condition device is in operation. If the conditional device is not in operation (the result of A5801 is "N"), the usual character processing is terminated.

When the conditional device is in operation (result of A5801 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the round number upper limit area (A5802). Subsequently, the round LED output pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is saved in the round LED output pointer area (A5803), the probability information command (normal medium) is prepared as an effect command (A5804), and the effect command setting process is executed. Execute (A5805).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a fanfare command corresponding to the fanfare information as an effect command (A5806), and executes effect command setting processing (A5807). Then, load the decoration special command (decoration special command 1 command or decoration special command 2 command) from the decoration special command area of the special command that became the big hit or small hit this time, prepare it as a production command (A5808), and produce Command setting processing is executed (A5809).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the condition device actuation information in the external information output data area (A5810), and saves the signal corresponding to the condition device actuation information in the test signal output data area (A5811). . Then, the initial value is saved in the round number area (A5812). The initial value is 0 when the conditional device is in operation according to the jackpot information, and is 1 when the conditional device is in operation due to winning in the specific area 86 (V winning).

Next, the game control device 100 executes processing transition setting processing during fanfare (A5813), and ends the normal processing for the accessory. For example, in the mid-fanfare process transition setting process, "1" is set as the process number relating to the mid-fanfare process, the process number is saved in the role game process number area, and the fanfare time is saved in the role game process timer area. .

In the process transition setting process during the fanfare, the game control device 100 has a time shortening variation frequency 1 area in which the time shortening variation frequency 1 is stored, a time shortening variation frequency 2 area in which the time shortening variation frequency 2 is stored, and a ceiling counter value Clear the ceiling counter area where the ceiling counter area is stored, the ceiling time saving activation flag area where the ceiling time saving activation flag is stored, and the ceiling reached flag area where the ceiling reached flag is stored. In addition, the normal low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area, and the special low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special game mode flag area.

Furthermore, in the fanfare mid-process transition setting process, the game control device 100 turns on a signal related to the start of a big win (special game state) (for example, turns on a big win 1 signal (outputs with a big win and a small win), turns on a big win 4 signal (big win )) is saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 variation Time shortening state signal OFF, normal pattern 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, normal electric accessories 1 open extension state signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (A5612) in the aforementioned accessory game processing will be described. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot ending process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the time reduction determination data (A4009, A4109) is data with time reduction (A6001). Data with time saving indicates that it will be in a time saving state (general electric support state) after the end of the jackpot state. The data without time saving indicates that the time saving state (general electric support state) does not occur after the jackpot state ends.

When the time reduction determination data is data without time reduction, the game control device 100 executes jackpot end setting processing 1 in order to shift to the normal game state after the end of the big win (A6002), and the time reduction determination data is data with time reduction. In the case of data, a jackpot end setting process 2 is executed in order to shift to a time saving state (general electric support state) after the jackpot ends (A6003).

The game control device 100 sets the effect mode information address table (A6004), and acquires the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information (A4010, A4110) set in the stop 1 symbol setting process or the stop 2 symbol setting process. (A6005), Acquire and save the production mode number (production mode number) of the production mode set after the end of the jackpot state (A6006). As a result, it is possible to select the performance mode to be shifted after the big hit is completed.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of rotations remaining in the effect mode (initial value) set after the end of the special game state (A6007). For example, the number of remaining production rotations (initial value) is the number of times of time saving (initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations) or the total number of times of time saving and the prescribed remaining number of reservations (for example, 10 times). Thereby, for example, after the big hit ends, the same production mode can be continued until the time saving ends or until all the special figure 2 variable display games related to the remaining reservation are executed.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information about transition to the next mode of the presentation mode set immediately after the end of the jackpot state (A6009). Then, the special game mode flag and the probability information command corresponding to the production mode number newly set this time are prepared as production commands (A6009), and the prepared probability information commands are saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A6010 ), an effect command setting process for setting the probability information command as the effect command is executed (A6011). Here, the probability information command includes the probability state after the end of the jackpot state, the presence or absence of time saving (general electric support), and the information of the production mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number as an effect command (A6012), and executes an effect command setting process (A6013). Then, prepare a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction variation count (here, the initial value of the time reduction count, for example, 5 times or less or 99 times) as an effect command (A6014), and execute the effect command setting process (A6015).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the effect mode transition information area (A6016), executes the role item normal process transition setting process (A6017), and ends the jackpot end process. In the character object normal processing transition setting processing, in order to shift to the character object normal processing, the processing number "0" related to the character object normal processing is set, the processing number is saved in the character object game processing number area, and the condition device operation information is set. Clear the area and clear the time reduction judgment data area.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6002) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. FIG.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (A6201), and saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6202). For example, as the external information to be output to the external device via the external information terminal 71, the off data of the jackpot 1 signal, the jackpot 2 signal off data, the jackpot 3 signal off data, and the jackpot 4 signal off data are output as external information. Save to data area. Since the jackpot end setting process 1 is a process when there is no time saving after the jackpot state ends, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off. The normal number is saved in the game state display number 2 area as the display data of the second game state display portion 58 (lamp D17) of the collective display device 50 (A6203).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability flag in the normal game mode flag area (A6204), and saves the no special figure time saving flag in the special game mode flag area (A6205). Then, the time shortening fluctuation number area is cleared (A6206), and the number in the left-hand hitting state is saved in the game state display number 1 area as the display data of the first game state display section 57 (lamp D7) of the collective display device 50. (A6207), end the jackpot end setting process 1.

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6003) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second jackpot end setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the big win in the external information output data area (A6401), and saves a signal regarding the end of the big win in the test signal output data area (A6402). For example, as the external information to be output to the external device through the external information terminal 71, the OFF data of the jackpot 1 signal, the OFF data of the jackpot 3 signal, and the OFF data of the jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. Then, the signal regarding the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (A6403), and the signal regarding the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (A6404). Since the jackpot end setting process 2 is a process in the case of entering the time saving state (general electric support state) after the jackpot state ends, the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area as a signal related to the start of the time saving. (In this embodiment, since the 2 jackpot signals are output from the jackpot state, the ON state of the 2 jackpot signals continues).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number of time saving in the game state display number 2 area as the display data of the second game state display section 58 (lamp D17) of the collective display device 50 (A6405), and A high probability flag is saved in the mode flag area (A6406), and a special figure time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A6407).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has become a big hit after the end of the time saving, that is, whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game related to the remaining hold has become a big hit (A6408 ). If the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit or if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit during the time saving state (the result of A6408 is "N"), the stop pattern pattern ( Alternatively, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of time reduction) corresponding to the stop pattern number, patterns A to F described later) is saved (A6409), and the processing after step A6411 is executed. Here, the time reduction variation count initial value (time reduction count) is the initial value of the time reduction variation count 2 (first predetermined number of times described later). In addition, in step A6409, the initial value of the time reduction variation number 1 (the second predetermined number described later) is also saved in addition to the time reduction variation number initial value (time reduction number of times) for the time reduction variation number 2. For example, the initial value of the time shortening variation number 1 may be the initial value of the time shortening variation number 2 plus the maximum value (eg 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a big hit after the end of the time saving, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game related to the remaining hold becomes a big hit (the result of A6408 is "Y") , saves the initial value of the time reduction variation frequency (the number of time reductions, 99 here) in the time reduction variation frequency area (A6410). Also here, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of time reduction) is the initial value of the number of times of reduction fluctuation 2 (first predetermined number of times described later). In addition, in step A6410, in addition to the time reduction variation frequency initial value (time reduction frequency) for the time reduction variation frequency 2, the initial value of the time reduction variation frequency 1 (second predetermined frequency described later) is also saved. For example, the initial value of the time shortening variation number 1 may be the initial value of the time shortening variation number 2 plus the maximum value (eg 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number).

After that, the game control device 100 corresponds to the stop symbol pattern (or the stop symbol number, symbols AG described later), the support state (support mode, normal power open pattern) which is the state (mode) of the general electrical support ) is saved in the support status area (A6411). Note that the processing of step A6411 is an option, and is executed when the support state regarding the mode (content) of the general electricity support is variable, as in a modification example described later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number in the right hitting state in the game state display number 1 area as the display data of the first game state display section 57 (lamp D7) of the collective display device 50 (A6412), and A hitting instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A6413), an effect command setting process is executed (A6414), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated.

[General map game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal game processing. In the general-purpose game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the overall processing related to the general-purpose variation display game is controlled, and the display of the general-purpose pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes general electric winning switch monitoring processing for monitoring input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7602). The details of the general electric winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the normal game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (subtracts only 1) (A7603). In addition, the minimum value of the general-purpose game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

The game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already timed up, the normal game processing number A general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number based on the set general-purpose game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the general-purpose game processing number, and game branch processing is executed according to the general-purpose game processing number (A7607).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, sets the start of fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, sets the effect, Execute normal pattern normal processing to set information necessary for performing processing during normal pattern fluctuation (A7608). The details of the normal pattern normal processing will be described later.

In addition, if the game processing number is "1" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern fluctuation processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern display processing ( A7609). For example, in the process during normal map fluctuation, in order to shift to the process during normal map display, set "2" as the game processing number and save it in the normal map game processing number area, Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, if the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 sets the normal pattern open time, performs normal pattern winning process. (A7610). For example, in the normal pattern display processing, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a hit, in order to shift to the normal pattern winning process, "3" is set as the game processing number and the normal pattern game processing number area is set. On the other hand, in the case of a failure, in order to shift to the normal game process, the game process number is set to "0" and saved in the normal game process number area.

Further, if the game processing number is "3" at step A7607, the game control device 100 continues the processing during normal game winning, or sets information necessary for performing normal electric remaining ball processing. Processing during drawing is executed (A7611). For example, in the normal per game process, after setting for opening the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, "4" is set as the game process number to shift to the normal electric remaining ball process. Save in normal game processing number area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "4" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal electric remaining ball processing for setting information necessary for performing normal per pattern end processing (A7612 ). For example, in the normal electric remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the end processing for the normal game, set "5" as the game processing number and save it in the normal game processing number area, and the normal game ending time Save in the processing timer area.

In addition, when the game processing number is "5" at step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal pattern per end processing for setting information necessary for performing normal pattern normal processing (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the end processing for the general pattern, in order to shift to the normal processing for the general pattern, "0" is set as the game processing number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the normal pattern fluctuation by the normal pattern display device 53 (A7614). After that, the normal pattern (normal pattern) fluctuation control processing by the normal pattern display device 53 is executed (A7615), and the normal pattern game processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up, executes the processing after step A7614.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. The gate switch monitoring process is executed at step A7601 in the normal game process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the game state is for hitting to the right (A7702). The gaming state for hitting to the right is a jackpot state and a time-saving state (general electric support state). If the game state is to hit to the right (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A7705. If the game state is not right-handed (result of A7702 is "N"), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed instruction notification command executes the notification (warning) to instruct left-handed hitting on the display device 41 or the like by left-handed instruction display.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the normal pattern reservation number and determines whether or not the normal pattern reservation number is less than the upper limit value (1 in this embodiment) (A7705). When the number of reserved normal patterns is less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the normal pattern fluctuation display game is fluctuating (executing) or in a per normal pattern state. It is determined whether or not (A7706). When there is no change in the normal pattern fluctuation display game nor in the normal pattern per state (the result of A7706 is "N"), the normal pattern pending number is updated by +1 (A7707). In this way, the normal pattern suspension number is updated by +1 only when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not fluctuating or the normal pattern per state is not in effect. does not accumulate substantially and becomes 1 instantaneously only immediately before the normal pattern fluctuation display game starts (the normal pattern pending number is substantially 0).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the winning random number storage area corresponding to the number of normal pattern reservations after the update (A7708). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7709), the winning design random number is extracted and saved in the winning design random number storage area (A7710), and the gate switch monitoring process is finished.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "N"), if it is determined that the number of normal pattern reservations is not less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is "N"), Alternatively, if the normal pattern variation display game is changing or in the normal pattern per state (the result of A7706 is "Y"), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[General electric winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general/universal electric prize switch monitoring process (A7602) in the general/universal diagram game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general electric winning switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not normal pattern winning is in progress, that is, whether or not the normal pattern variation display game is in a winning state and the normal variation prize winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations. (A7801). Then, when the game is in the middle of a regular game (the result of A7801 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (A7802). If there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "Y"), the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the count number of the general electric counter after the update has reached the upper limit (for example, 10) (A7804). Then, when the count number reaches the upper limit (the result of A7804 is "Y"), the hit end pointer value (for example, 2) is loaded from the normal hit end pointer area in the RWM, and the normal hit end pointer value in the RWM is It is saved in the per figure middle control pointer area (A7805).

Finally, the general-purpose game processing timer is cleared (A7806), and the general-purpose electric prize winning switch monitoring processing is terminated. That is, when there is a normal electric winning prize equal to or greater than the upper limit value during the winning state of the normal pattern, the winning end value is saved in the processing control pointer area during the normal pattern winning at that time, and the normal variable winning device 37 is closed. It is made to end the hit state of the normal figure on the way.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the normal game (the result of A7801 is "N"), if it is determined that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "N") ), or if it is determined that the number of counts has not reached the upper limit value (the result of A7804 is "N"), the electric winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose normal processing (A7608) in the general-purpose processing will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general/universal figure normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations is 0 (A7901). If the number of reserved patterns is not 0 (the result of A7901 is "N"), the random number is loaded from the random number storage area per general pattern of RWM (for the number of reservations 1), and the random number storage area per pattern of RWM. Load the per pattern random number from (for the number of reservations 1), and clear the general per pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and the general per pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) after loading to 0 (A7902) ). In addition, whether the probability of a hit result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is higher than normal (in a high probability state), that is, whether it is in a short time state (normal support state) (A7903). In the present embodiment, the range of random numbers per hit is 0 to 250, the probability per normal pattern in the high probability is 251/251, and the probability per normal pattern in the low probability is 0/251. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the normal pattern per probability in the low probability may be a value larger than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)).

If the game control device 100 is not in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7903 is "N"), it sets the low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern low probability (A7904). , If it is in the normal pattern high probability (the result of A7903 is "Y"), set the high probability lower limit judgment value (here 0) which is the lower limit judgment value in the normal pattern high probability (A7905), step A7906 Go to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7906). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common during normal pattern high probability and during normal pattern low probability. If the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), that is, if the win is lost, the process proceeds to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7907).

When the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "Y"), that is, in the case of losing, the game control device 100 saves the losing information in the winning flag area (A7908). Furthermore, the losing stop pattern number is set as the normal stop symbol number (A7909), the losing pattern information is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

If the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is "N"), that is, if it is a winning, the game control device 100 saves the winning information in the winning flag area (A7911), and loads the loaded winning symbol random number. The corresponding winning stop symbol number is set (A7912), the winning stop symbol information corresponding to the winning stop symbol number is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. In this case, there is one type of hit stop pattern (normal hit pattern), but there may be several types in a modified example which will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal pattern stop symbol area (A7914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), and shifts the normal per pattern random number storage area. (A7916), after clearing the free space after the shift to 0 (A7917), update the number of general chart reservations by -1 (A7918).

That is, with the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation display game related to the oldest normal pattern reservation number 1, the positions of the normal pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are reserved after the normal pattern reservation number 1 are advanced one by one. By this process, the value for the normal pattern reservation number 1 in the normal pattern random number storage area is cleared to 0, and the normal pattern reservation number is decremented by 1 and becomes 0.

After that, the game control device 100 loads the information of the support state (support mode, electric power release pattern) (A7919). Note that the processing of step A7919 is optional, and is executed when the support state, which is the state (mode) of the general electricity support, is variable as in a modified example described later.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a fixed normal pattern fluctuation time (for example, 200 msec) and saves it in the normal pattern game processing timer area (A7920). It should be noted that, as in the modification described later, when the support state (support mode, general electricity release pattern), which is the state (mode) of the general electricity support, is variable, set a variable normal figure fluctuation time corresponding to the support state and save it in the normal game processing timer area. And, during the normal figure fluctuation process transition setting processing is executed (A7921), the normal figure usual process is terminated. It should be noted that the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation will be described later.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the normal pattern reservation number is 0 (the result of A7901 is "Y"), sets "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal pattern normal process (A7922). , the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A7923). After that, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the general/universal diagram normal processing is terminated.

[Normal figure fluctuation process transition setting process]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process shift setting process during normal pattern fluctuation. The process shift setting process during the normal pattern fluctuation is executed at step A7921 in the normal pattern normal process.

First, the game control device 100 sets "1" as the processing number for shifting to the normal pattern fluctuation processing (A8101), and saves the processing number in the normal pattern game processing number area (A8102).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (turns on the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (A8103), and the normal pattern fluctuation display game is fluctuating. The fluctuation flag indicating that is saved in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area (A8104). Then, save the flashing control timer initial value, which is the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern flashing control timer area (A8105), and set the initial value (here, 0) to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern number area. Save (A8106). After that, the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation is terminated.

[Normal map fluctuation process]
Next, the details of the processing during normal pattern fluctuation (A7609) in the normal pattern game processing will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation process.

First, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the processing during normal game display (A8301), and saves the processing number in the normal game processing number area (A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal pattern display time (normal pattern stop time, for example, 48 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game on the normal pattern display, in the normal pattern game processing timer area ( A8303).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the normal pattern fluctuation (turns off the signal during normal pattern 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the normal pattern fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal pattern fluctuation control flag area (A8305), and the normal pattern fluctuation process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-purpose map displaying process (A7610) in the general-purpose map game processing will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process during normal map display.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern normal processing (A8401), and clears the hit flag area of RWM (A8402). Then, it is determined whether or not winning information is set in the loaded winning flag (A8403).

The game control device 100, when the winning information is set in the winning flag (the result of A8403 is "Y"), sets the processing setting table during the winning (A8404), and the winning corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information A start pointer value (here, 0) is obtained and saved in the control pointer area during normal per figure (A8405). In addition, it acquires the hit end pointer value corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information, and saves it in the normal pattern per end pointer area (A8406). Next, the general electric open time (for example, 3000 msec) corresponding to the general pattern stop pattern information is acquired and saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (A8407). By the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variable prize winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and for example, it is possible to open twice. It should be noted that there is one type of hit normal pattern stop pattern (normal pattern per pattern), and the hit start pointer value, hit end pointer value, and general electric open time are fixed, but as in the modification described later, normal When the support state (support mode, general electric release pattern) related to the electric support is variable, a hit start pointer value, a hit end pointer value, and a general electric open time corresponding to the support state are set, and a general map game processing timer area is set. You can save to .

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the process number for shifting to the process during normal game per game (A8408), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8409). After that, save the signal related to the hit of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern 1 hit signal is turned on) and the signal related to normal electric operation start (normal electric accessory 1 active signal is turned on) in the test signal output data area (A8410). Furthermore, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the common solenoid, ON data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (A8411).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 clears the information in the general electrical count area that stores the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 (A8412), Clear the stored information in the electric fraudulent winning number area (A8413). Finally, a flag that defines the non-fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is saved in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A8414).

The game control device 100, when the winning information is not set in the winning flag (the result of A8403 is "N"), sets "0" as the processing number for shifting to the normal pattern normal processing (A8415). , the process number is saved in the normal game process number area (A8416). After that, the flag is saved during the unauthorized monitoring period in the common electric unauthorized monitoring period flag area (A8417), and the general/universal diagram display processing is terminated.

[Medium processing per normal figure]
Next, the details of the processing (A7611) during the normal pattern per game in the normal pattern game processing will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during normal per pattern.

The game control device 100 first loads and prepares the control pointer during the normal pattern hit (A8601), and the value of the loaded normal pattern hit middle control pointer is the upper limit value of the normal pattern hit middle control pointer (hit end pointer value). is reached (A8602).

Then, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the normal per pattern does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal per pattern (hit end pointer value) (the result of A8602 is "N") , the control pointer is updated by +1 (A8603). Furthermore, normal electric operation transition setting processing is executed (A8604), and processing during the normal pattern per is ended. The details of the normal electric operation transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, the game control device 100, when the value of the control pointer during the normal per pattern reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal per pattern (hit end pointer value) (the result of A8602 is "Y"), Without executing the process of updating (+1) the process control pointer area during the normal pattern hit in step A8603, the normal electric operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the process during the normal pattern hit ends.

[General electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal electric operation transition setting process (A8604) in the normal per normal process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal electric operation transition setting processing. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer.

First, the game control device 100 branches the processing according to the value of the control pointer (the control pointer during normal game per game) (A8701). Here, the control pointer uses the value before being updated in step A8603. An example of a control pointer is shown in FIG. 56 below. If the value of the control pointer is an even number, the process proceeds to step A8702 to control the closing of the normal variable winning device 37, so the wait after closing the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is performed. The time (universal electric interval time, eg, 60000 msec) is saved in the general/universal game processing timer area (A8702). It should be noted that when the support state (support mode, general electricity release pattern) related to the general electricity support is variable as in the modification described later, the wait time (the general electricity interval time) may be set corresponding to the support state. .

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets OFF data in the general electric solenoid output data area in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the general electric operation transition setting process.

Further, when the value of the control pointer is an odd number, the game control device 100 moves to the process of step A8704 and controls the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the normal fluctuation corresponding to the control pointer The general electric open time, which is the opening time of the winning device 37, is saved in the general game processing timer area (A8704). The normal/current disconnect time here may be the same as the value set in step A8407 (for example, 3000 msec). Furthermore, in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c, ON data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area (A8705), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated.

Furthermore, when the value of the control pointer is the winning end pointer value, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A8706, terminates the opening control of the normal variable prize winning device 37, and performs normal electric remaining ball processing (A7612). 4 is set as the process number (A8706), and the process number is saved in the general-purpose game process number area (A8707).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the normal game processing timer area (A8708). After that, in order to set the general electric solenoid 37c to OFF, the OFF data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (A8709), and the general electric operation transition setting process is terminated. In addition, when the support state (support mode, general electric release pattern) related to the general electric support is variable as in the later-described modified example, the normal electric remaining ball processing time may be set according to the support state.

[Public electric residual bulb treatment]
Next, the details of the general electric remaining ball processing (A7612) in the general electric game processing will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the procedure of normal electric residual bulb processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the process number "5" relating to the end process for a normal game (A8901), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8902). After that, the general pattern ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (A8903). In addition, when the support state (support mode, general electric release pattern) related to the general electric support is variable as in the modification described later, the general drawing ending time may be set according to the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the operation of the normal variable winning device 37 (turns off the signal during operation of the normal electric accessory 1) in the test signal output data area (A8904). Subsequently, the general electrical count area for counting the number of prizes awarded to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (A8905), and the general control pointer area during the normal pattern is cleared (A8906). After that, the end pointer area per normal figure is cleared (A8907), and the normal electric remaining ball processing is terminated.

[End processing per normal pattern]
Next, the details of the general pattern per end process (A7613) in the general pattern game process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the per-universal pattern end process.

The game control device 100 first sets the process number "0" relating to the normal game process (A9101), and further saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A9102). After that, a signal relating to the end of the hit of the normal pattern variation game (the signal during normal pattern 1 hit is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A9103).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a flag (fraud monitoring period during fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 in the general/electric fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104), and thereafter, normal per pattern end processing. exit.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1319) in the timer interrupt process will be described. 44A and 44B are flowcharts showing the procedure of external information editing processing. FIG. 44A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 44B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, information Information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal, a game hall internal management device, or a test shooting test device is created and processed to be set in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame open error is occurring (A9501). If the glass frame open error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the body frame open error (front frame open error) is occurring (A9502). If the body frame open error is not occurring (the result of A9502 is "N"), the OFF data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the OFF data of the security signal is saved as the external information output data. Save to area (A9504).

Game control device 100, when the glass frame open error is occurring (the result of A9501 is "Y"), or when the body frame open error is occurring (the result of A9502 is "Y"), The ON data of the frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A9507), and checks whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time has expired). Judge (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch (set value change switch 102). processing A1044). Then, the security signal control timer starts counting from the time of RAM initialization.

If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the security signal ON data in the external information output data area (A9509), and proceeds to the processing of step A9510. That is, the external information indicating that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). If there is a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not board radio fraud is occurring (A9511). If there is a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, it can be determined that board radio fraud is occurring.

If board radio fraud is not occurring (the result of A9511 is "N"), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not frame radio fraud is occurring (A9512). If there is a frame radio wave fraud signal, it can be determined that frame radio wave fraud is occurring. If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not big winning mouth fraud is occurring (A9513). Incidentally, when a fraudulent prize winning occurrence flag relating to the big prize mouth is saved in the fraud flag area by the prize winning port switch/state monitoring process, it can be determined that the big prize mouth fraud is occurring. If the big winning slot fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is "N"), it is further determined whether or not the general electricity fraud is occurring (A9514). Incidentally, when the fraudulent winning occurrence flag regarding the second starting winning port of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the fraud flag area by the winning port switch/state monitoring process, it can be determined that the electric fraud is occurring.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the vibration fraud is occurring (A9515) when the electric fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is "N"). Incidentally, when there is a detection signal from the vibration sensor 65, it can be determined that the vibration fraud is occurring. If the vibration irregularity is not occurring (the result of A9515 is "N"), it is determined whether or not an abnormal discharge error is occurring (A9516). If the abnormal discharge flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318), it can be determined that an abnormal discharge error is occurring.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the V passage error is occurring (A9517) when the abnormal discharge error is not occurring (the result of A9516 is "N"). If the detection signal of the specific area switch 72 is generated at inappropriate timing, it can be determined that a V passage error is occurring. If the V passing error is not occurring (the result of A9517 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (A9518). If a remaining ball error is not occurring (the result of A9518 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9519).

The game control device 100 saves the OFF data of the game machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (A9520) when a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of the switch connector is not occurring (the result of A9519 is "N"). . If a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A9519 is "Y"), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9522).

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when magnet fraud is occurring (result of A9510 is "Y"), when board radio fraud is occurring (result of A9511 is "Y"), frame radio fraud occurs. If it is in (the result of A9512 is "Y"), if the big winning entrance fraud is occurring (the result of A9513 is "Y"), if the electric fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is "Y") ), if a vibration irregularity is occurring (the result of A9515 is "Y"), if an abnormal discharge error is occurring (the result of A9516 is "Y"), if a V passing error is occurring (A9517 If the result of A9518 is "Y"), and if a remaining ball error is occurring (result of A9518 is "Y"), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9521), and the game machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9522). By setting the security signal to ON data, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71 .

After steps A9520 and A9522, the game control device 100 executes starting gate signal editing processing for editing the winning signal of the starting gate (A9523). Subsequently, a main prize ball signal editing process for setting information about the number of prize balls to be paid out is executed (A9524), and a symbol determination number signal generated when the stop symbol of the special figure fluctuation display game is determined is transmitted to the external device. Executes design determination number signal editing processing to be output to (A9525).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the time saving signal control timer is not 0 (A9526), and determines whether the time saving signal control timer is 0 (A9527). If the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (result of A9527 is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated as it is, and if the time-saving signal control timer is not 0 (result of A9527 is "N"), big hit 3 The ON data of the signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9528), and the external information editing process ends.

In this way, at the time of sudden start of time saving due to ceiling time reduction and time saving pattern (sapo hit) due to reaching the ceiling number of times, the ON data of the big hit 3 signal is sent to an external device such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer) External information Output via terminal 71 . Here, the ON data of the big hit 3 signal is output during the timer initial value (for example, fixed time of 128 msec) set in the time saving signal control timer area in step A5702 of the support operation setting process. The conventional jackpot 1-4 signals are output during the jackpot period, but the jackpot 3 signal is output for a fixed time (for example, 128 msec) much shorter than the jackpot period. Therefore, the external device (hall computer, etc.) can recognize that the time reduction has occurred due to the ceiling time reduction due to the number of ceiling times or the sudden time reduction due to the time reduction pattern without confusing it with the big win or the time reduction following the big win.

In addition, as described above, the jackpot 2 signal continues for a long time in the jackpot state and the time saving state following the jackpot state (time saving state due to the jackpot, first specific game state, first time saving state). Output as external information. The short fixed time (for example, 128 msec) jackpot 3 signal is external information indicating the occurrence of a time saving state (second specific game state, second time saving state) due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, time saving state caused by a big hit It is output to the external device separately from the external information (2 long-time jackpot signals), and is not confused with the external device.

As another configuration, only one of the ceiling time saving and the sudden time saving may output three jackpot signals for a fixed time at the start of the time saving. In addition, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time saving and the sudden occurrence of time saving, in one time saving, both the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal are output for a fixed time at the start of the time saving, and in the other time saving, the jackpot Only 3 signals may be output. For example, 3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals may be output for the ceiling time saving, and only 3 jackpot signals may be output for the sudden time saving (or vice versa). In addition, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time saving and the sudden time saving, at the time of the time saving start, the jackpot 3 signals (or jackpot 4 signals) are output for the ceiling time saving, and the jackpot 4 signals (or jackpot 3 signals) are output for the sudden time saving. may be output. In this way, the big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be appropriately combined to distinguish between the occurrence of the ceiling time saving and the sudden occurrence of the time saving so that the external device can recognize it.

[Transmission of external information or test signal]
FIG. 45 is a time chart showing how external information or test signals are transmitted.

Figure 45 (A) is the last special figure variation display game in the previous time saving state (special figure variation display game reaching the number of times of time saving), there is a ceiling number of times and stop of the time saving pattern, and the next special figure variation display It shows a case of a time saving state after the game (time saving state due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving).

In this case, in this embodiment, the timing at which the previous time saving state ends is the timing at which the time saving end setting process (A4812, FIG. 24) is executed within the special figure fluctuation processing, that is, the previous special figure fluctuation display This is the timing when the variable display of the game stops. In addition, the timing when the later time saving state (ceiling time saving and sudden time saving) starts is the time when the time reduction variation number (A512, A5126) is set in the special figure display process, that is, the previous special figure variation display game It is the timing (substantially equal to the timing to start if the next special figure fluctuation display game starts) at which the display of the stop result ends.

In addition, at the timing when the variable display of the previous special figure variation display game stops, the time saving end setting processing in the special figure variation processing will cause the off data of the 2 jackpot signals as a signal related to the time saving end to be placed in the external information output data area. It is set and output to an external device (such as a hall computer) (A4901), and as a signal related to the time saving end, a fluctuation time reduction state signal (special design 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, special design 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, normal design 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal) is set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test apparatus (A4902). Therefore, the two jackpot signals as external information and the variable time shortening state signal as the test signal are turned off after the timing when the variable display of the previous special figure variable display game is stopped (after the previous time saving is finished).

Furthermore, at the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game ends, the on data of the jackpot 2 signal as a signal related to the time saving start is set in the external information output data area by the support operation setting process. (Hall computer, etc.) (A5701), and as a signal related to the start of time saving, the fluctuation time reduction state signal (special design 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, special design 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, normal design 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal) is set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test apparatus (A5703). Therefore, the two jackpot signals as external information and the variation time shortening state signal as the test signal are turned on after the timing at which the display of the stop result of the previous special figure variation display game ends.

In this way, when the special figure fluctuation display game (the previous special figure fluctuation display game) in which the time saving ends has just reached the ceiling number or stopped with the time saving pattern, it is clear that the time saving has ended once. become. In addition, the output of external information (2 jackpot signals) and test signals (variation time reduction state signal, etc.) is turned off for the display time (stop display time) of the stop result (stop pattern), thereby reducing time. When restarting, the ON state of the output of external information and test signals can be clearly identified.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), in the conventional gaming machine, at the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game ends, the time saving ends by the time saving end setting process in the special figure display processing. do. In the time saving end setting process, the off data of the jackpot 2 signal as a signal related to the time saving end is set in the external information output data area and output to an external device (such as a hall computer), and the variable time reduction state as a signal related to the time saving end Signal OFF data and the like are set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test apparatus.

Therefore, in the conventional game machine, the two jackpot signals as external information and the variation time shortening state signal as the test signal are turned off after the timing at which the display of the stop result of the previous special figure variation display game ends. However, at this timing, the support operation setting process immediately turns on the 2 jackpot signals and the variable time reduction state signal, so it will not be substantially turned off (the on state is substantially continued become). Therefore, unlike the present embodiment, in the conventional gaming machine, it becomes unclear when the time saving has ended, and when the time saving resumes, the ON state of the output of the external information and the test signal becomes unclear.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production|presentation control apparatus 300 performs by the program for production|presentation control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 46A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. FIG. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the processing executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "B****".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the command reception interruption process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 can be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated by the CPU initialization (B0002) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 executes RTC read processing for reading time information from the RTC (real time clock) 338 (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, time information may be read from the RTC 338 at predetermined intervals (for example, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read time information each time the process proceeds to step B0009. When power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, power is turned on to the gaming machine 10), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, steps B0003 and B0004 may be executed between). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) for measuring time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or only once when the power is turned on. When the information is read, the time timer (clocking means) may be adjusted so as to match the time of the RTC 338 . And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 may perform various processes using the timer for time. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects the operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. A production button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, hall/player setting mode processing for receiving operations such as changes in the brightness of LEDs and liquid crystals and volume by the person in charge of the game parlor (game parlor) and players is executed (B0011). In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding and clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, production points are added when the production or operation to which the production points are to be added is executed. For example, information including performance point information is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating the random number such as the effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing. (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46B.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes customer waiting demonstration editing processing for editing and controlling the content of the customer waiting demonstration displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and changes the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 waiting for customers. The power saving control process to be controlled is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. effect display edit processing is executed (B0017). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem if the drawing data can be completed by the VDP 312 within 1/30 second (approximately 33.3 msec) of the frame period. Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is frame switching timing (B0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0019 is "N"), the processing of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes. Screen drawing is instructed (B0020). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when periodic V blanking (image update) is performed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), the frame is switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60th of a second, and the interval may be increased.

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes sound control processing for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

In addition, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling decoration devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18) made up of LEDs and the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling the effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0023). In the movable body control process, for example, a performance for driving a motor is set.

And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 returns to the process of B0008, after finishing the process of above-mentioned B0023. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0023 is repeated.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 46A) will be described with reference to FIG. 46B. FIG. 46B is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of received commands is 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the command reception counter of the command reception counter area After subtracting the number of received commands from the value (B1103), the content of the received command buffer in the RAM is copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command reading index by +1 (adds only 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. At the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N ”), and the processing from steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is received by the performance control device 300, the contents of the received command are stored in the received command buffer and at the same time the command reception counter value of the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands by constantly securing an empty area in the received command buffer without performing direct analysis.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 loads the received command contents of the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the contents of the received command analysis. Processing is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46C. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in the processing of step B1101 has been completed (B1110). The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process is terminated.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 46B) will be described with reference to FIG. 46C. 46C is a flow chart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). A command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from the MODE section indicating the type of command. be. Therefore, the upper and lower order of the received command are composed of the MODE section and the ACTION section in that order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicating the type of command is a value that can be taken (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). Then, if the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, if the ACTION part is within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), it is further determined whether or not the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variation command (B1205). In addition, the variation system command is a command for commanding a variation pattern of a decorative special design, and there is, for example, a variation command. If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result in B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a variation command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the hit command (B1207). The hit-related commands are commands for commanding operations (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen) related to effects during a big win or a small win. They are a round command for commanding, an interval command for commanding an interval screen, an ending command for commanding an ending screen, and the like. If the MODE part indicates a winning command (the result in B1207 is "Y"), the winning command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the winning command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part is within the range of the pattern command (B1209). In addition, the symbol-based commands include, for example, a decoration special figure 1 command and a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE part indicates a symbolic command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbolic command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

If the MODE part does not represent a pattern-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of single-shot commands (B1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), single-shot command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a single-shot system command (the result of B1211 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (B1213). . The look-ahead symbol system command includes, for example, a look-ahead stop symbol command. Then, when the MODE part indicates a look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), a look-ahead symbol system command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead pattern system command (the result of B1213 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (B1215 ). Prefetch variation commands include, for example, prefetch variation pattern commands. If the MODE part indicates a prefetch variation command (result of B1215 is "Y"), prefetch variation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, the production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a prefetch variation command (the result of B1215 is "N"), may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is out of the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION part is out of the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or if the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( If the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis process ends.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) described above will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the procedure of single-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). Then, if the MODE part indicates a model specifying command (result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of game machine is executed (B1302), and single-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (B1303 ). If the MODE part indicates a command for RAM initialization (result of B1303 is "Y"), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and one-shot command processing is executed. finish.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents a power failure recovery command ( B1305). For example, power failure recovery commands include a power failure recovery command and a recovery screen command. If the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "Y"), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307 ). If the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demonstration command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot command process ends.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (B1309). And, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of decoration special figure 2 reservation command (B1311). And, when the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1313). Then, if the MODE part indicates a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process ends.

If the MODE part does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents an error/illegal command ( B1315). In addition, as error/fraud commands, for example, fraud occurrence command, fraud release command, state off command, state on command, magnet fraud notification command (magnetism error command), board radio wave fraud notification command (board radio wave error command) be. As fraud occurrence commands, there are commands indicating the occurrence of fraudulent winning based on the signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 43. The fraud cancellation command is a command indicating the cancellation of fraud. In the winning slot switch/state monitoring process (A1310), occurrence of fraudulent prize winning and fraud cancellation are monitored, and a fraud occurrence command and fraud cancellation command can be transmitted. As a state ON command, a signal is generated from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error) and a signal is generated from the front frame open detection switch 64 (body frame open detection switch) (body frame open error, front frame There is a command that indicates an open error). A state off command also indicates that no error has occurred. A state ON command and a state OFF command may be sent in the winning hole switch/state monitoring process (A1310). When there is detection (magnet fraud) from the magnetic sensor switch 61, a magnet fraud notification command is transmitted in magnet fraud monitoring processing (A1315). When there is detection (radio fraud) from the radio wave sensor 62, a board radio fraud notification command is transmitted in radio fraud monitoring processing (A1316).

If the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), error/illegal setting processing is executed to notify or cancel the notification of an error or illegality (B1316), Ends single-shot command processing. In the error/invalidity setting process, settings are made so that an error or invalidity notification sound is generated.

Effect control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), then the MODE part is a command for effect mode switching (processing during special figure display etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for switching the production mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the production mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is "N"), then whether the MODE part represents the number of out balls command indicating the number of out balls It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, if the MODE part indicates the number of out-balls command (result of B1319 is "Y"), the number of out-balls reception processing is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the number of out balls command (the result of B1319 is "N"), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE part represents the count command (large winning opening count command). (B1321). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for counting the big winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the one-shot system command process ends.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the command of the count (the result of B1321 is "N"), determines whether the MODE part represents the setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command for restoration from power failure in step A1046 of FIG. 6B and the command for RAM initialization sent in the process of step A1044. Then, if the MODE part indicates a setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the setting value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the one-shot command processing ends. In the setting value reception processing, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent the setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "N"), determines whether or not the MODE part represents a setting change system command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, there is a command (A1030) during probability setting change. If the MODE part indicates a setting change command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the setting change information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process ends. In the setting change system information setting process, the contents of the setting change system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change related information setting process, a setting change in progress display is displayed on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being changed.

Effect control device 300, when the MODE part does not represent a command of the setting change system (the result of B1325 is "N"), determines whether the MODE part represents a command of the setting confirmation system (B1327). . As a setting confirmation type command, there is, for example, a probability setting confirming command (A1033). If the MODE part indicates a setting confirmation type command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), setting confirmation type information setting processing is executed (B1328), and the one-shot type command processing ends. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the probability setting confirming command is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirming display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion indicates a symbol stop command (B1329). It should be noted that the symbol stop command, for example, there is a special figure 1 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 1 stop command) and a special figure 2 symbol stop command (decoration special figure 2 stop command). Then, if the MODE part represents a command to stop the pattern (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1330).

When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and the game after all symbols have stopped. The state flag is set to the normal state (B1332), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to a normal state, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag may be changed to a "fluctuation", "big hit", or "small hit" flag. is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent a symbol stop command (the result of B1329 is "N"), or if the command of the MODE part is not normal (the result of B1330 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may execute processing for commands not described in FIG. 47 in single-shot command processing. For example, the effect control device 300 receives a time reduction variation number command, effect rotation speed command, hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction notification command, right hitting instruction notification command) etc. from the game control device 100, and the command may be processed. The production control device 300 can acquire the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state from the time reduction fluctuation number command (time reduction fluctuation number) or the like, and can acquire the production remaining number of rotations in each production mode from the production rotation number command or the like, and the time reduction state. Effect can be set based on the remaining number of fluctuations in , the number of rotations remaining in each effect mode, and the like. The production control device 300 displays a hitting instruction display (left hitting instruction display or right hitting instruction display) that instructs (suggests) how to hit in response to a hitting instruction notification command (left hitting instruction information command or right hitting instruction information command). ) can be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 or the like.

[Prefetching pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the prefetch pattern system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 46C) described above will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the look-ahead symbol-based command process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Production control device 300, first, whether or not the latest pending information is the information of special figure 1 suspension (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure reservation number command received at the latest is the number of decoration special figure 1 reservation It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). If the latest pending information is the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead pattern system command (look-ahead stop design command) to the special figure 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations Save (B1602).

Production control device 300, if the latest pending information is not the information of the special figure 1 pending (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the decoration special figure pending number command received at the latest is the decorative special figure 2 pending number command In the case, save the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

Effect control device 300, after steps B1602 and B1603, sets a look-ahead variation-based command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting for reception of a look-ahead variation-based command (B1604). This is because the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are set, and therefore the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variation system command following the look-ahead design system command. After that, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is terminated.

[Prefetching variation command processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 49, the details of the look-ahead variation command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) described above will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the prefetching variation command process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

Effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting for reception of a look-ahead variation command (look-ahead variation pattern command) (B1701). If the above-mentioned prefetch variation-related command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that reception of a prefetch variation-related command is waiting. If the prefetch variation command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. If the prefetch variation command is waiting for reception (the result in B1701 is "Y"), the prefetch variation command reception wait flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) sets the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of suspensions of the design of the latest suspension information (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (B1703), and of the look-ahead variation system command The MODE portion of the intra-sub prefetch variation command is acquired corresponding to the MODE portion (B1704). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and an intra-sub look-ahead variation command ACT portion corresponding to the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the look-ahead variation command is acquired (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (effective), it is converted to a value other than 0. If both the MODE part and ACT part after conversion are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the MODE part and ACT part after conversion corresponds to the latest pending information and pending number. Save to the prefetching variation command area (special figure 1 prefetching variation command area or special figure 2 prefetching variation command area) (B1708). Then, prefetch command consistency check processing is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710).

It should be noted that the time of the first half variation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of suspensions when the variation display game is started. When the pending change display game is started, if there is no other pending, the first half variation is longer, and if there is a new pending and the number of pending is large, the first half is shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation system command is converted into the sub internal prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Also, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half variation corresponding to the intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT section does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are types in the reach of the same system, if the production control device 300 uses it as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. . For example, normal reach also has types such as normal reach minus 1 stop failure and normal reach plus 1 stop failure. Therefore, by converting the ACT portion indicating the reach of the same system to the same intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portion, the number is reduced and the load of check processing such as prefetch command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300, if at least one of the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the sub-inside look-ahead variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), it is determined that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (the result of B1710 is "Y"), loads the prefetch target pending information (latest pending information) from the prefetching variation command area. (B1711), the prefetch lottery process for the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B1712). As the look-ahead effect, for example, there are a continuous notice effect (including chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) is generated (B1713). When the latest pending look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated look-ahead effect (suspension change notice, etc.) is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). If the look-ahead effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). If the generated look-ahead effect does not start immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"), set and save the display corresponding to the look-ahead effect during the hold shift (when the hold display moves, when the hold number decreases). (B1717). Then, the read-ahead variation command processing ends. In addition, the look-ahead effect is an effect that informs the expectation of a big hit (expectation for a special result) by notifying information that suggests the result (game result) of the variable display game before the variable display game stops. may notify information suggesting the set probability setting value (1 to 6). That is, the effect control device 300 can perform the prefetch effect so as to change the pending display (icon) of the prefetch target based on the degree of expectation for big hits and the probability set value.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the latest pending prefetch effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), ends the prefetch variation system command processing as it is.

[Processing of pattern-based commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, details of the pattern-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) described above will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received pattern system command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure classification is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, in special figure 1 and special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the design changes, using the table for each MODE, the design classification is set. In addition, in this embodiment, the design type is a lost design, a special figure 1 jackpot pattern A, a special figure 2 jackpot pattern BF, a jackpot pattern G in the remaining reservation (special figure 2 reservation), a time saving pattern ( It corresponds to support per pattern) etc.

[Processing of variable commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) described above will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the procedure of variation-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300. FIG.

Effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is undecided (B1901). If the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), end the variation system command processing. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), check the combination of the received variation system command and symbol system command (B1902), whether the variation system command and symbol type are inconsistent is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means a contradiction in effecting, for example, when a winning variation command is received but a jackpot symbol symbol command is received. If the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the variation command processing is terminated.

Effect control device 300, when the variation system command and the pattern type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1904), and in the effect during variation A variable effect setting process for setting a certain variable effect is executed (B1905). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) is set to be during special figure fluctuation (B1906), and if the number of read-ahead effects such as continuous effects is 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, details of the variable effect setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 51) described above will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). If the variation pattern type is no reach variation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of points of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, setting information (setting value) corresponding to the first half notice distribution group Set the address table (B2002), acquire the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation command (variation command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the higher the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

Production control device 300, if the variation pattern type is not a reach-less variation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, if there is a reach variation, the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, The first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and setting information (setting value) is set (B2004), and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the fluctuation command (variation command) and the fluctuation pattern type is set. An address is acquired (B2005).

Effect control device 300, after steps B2003 and B2005, performs a lottery for notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). Subsequently, the number of production points, the model code, the special type, the production mode, the pattern type, and the setting information (setting value) are set (B2007), and the ACT of the variation system command is set. The address of the second half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the part is obtained (B2008), and a lottery for the advance notice that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the content of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation command (variation command) is determined (B2010). In addition, you can see the fluctuation time and main reach contents from the fluctuation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B2011). After that, the stop pattern of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the content of the variable performance such as the reach performance and the notice performance (B2012). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining a loose pattern in the case of a missing pattern.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of variable effect (B2013), and performs display setting of notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the pending reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed, for example, the display (display of the pending shift) that the pending display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is set is set (B2015). Subsequently, a sound number that determines the mode of presentation (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the mode of presentation by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decoration LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number. .

Note that it is also possible to set the voice number and decoration number based on setting information (setting values) as well as the effect content. In this way, the player can enjoy guessing the setting information (set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs the display setting of the decorative special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B2017), and the fourth special figure in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that fluctuate on the display device 41 The display setting of the 4th symbol variation related to (4th symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol variation may be displayed by the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41, or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41. good too.

[Processing of winning commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the winning command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 46C) described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning system command processing executed by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command indicates fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the win-related command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the win-related command is a big-win fanfare command or a small-win fanfare command, fanfare effect setting processing for setting a fanfare effect. (B2102). In addition, corresponding to the big win fanfare command or the small win fanfare command, the display device 41 or the like may display (announce) the display of the hitting instruction (left hitting instruction or right hitting instruction). The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to fanfare in progress (B2103), and the win system command processing is terminated. In addition, the round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents a round ( B2104). If the MODE part represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the hit system command is a round command or a small hit open command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process, A game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 is set to be in a round (B2105, B2106), and the winning system command processing is terminated.

When the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, when the winning system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the current game of the gaming machine 10 The game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) is set to be in an interval (B2108, B2109), and the win system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received hit-related command does not represent an interval (the result of B2107 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the hit-related command represents the ending ( B2110). If the MODE part indicates the ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is the ending command, the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, The game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "ending" (B2111, B2112), and the win system command processing is terminated.

It should be noted that, if the MODE part of the received hit system command does not represent the ending (the result of B2110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 does not execute any processing and ends the hit system command process. do.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 54A is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating game state transitions in the first embodiment. The game state transitions (transitions) by the game control of the game control device 100 . The game states are particularly shown to be transitioned by the occurrence of a big win, or by the passage of a predetermined number of games (the number of rotations, the number of fluctuations) as a trigger. In FIG. 54A, for each game state, the state of the jackpot probability (special pattern probability), the state of the normal pattern probability (normal pattern probability) that is the probability of the winning result of the normal pattern variation display game, the production mode, the main Features such as a different variation display game (main variation display game, main variation), right-handed or left-handed shooting mode, etc. are shown.

Incidentally, the production mode (production stage) can be set by the game control device 100 through the jackpot end processing (FIG. 30), the production mode information check processing (FIG. 25B), etc., as described above. However, not limited to this, the effect control device 300 can also be set based on the number of times of time saving, the prescribed number of remaining reservations, the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit, and the like.

In addition, in FIG. 54A, specific game states B and C (time saving mode #3, #4) in the case of sudden time saving due to ceiling time saving and time saving design due to reaching the ceiling number of times are omitted (similar to FIG. 54B), but will be described later. is described in detail in the second embodiment (FIG. 60) of FIG.

In the first embodiment, the game state includes a normal game state, a specific game state, and a transition state. In this embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but it is also possible to configure the specific game state to be a variable state in which the probability of a big hit is a high probability state.

It should be noted that, in the transition state, since the jackpot probability and normal pattern per probability are the same as the normal game state, the transition state may be included in the normal game state in terms of probability. That is, the transition state may be regarded as a normal game state in which the main variation display game becomes the special figure 2 variation display game. However, in the transition state, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed by the digestion of the remaining reservation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes the main fluctuation display game, and the V passing (to the V winning opening) in the small hit and the small hit A big hit by the passage of the game ball, V prize) occurs with a small hit probability (1/8). Therefore, the transition state is an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than normal, and from this point of view, it may be regarded as a game state that can be distinguished from the normal game state. Further, the transition state and the specific game state (time saving state) may be put together as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, or the specific game state (time saving state) may be the first advantageous state and the transition state may be the second advantageous state. state.

First, each game state will be described. In the normal game state, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot probability to a low probability (special pattern low probability), and sets the normal pattern hit probability to a low probability (normal pattern low probability). In the present embodiment, the normal low probability state is assumed to be a state without general electric support (no support state), and the normal low probability state is assumed to be a general electric support state (supported state). Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (universal electric) is opened due to the general pattern in the state with support, if the probability is low when the general pattern is opened, there is no support state. becomes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration is also possible in which the support state is regarded as being present while the normal variable prize winning device 37 is open.

Also, in the normal game state, the production mode is the normal mode. In the normal game state, left-handed hitting that facilitates entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 36 is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting, and is recommended as a mode of shooting the game ball. The main starting area where the game ball is likely to win in the recommended shooting mode is the first start winning opening 36, and the main fluctuation display game (main fluctuation special figure) becomes the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The sub-starting area where the game ball is difficult to win in the recommended shooting mode becomes the normal variable winning device 37, and the sub-variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game.

In the specific game state (time saving state), the game control device 100 controls the jackpot probability to be a low probability state, but the normal pattern hit probability to be a high probability (normal pattern high probability). In the specific game state, as the shooting mode of the game ball, the normal variable winning device 37 is easily opened, and the right hitting aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 is recommended. Therefore, in the specific game state, the main starting region is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting region is the first starting winning port 36, so the main variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable display game is It becomes a special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, in the specific game state, there are cases where the number of times of time saving is below the reference number (5 times here) (number of times of time saving ≤ 5) and 99 times larger than the number of times of time saving (number of times of time saving = 99). The performance mode in the case of the number of times of time saving ≤ 5 is set to the time saving mode #1, the performance mode in the case of the number of times of working time = 99 is set to the time saving mode #2, and the performance modes of the time saving mode #1 and the time saving mode #2 are made different to play the game. may improve the interest of In addition, the reference number of times may be, for example, a reciprocal value (8 times) of the probability of a small hit of 1/8, and may be 7 times or the like. As the reference number of times is smaller, it becomes more difficult to generate a small win in the time saving mode #1 (which becomes a big win state by passing the V in the small win), while the difference from the performance mode #2 is large and sharp.

The transition state is a state that can occur after the end of the specific game state (time saving state). In the transition state, the remaining hold caused by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (general electric) opened by the normal game win in the specific game state is digested, and the special figure 2 variable display game is executed as the main variable display game. be. The production mode of the transition state is the remaining pending consumption mode. In addition, the remaining hold digestion mode is divided into a mode before the end of the opening of the general electricity due to the normal game during the specific game state, and a mode after the opening of the general electricity after the opening of the general electricity is finished. You can divide. In the pre-opening mode, it is recommended to shoot to the right to target the general electricity, and in the post-opening mode, it is recommended to shoot to the left because the general electricity is closed.

If the remaining hold digestion mode, which is the production mode of the transition state, is divided into a mode before the end of the opening of the general electricity and a mode after the end of the opening of the general electricity, the player can determine whether the general electricity is open (should he hit the right side) or is closed. It becomes easy to understand whether it is (should hit left). If not divided, it becomes easier to recognize that the remaining hold is being consumed through the transition state.

Also, as described above, the transition state and the specific game state (shortening of working hours) may be combined into an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and in the advantageous state, the same production mode may be used without dividing the production mode. In this case, the advantageous state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation display game can be used as a common effect mode. As will be described later, when a special figure hit occurs due to the digestion of the remaining hold (a big hit by passing V in a small hit), the player is more likely to win than when a special figure hit occurs during the specific game state. If the game value to be given is increased, a large game value can be obtained in spite of the fact that it is unclear from a common presentation mode whether the game is in a time-saving state or in the process of consuming the remaining hold, thereby making the player happy. . It should be noted that here, the game value (privilege) is, for example, the number of time reductions after the end of the big win, the number of finally obtained big wins, and the like.

Next, the transition (transition) from each game state will be described. First, in the normal game state, when a big hit (not due to V winning) occurs in a special figure variation display game, the game transitions to a specific game state after the big win state ends.

In the specific game state, when a small win (a big win state is achieved by passing V) by a special figure variation display game, the game returns to the specific game state again after the big win state ends. In this case, it returns to time saving mode #1, and the number of times of saving time as game value (privilege) is below the reference number of times (number of times of saving time ≤ 5).

When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, transition from the specific game state to the transition state. For example, this predetermined transition condition is (i) that the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific gaming state exceeds the number of time reductions (first predetermined number, initial value of time reduction variation number 2), and ( ii) The second predetermined number of times (time reduction Either the initial value of the number of fluctuations 1 (for example, twice the number of times of time saving) is exceeded, or (iii) a predetermined number of times of opening (for example, two times) is completed. In addition, the second predetermined number of times may be obtained by adding the maximum value (for example, 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number to the time saving number of times (first predetermined number of times). The condition (iii) is provided as a countermeasure against stopping shots.

In the specific game state, the original specification (performance) of the gaming machine 10 is that the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation display game, can be executed a number of times in a short time. If only the condition for transition from the specific game state is that the number of times exceeds the time-saving number of times, the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a secondary variable display game, deviates from the original specifications of the gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加However, by providing two conditions (i) and (ii), the execution of the sub-variation display game can be treated as a bonus (privilege), and the player can play the game according to the original specifications without causing any loss. If the player plays the game normally, it is unlikely that the condition (i) is established and the transition state is entered while the condition (ii) is established.

In addition, in the time-saving mode # 2 of the specific game state, it can be continued until the special figure 2 variable display game of 99 times of time-saving is executed, so a small hit (becomes a big hit state by passing V) is almost certainly generated. Then, after the jackpot state ends, the specific game state (time saving mode #1) is entered again. Therefore, the time-saving mode #2 becomes the next continuation determination mode (determined mode) in which the specific game state reliably continues after the end of the jackpot state.

In the transition state, when the special figure 2 variation ends, the main variation display game transitions to the normal game state as the special figure 1 variation display game. On the other hand, when a small hit occurs in the transition state (becomes a big hit state by passing V during the small win), the transition to the time saving mode #2 of the specific game state is performed after the end of the big win state, and 99 times of time saving times are given. be. That is, when a small hit (big hit after passing V) occurs in the transition state (remaining pending digestion mode) in which the remaining hold is digested, the number of time reductions (≤ Compared to 5), the number of times of time saving increases, and the game value given to the player increases. Furthermore, when a small hit (big hit after passing V) occurs in the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), a small hit (big hit after passing V) will almost certainly occur in the next time-saving mode #2, so a total of 2 times A jackpot is secured as a game value.

[Another example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 54B is another example of a game state transition diagram showing transitions of game states. It should be noted that the game state transition of FIG. 54B can also be applied to the second embodiment.

In FIG. 54B, the remaining hold which is all the special figure 2 holds digested after the end of the time saving is divided into the predetermined remaining hold (first remaining hold) and excessive hold (second remaining hold), and the production corresponding to the transition state The residual hold digestion mode as a mode is divided into a time-saving residual hold digest mode in which a predetermined residual hold is digested and an excess hold digest mode in which excess hold is digested. Here, the predetermined remaining hold is the first predetermined number of the special figure 2 hold that occurs during the time saving and is digested after the time saving ends (all or part of the special figure 2 hold), and the excess hold Is a special figure 2 hold (remaining hold) that is digested after a predetermined remaining hold. Excessive pending consumption mode may include, for example, a mode of displaying a result screen showing a game result on the display device 41 and other special modes. In addition, since the time saving mode and the time saving mode (time saving mode # 1 or time saving mode # 2) are common in terms of digesting the special figure 2 hold that occurred during the time saving, the production mode as the same production mode It can be made common.

[Time saving number of times corresponding to the pattern and the number of prescribed remaining reservations]
FIG. 55 is a table showing the number of time reductions and the prescribed remaining pending number (prescribed remaining pending number) corresponding to the symbol which is the type of hit in the special figure variation display game. The pattern is a pattern in the case of a big hit, and here, it is determined by a big hit pattern random number, and time-saving patterns are excluded. The symbol is a winning stop symbol and may correspond to either a stop symbol number or a stop symbol pattern. (A) relates to the winning pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game. (B) The upper figure relates to the winning pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal figure high probability state (during the time saving state), and the lower figure is the special figure 2 fluctuation display in the general figure low probability state It relates to the winning pattern of the game (the winning pattern in the remaining reservation).

The symbol A is a stop symbol determined by a big hit symbol random number, and is a big hit stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game. The pattern BF is also a stop pattern determined by the big hit pattern random number, but in the normal pattern high probability state (during the time saving state), the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit V passing (V winning) is a stop pattern. The symbol G is also a stop symbol determined by the random number of the big hit symbol, but it is related to the V passage (V prize) in the small hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the low probability state of the normal pattern (small hit in the remaining hold) It is a jackpot stop pattern. If there is a small winning symbol random number in addition to the big winning symbol random number, the symbols BF and G may be the small winning stop symbols determined by the small winning symbol random number.

The pattern A has a distribution (selection rate) of 100%, and only the pattern A exists as a jackpot stop pattern in the special figure 1 variable display game. The symbols BF are distributed to the jackpot symbol random numbers at 40%, 25%, 15%, 10% and 10%, respectively. The symbol G has a distribution of 100%.

In the pattern A, which is the type of jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game, the number of times of time saving after the jackpot is one. Further, in the symbol A, the prescribed (scheduled) number of remaining reservations to be digested after the end of the time saving state is four. Therefore, the total number of reserved special figures 2 that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the big hit state is 5 (=1+4) by regulation. In symbol A, the continuation rate is {1-(1-1/8) ⁵ }×100%=48.7% for a small hit probability of 1/8, and the confirmed mode transition rate is (1 −1/8)×{1−(1−1/8) ⁴ }×100%=36.2%.

In the pattern BF, which is the type of jackpot of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game started during the normal high probability state, the number of times of time reduction after the jackpot is 5 times, 4 times, 3 times, 2 times, and 1 time. be. Also, in the symbols BF, the specified remaining pending numbers are 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9, respectively. Therefore, the total number of special figures 2 reserved that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the big hit state is 10 by regulation in any of the symbols BF. In the patterns BF, the continuation rate is the same for each of the small hit probability of 1/8, {1-(1-1/8) ¹⁰ } × 100% = 73.7%. The mode transition rates are 25.0%, 32.3%, 40.7%, 50.3% and 61.2%, respectively.

In the pattern G, which is the type of jackpot (remaining pending jackpot) of the special figure 2 variable display game started during the normal low probability state, the number of times of time reduction after the jackpot is 99 times. In addition, in the pattern G, the prescribed number of remaining reservations is four. Therefore, the total number of special figures 2 pending that can be digested by executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit state is 103. In the pattern G, the continuation rate is approximately 100% and the decision mode transition rate is approximately 0% with respect to the small hit probability of 1/8. Therefore, in the symbol G, after the jackpot ends in the remaining hold, the game shifts to the time saving mode #2, and the big win is surely made again, and then the specific game state (time saving state) continues. On the other hand, in the pattern G, the fixed mode transition rate is approximately 0%, and most of the flows transition from the time-saving mode #2 in the specific game state to the time-saving mode #1 after a big hit.

In addition, the continuation rate is the probability that the specific game state will continue by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (within 5 times for pattern A, within 10 times for pattern BF, and within 103 times for pattern G) after the end of the jackpot state. There is a probability of re-entering the specific game state without going through the normal game state (normal mode). The confirmation mode transition rate is a probability of shifting from the remaining reservation digestion mode to the time saving mode #2 (confirmation mode, next continuation confirmation mode) by the special figure 2 variable display game based on the remaining reservation after the end of the jackpot state.

The continuation rate depends on the total number of special figures 2 suspended after the end of the big hit state (that is, the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the big hit state), and the total number is 10. The continuation rate in the case of is greater than the continuation rate in the case of the symbol A with the total number of five. Further, in the order of symbols BF, as the number of times of time saving decreases and the number of specified remaining reservations increases, the fixed mode transition rate increases.

As described above, in the symbols BF, the number of time reductions is set according to the symbol that is the type of the big hit (type of special result), so the specific game state after the end of the big hit is set by lottery (distribution) It has a variable time-saving number of times (1 to 5) that changes randomly to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, the number of remaining pending (5 to 9), which is the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game after the end of the specific game state, is changed according to the number of times of time saving. Therefore, the number of remaining pending positions is also random and variable, which is set by lottery, and the interest in the game is improved. In particular, when a difference in game value is provided between the jackpot in the specific game state and the jackpot in the remaining hold, the player is happy and sad with the remaining hold number set by lottery, and the interest in the game is improved. .

In addition, regarding the winning pattern BF of the main variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the specific game state, even if the number of times of saving time and the number of remaining reservations are variable, the total of the number of times of saving time and the number of remaining reservations is constant. Since it is set to (10), it is possible to make the fixed mode transition rate variable while keeping the continuation rate of the specific game state the same. As described above, while the special figure 2 variable display game of the total number of time saving times and remaining pending numbers is executed, that is, the same effect in the specific game state (time saving mode) and transition state (remaining pending digestion mode) When the mode is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether the time is being shortened or the remaining hold is being consumed. improves.

[Characteristics of normal map fluctuation display game and normal electric movement]
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the characteristics of the general pattern fluctuation display game and the general electric movement.

As shown in FIG. 56(A), there is only one type of winning pattern (hitting stop pattern, normal pattern winning pattern) in the normal pattern fluctuation display game, and it always becomes the same general pattern open pattern, and the winning state of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. , the normal variable winning device 37 (general electric) is always opened at the same timing.

The probability per normal pattern is 0/251 (0%) in a low probability state and 251/251 (100%) in a high probability state. The normal pattern variation display game always wins in a high probability state and always misses in a low probability state, so randomness is eliminated. In addition, it is not limited to this, and the normal pattern per probability may be a value larger than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)) in a low probability state (normal game state, etc.).

The start memory number (ordinary pattern pending number) of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is substantially 0, and the normal pattern start gate 34 is played during the winning state (normal electric operation) and during fluctuation of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. Even if the ball passes, the normal pattern start memory of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not memorized. The normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started only during the stop display of the stop pattern, and when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34 during the stop display, the normal pattern start memory is generated, but it is immediately digested and the normal pattern fluctuation display game is performed. starts. In this way, since the starting memory of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not substantially accumulated, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed at a good tempo. Therefore, in the specific game state, the regular figure variation display game or the regular electric action and the special figure variation display game are easily interlocked without any deviation, and it also leads to the prevention of capture.

The normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is 200 msec. In addition, it may be 200 msec in the normal pattern high probability state, and may be longer than 200 msec in the normal pattern low probability state. The normal map stop time (normal map display time) is 48 msec. In the specific game state (time saving state, normal high probability state), in order to link the normal pattern fluctuation display game (and general electric operation) and the special pattern fluctuation display game without any gap, the normal pattern fluctuation time and the normal pattern stop It is preferable that the time be as short as possible. Assuming that the shooting speed of the game ball is 100 per minute, since the game ball can pass through the normal pattern start gate 34 every 600 msec, the time required for one normal pattern fluctuation display game, that is, the normal The sum of the figure fluctuation time and the normal figure stop time is preferably less than 600 msec.

Also, the maximum count number (upper limit of count number) for general electricity is 10.

FIG. 56(B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the general pattern starting gate 34, the general variable prize winning device 37 (normal electrical), and their surroundings. The gaming machine 10 has the following configuration for almost all game balls hit to the right in accordance with the opening of the general electric (universal electric open) pass through the general electric start gate 34 and win the general electric.

First, in order to make the winning rate to the normal variable winning device 37 (percentage of one game ball winning) constant when hitting to the right in accordance with the opening of the general electric power, the normal Obstacle nails 32a and structures are removed as much as possible from the game area 32 around the figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37.例文帳に追加For example, in the game area 32, the obstacle nail 32a and the structure are not arranged between the normal figure starting gate 34 and the normal variable prize winning device 37 or on the left and right. Obstacle nails 32a arranged almost right above the normal figure starting gate 34 form a path for the game balls in two rows, and prevent the game balls from leaking out from there. The passage formed by the two rows of obstructing nails 32a smoothly connects to the upper passage 32c formed by the structure.

In addition, the normal pattern starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device 37 are arranged in a positional relationship such that the game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34 enters the normal variable winning device 37 as it is. That is, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is arranged directly under the normal pattern starting gate 34 . For example, in the case that the normal variable winning device 37 is opened before the game ball that has passed through the normal starting gate 34 reaches the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable starting gate 34 and the normal variable winning device The distance L (distance between centers in the vertical direction) between 37 may be larger than the product of the average falling speed of the game ball and the time required for one normal pattern variation display game. However, the distance L is set to a short distance so that even if the falling direction of the game ball passing through the normal pattern start gate 34 deviates from the vertical direction, it will enter the normal variable winning device 37 as it is.

Furthermore, as described above, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is preferably of a so-called tongue type that can rotate so that the movable member 37b falls forward so that the number of prizes awarded to the normal variable prize winning device 37 is unlikely to be uneven. .

FIG. 56(C) shows an opening pattern (universal electric opening pattern) of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (universal electric) of the present embodiment. A general electric open pattern shows the operation|movement aspect of the general electric by one general pattern hit. After the end of the jackpot state, the general electric release pattern is the same regardless of the jackpot symbols AG (that is, the jackpot type). In addition, the number surrounded by the square frame is the value of the control pointer (FIG. 41, etc.) during the normal per figure.

In this embodiment, the general electric is opened twice in the general electric open pattern by one general pattern. In addition, the general electricity may be opened two or more times. The power supply opening is divided into the first half opening and the second half opening across a long interval in which the power supply is closed. A general electric interval time (wait time), which is an interval time, is 60000 msec, and the general electric open time of the first half opening and the second half opening is both 3000 msec.

For example, if the shooting speed of the game ball is 100 per minute, the game ball reaches the normal electric every 600 msec, so it is possible to win the normal electric 5 times during the first half opening of 3000 msec, and 60000 msec. After the interval of 3000msec, it is possible to win 5 times during the opening of the second half. The special 2 hold accumulated during the first half opening can be digested during the interval of 60000 msec, which is the closed state of the electricity, and the number of special 2 holds can be set to 0, and the maximum during the later half opening Limited (here 4) special figure 2 reservations are accumulated.

During the interval of the general electricity (during the closed state), when the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the end of the jackpot state reaches the time reduction number, the specific game state (time reduction state, normal state high probability state, support state) It ends and becomes a normal pattern low probability state (transition state). Then, the special figure 2 hold that was saved during the first half opening but is digested after the time saving state ends will be the remaining reservation, and in addition, the special figure 2 reservation that will be accumulated by winning the general electricity during the second half opening of 3000 msec will also be the remaining reservation. becomes. In this way, even if it becomes a normal low probability state, it is possible to accumulate a lot of remaining reservations by opening the second half.

As described above, by deriving the normal pattern per hit (specific result) of the normal pattern variation display game, it is possible to convert the normal variation prize winning device 37 to the open state multiple times, and the normal pattern variation display game In both the high-probability state in which the probability of winning a normal pattern is high and the low-probability state in which the probability is low, the normal variable winning device 37 can be converted to the open state. Therefore, even if the probability of winning a normal pattern is low, the normal variation winning device 37 can be converted to the open state and the special pattern 2 reservation can be accumulated, so that the player can be pleased and the interest of the game is improved. do.

Furthermore, in the first half of the general electricity, it is possible to save the special figure 2 reservation and digest it at the interval, and in the latter half of the general electricity, it is possible to save the special figure 2 reservation again and digest it after the general electricity operation ends. For this reason, it is possible to make the number of remaining reservations larger than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 reservations, and to make the number of remaining reservations variable by making the number of times of time saving variable.

〔Timing chart〕
Figure 57-Figure 59, after the big hit, game state, normal pattern probability (per normal pattern probability), normal pattern state, general electric state, special figure 2 pending number, special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), etc. is a timing chart showing It should be noted that time elapses toward the right side of the timing chart. FIG. 57 relates to after the big win of symbol A, FIG. 58 relates to after the big win of symbol B, and FIG. 59 relates to after the big win of symbol F.

Regarding the state after the big hit of the pattern BF, the timing of changing from the normal pattern high probability state (specific game state) to the normal pattern low probability state is different due to the difference between the number of times of saving time and the number of specified remaining reservations. , pattern B and pattern F are illustrated. The states other than the game state and the normal pattern probability are common for all of the patterns BF.

In addition, Figure 57-Figure 59 shows the passage of the game ball of the normal pattern start gate 34 (normal pattern gate) (detection of the gate switch 34a) and the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric) (starting detection of the port 2 switch 37a) is also indicated by pulses. In FIGS. 57-59, the passage of the game ball in the general pattern gate, the general pattern state, the general pattern state, and the pattern and change of the general pattern winning (winning the general pattern) are the same, and the explanation will be omitted as appropriate. .

In FIGS. 57-59, during a jackpot round (during jackpot) and a jackpot ending are shown as part of the jackpot state. In the jackpot ending in which the ending effect is executed, when the player hits to the right as prompted by a right-handed instruction display, the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34 (normal pattern gate) (the first in FIG. 57). ), the general pattern (normal pattern) fluctuates on the general pattern display device 53, and the general pattern fluctuation display game is executed, and then stopped. Here, since it is in a low probability state at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, it will stop off.

Here, the jackpot ending ends when the normal pattern comes off and stops, and it becomes a high probability state of the normal pattern probability, corresponding to the specific game state (time saving mode # 1) in FIG. 54A, the right hitting state with support become. At the beginning of the right-handed state with a support (normal pattern high probability state), the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, and the normal pattern fluctuation starts. And since it is a high probability state with a normal pattern probability of 100%, it becomes a normal pattern hit and the general electric operation starts, and the general electric is opened as the first half open. In the open state in which the normal electric is opened, the game ball that has passed through the normal electric start gate 34 wins the normal electric as it is (indicated by a pulse). As soon as one special figure 2 reservation occurs, the special figure 2 reservation is digested, the special figure 2 variable display game is started, and the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 0.

As described above, the game control device 100 sets the variation time (execution time) and stop display time of the special figure 2 variation display game to the number of special figure 2 variations from the end of the jackpot state (the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game). ) is controlled based on (fluctuation start information setting process of FIG. 23 and special figure fluctuation process of FIG. 24). In addition, the game control device 100 varies the variation time and the stop display time of the special figure 2 variation display game in three types after the big hit of the symbol A, after the big hit of the symbol BF, and after the big hit of the symbol G. set as

After the big hit of symbol A in FIG. 57, the variation time is set sufficiently long so that the first special figure 2 variation display game continues at least until the end of the general electric operation, that is, the end of the second half opening. The fluctuation time of the first special figure 2 variable display game is approximately the same as the normal electric operation time (66000 msec, 66 seconds) in FIG. It's okay. In this way, in response to the general electric operation including the two open states (together), the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game 4 are stored with 2 holds being the upper limit.

Since the number of time reductions after the big hit of symbol A is 1, when the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game ends, the specific game state (time reduction mode) ends and it becomes a low probability state, and the transition state ( remaining pending digestion mode). In the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 hold that has accumulated 4 as the remaining hold is executed four times with a considerably shorter fluctuation time than the first time (2nd to 5th Special figure 2 variable display game). The 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games may all have the same fixed variation time.

After the big hit of symbol B in FIG. 58, the first special figure 2 variation display game is started at least before the end of the first half opening of the general electricity and continues until after the end. In addition, the fluctuation time of the first special figure 2 variable display game is substantially the same as the general electric open time (3000 msec, 3 seconds) in FIG. 58, but may be longer than the general electric open time. Corresponding to the opening of the first half of the general electricity (together), the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit value 4 be saved. The special figure 2 hold that has been saved is all digested during the interval when the general electricity is closed, and during the interval, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed four times with a considerably shorter fluctuation time than the first time (2 ~ 5th special figure 2 variable display game). The 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games may all have the same fixed variation time.

Since the number of time reductions after the big hit of symbol B is 5 times, when the 5th special figure 2 fluctuation display game ends, the specific game state (time reduction mode) ends and it becomes a normal low probability state, and the transition state ( remaining pending digestion mode). In the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), the general electricity is opened as the latter half opening. As soon as one special 2 hold is generated as a remaining hold due to the winning of the open electric power, the special 2 hold is digested, the 6th special 2 variable display game is started, and the number of special 2 holds is becomes 0.

In response to the opening of the second half of the general electricity (together), the 6th special figure 2 variation display game is being executed, and during the execution of this special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 2 hold is the upper limit value of 4 be saved. The 6th special figure 2 variable display game starts at least before the end of the second half opening of the general electricity and continues until after the end. The variation time of the sixth special figure 2 variation display game is substantially the same as the general electric open time (3000 msec, 3 seconds) in FIG. 58, but may be longer than the general electric open time.

After the 6th special figure 2 variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game based on the 4 special figure 2 reservations saved as the remaining reservation is executed 4 times with a considerably shorter variation time than the 1st and 6th times ( 7th to 10th special figure 2 variable display game). In this way, it is possible to realize five specified remaining pending numbers corresponding to the 6th to 10th special figure 2 fluctuation display games.

The 7th to 10th special figure 2 variation display games may all have the same fixed short variation time, and the variation time of the 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display games (especially the variation time during the time saving state) A fixed variable time equal to or shorter than . As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game can be executed at a good tempo and the same rhythm, and the remaining hold can be consumed quickly. In addition, since the 7th to 10th special figure 2 fluctuation display games have nothing to do with saving just by digesting the special figure 2 reservation, the variable fluctuation time is selected by sorting the fluctuation pattern (lottery). Then, the game is no longer monotonous. In addition, the variation time of the 7th to 10th special figure 2 variation display game is longer than the variation time of the 2nd to 5th special figure 2 variation display game (especially the variation time during the time saving state), and it responds slowly You can also perform a production to do.

In addition, when the second half of the general electric is completed, the general pattern hit state ends, and the normal pattern variation display game can be executed by passing the game ball of the general pattern start gate 34 (normal pattern gate), but the normal pattern hit probability Since the normal pattern low probability state is 0%, there is no result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game. In addition, the stop after the end of the normal pattern per state corresponds to the normal electric remaining ball processing time and the normal pattern ending time.

After the big hit of the pattern F in FIG. 59, the passage of the game ball in the general pattern gate, the general pattern state, the general pattern state, the general pattern prize, the number of special patterns 2 pending, the special pattern variation display game (special pattern variation) The appearance and changes are the same as after the big hit of symbol B in FIG. However, the timing of changing from the specific game state (normal pattern high probability state) to the transition state (normal pattern low probability state, remaining reservation digestion mode) is different due to the fact that the number of times of time reduction and the specified remaining number of reservations are different between the pattern B and the pattern F. .

After the big hit of the pattern F, when the first special figure 2 fluctuation display game is completed, the specific game state (time saving mode) ends and the general pattern low probability state is entered, and the transition state (remaining reservation digestion mode) is entered. . After that, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed 9 times in the same way as after the big hit of the symbol B, and 9 prescribed remaining pending numbers can be realized.

As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game for a long time corresponding to the open state of the general electricity, and the special figure 2 corresponding to the closed state (interval) of the general electricity. A two-variation display game can be executed in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to save the special figure 2 reservation by opening the first half of the general electricity and digest it at the interval, and save the special figure 2 reservation again by opening the second half of the general electricity and digest it after the end of the general electricity operation. For this reason, the number of remaining reservations can be made larger than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of special figures 2 reservations, and the number of remaining reservations can be made variable by making the number of times of time saving variable.

In addition, although not shown after the big hit of the symbol G, for example, while repeating the general electric operation, the special figure 2 variable display game is a short fixed such as the 2nd to 5th times and 7th to 10th times in FIGS. Only the number of times of shortening of working hours (99 times) and the remaining reserved minutes (4 times) may be executed in variable time. In addition, if the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game after the big hit of the symbol G is fixed, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at a good tempo, and if the fluctuation time is not fixed but variable, the game will not be monotonous. .

As described above, although the first embodiment has been described, the specific game state may be not only the time saving state but also the probability variable state (excluding the latent probability variable state). In addition, even if the first embodiment is applied not only to one type and two types of mixed machines (1 + 2 types), but also to one type of gaming machine (so-called digipachi) having a specific game state (time saving state or variable probability state) good. In one type of gaming machine with a variable state, especially for models with a high probability of hitting even with a low probability of special patterns after the end of the variable state (so-called sweet digital, a little patch), a big hit can be expected in the number of remaining reservations. Applying the embodiment is highly effective.

[Actions and effects of the first embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game (special figure variation display game). The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electrical) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state in a specific game state (for example, time saving state or probability variable state). Game control means (for example, game control device 100) can execute a game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) based on start memory (for example, special figure 2 hold) generated by winning a variable winning device. The game value given to the player when the game results in a special result (for example, a small win or a big win, including a big win due to a V prize after a small win) in a specific game state It differs from the game value given to the player when the game results in a special result after the state ends.

In such a gaming machine 10, since there is a difference in the game value given as a special result of the game between during the specific game state and after the specific game state ends, a game value given during the specific game state and after the specific game state ends The player will be happy and sad about the number of starting memories in which the game is executed, and the interest in the game will be improved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes game control means (for example, a game control device 100) capable of executing a game (normal pattern variation display game). The gaming machine 10 is a variable prize winning device (normal variable prize winning device 37, general electric) that can be converted to an open state and a closed state when the result of the game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) is a specific result (normal pattern hit). Prepare. The game control means can convert the variable winning device to the open state a plurality of times by deriving one specific result (per normal pattern), and the probability that the game will result in a specific result (per normal pattern) is high. The variable winning device can be converted to the open state in both the high probability state and the low probability state.

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the probability that the game will result in a specific result (normal hit) is low, the variable winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37, general electric) can be converted to the open state, and the variable winning Since the start memory (for example, special figure 2 reservation) generated by the winning of the device can be accumulated, the player can be pleased and the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game, and effect control means (for example, the effect control device 300) capable of executing effects related to the game. Prepare. The gaming machine 10 includes a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electrical) that can be converted between an open state and a closed state in a specific game state (for example, time saving state or probability variable state). The game control means can generate a predetermined state in which the variable winning device is converted to an open state (for example, a right-handed state with a low probability of normal pattern) even after the end of the specific game state, and the effect control means can generate a predetermined state The performance mode in is made different from the performance mode in other than the predetermined state.

In such a gaming machine 10, after the end of the specific game state, the predetermined state in which the variable prize winning device is changed to the open state can be visually distinguished from the specific game state in terms of presentation. In addition, by setting the effect mode peculiar to the predetermined state, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute a game (special figure variable display game) corresponding to the open state of the variable winning device. Therefore, in the open state of the variable winning device, the starting memory (for example, special figure 2 reservation) that is the execution right of the game (special figure variable display game) is not consumed, and the starting memory is accumulated by winning the variable winning device. be able to.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes the game (special figure variable display game) for a long time corresponding to the open state of the variable winning device, and executes the game for a short time corresponding to the closed state of the variable winning device. can be run with Therefore, during the specific game state, the variable winning device is opened (for example, the first half open) to store a lot of starting memory (for example, special figure 2 hold), and after that, the closed state (for example, the interval) is starting memory (for example, special figure 2 to be reserved). , and after the end of the specific game state, you can save a lot of starting memory (eg, special figure 2 hold) in the open state again (eg, open in the second half). Therefore, the number of starting memories (remaining pending number) consumed after the end of the specific game state can be made larger than the upper limit value (for example, 4) of the number of starting memories. Furthermore, the number of remaining reservations can be made variable.

In the first embodiment, the game control means executes the game (special figure variation display game) corresponding to the open state of the variable winning device for a time longer than the open state time of the variable winning device. Therefore, even if the open state of the variable winning device and the execution period (variable time, variable period) of the game (special figure variable display game) are deviated, the deviation can be absorbed, and the actual remaining number of reservations exceeds the specified number of remaining reservations. Matches perfectly.

In the first embodiment, the game control means can execute the game (special figure variation display game) a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) or more during the period in which the variable prize winning device is in the closed state. Therefore, even if the open state of the variable winning device and the execution period (variable time, variable period) of the game (special figure variable display game) are deviated, the deviation can be absorbed, and the actual remaining number of reservations exceeds the specified number of remaining reservations. Matches perfectly.

In the first embodiment, the game control means controls to end the specific game state when the game (special figure variation display game) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times of time reduction or probability variation). After the end of the specific game state, the number of times the game is executed based on the starting memory generated by winning the variable winning device (prescribed remaining pending number 5 to 9) is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, time saving number of times or probability variable number of times ). Therefore, if the predetermined number of times is selected by lottery, the remaining number of reservations is also set randomly and variable, and the remaining number of reservations makes the player happy and sad, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means provides a predetermined number of times (for example, time saving number of times or probability variable number of times) as the game value given to the player when the game (special figure variation display game) results in a special result (small hit or big hit) can be set, and the predetermined number of times is set according to the type (symbol) of the special result. Therefore, the predetermined number of times of the specific game state after the end of the special game state based on the special result is set by lottery (distribution) and becomes variable (for example, 1 to 5) and changes at random, improving the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means, the number of times the game (special figure variation display game) is executed after the end of the specific game state (specified remaining pending number), a predetermined number of times is constant (eg 10). Therefore, it is possible to make the number of remaining reservations variable while keeping the continuation rate of the specific game state the same. During the specific game state and after the end of the specific game state, if the same performance mode is executed while the fixed number of special figure 2 variable display games are executed, the player is in the specific game state or after the end of the specific game state. It becomes difficult to distinguish whether it is or not, and it is surprising that a large game value can be obtained with a big hit of the remaining reservation after the end of the specific game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

In the first embodiment, the game includes a first game (special figure 1 variation display game) and a second game (special figure 2 variation display game). The game control means can execute the first game based on the starting memory generated by the winning of a game ball into a predetermined winning area (for example, the starting winning opening 36), and the winning of a game ball into the variable winning device A second game can be executed based on the generated starting memory. The second game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) can be executed with priority over the first game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game), and when the first game is executed in the specific game state is executed in a shorter time than the second game.

Therefore, the number of times the first game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is executed in the specific game state decreases, and even if the first game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is executed in the specific game state, The start of the second game (special figure 2 variable display game) is not greatly delayed.

In the first embodiment, the game includes a first game (general figure variation display game) and a second game (special figure variation display game). The game control means can execute the first game based on the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area (normal figure start gate 34), and by winning a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37, general electric) A second game (special figure variation display game) can be executed based on the generated starting memory. In the specific game state, during the execution of the first game and during the winning state caused by the specific result of the first game, even if the game ball passes through the predetermined area (normal figure start gate 34), the first It does not generate the starting memory (general map memory), which is the right to execute the game.

Therefore, the first game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) can be started only during the stop display, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game starts as soon as the game ball passes through a predetermined area (normal pattern start gate 34) during the stop display. do. Since the start memory (normal pattern memory) of the first game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) does not substantially accumulate in this way, the first game (normal pattern fluctuation display game) is executed at a good tempo. Therefore, in the specific game state, the operation of the variable prize winning device according to the hit of the first game (ordinary figure variation display game) and the second game (special figure variation display game) can be easily interlocked without deviation.

In the first embodiment, the game control means terminates the specific game state when the open state of the variable prize winning device (normal variable prize winning device 37, general electric) ends a specified number of times (for example, twice) in the specific game state. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific game state is extended by making the number of winnings to the variable winning device less than a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of time reductions or the probability variable number of times) due to the stop shot. Further, it is possible to prevent the number of open states of the variable prize winning device from being excessively increased due to the winning of the first game (normal pattern variable display game) in the extended specific game state.

In the first embodiment, the game control means controls the game execution time (variation time) based on the number of times the game (special figure variation display game) is executed from the end of the special game state. Therefore, the game (special figure fluctuation display game) can be executed in response to the open state of the variable prize winning device, and when the variable prize winning device is open, the starting memory (for example, Special figure 2 hold) can be accumulated.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63 . Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In addition, in the following embodiment, the same reference numerals are used for the configuration having the same function as in the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The second embodiment relates to a special figure variation display game after the end of a specific game state with general electric support.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 60 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating game state transitions in the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is similar to FIG. 54A, but a specific game state (omitted in FIGS. 54A and 54B) in the case of sudden time reduction due to ceiling time reduction and time reduction pattern (sapo hit) due to reaching the ceiling number of times is added It differs from FIG. 54A in that the

The specific game state includes a specific game state A, which is a time-saving state that occurs as a time-saving (a time-saving) immediately after a big hit due to a big hit, and a time-saving state that occurs as a ceiling time-saving (b time-saving) not caused by a big hit. A specific game state B and a specific game state C, which is a time saving state that suddenly occurs as a time saving (c time saving) without being caused by a big hit, are included. In addition, in this embodiment, the specific game state is a time saving state, but it is also possible to configure the specific game state to be a variable state (with general electric support / special figure high probability) in which the probability of a big hit is a high probability state.

In the specific game states AC, the jackpot probability is in a low probability state, but there is general electric support. In the specific game state AC, since the normal variable winning device 37 (universal electric) is likely to be released, it is recommended to hit the right hand aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 as the shooting mode of the game ball. Therefore, in the specific game state, the main starting region is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting region is the first starting winning port 36, so the main variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable display game is It becomes a special figure 1 variable display game.

As the production mode of the specific game state A, there are time saving modes #1 and #2 as in FIG. 54A. In this embodiment, the number of times of time saving regarding time saving mode #1 is a fixed value (here, three times) for simplicity, but may be a variable value as in the first embodiment (FIG. 55). The production mode of the specific game state B is the time saving mode #3, and the production mode of the specific game state C is the time saving mode #4. It can be distinguished from the time saving state by (c time saving) by production. Incidentally, it is also possible to reduce the development cost by making the performance mode the same in the specific game state B and the specific game state C so as to share the performance.

In addition, time-saving modes # 3 and # 4 are different production modes from time-saving modes # 1 and # 2, and the production modes are different. Specific game states B and C) can be distinguished by the effect. Incidentally, the same production mode can be used for the specific game state A and the specific game states B and C to reduce the development cost by making the production common.

Also, in the specific game state A, if it is possible to generate a time saving state due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, time saving mode # without changing time saving mode # 1, # 2 to time saving mode # 3, # 4 1 and #2 may be continued, and in this case, it is possible to give the player the impression that the specific game state A has been extended (the impression that the number of time reductions has increased). Of course, in the specific game state A, when it is possible to generate a time saving state due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, time saving mode # 1, # 2 is changed to time saving mode # 3, # 4, ceiling time saving or sudden time saving The player may be notified that has occurred.

The contents of the normal game state and the transition state (normal game state in which the remaining hold is consumed) are the same as in the first embodiment (FIG. 54A). The production mode of the transition state is described as one remaining holding digestion mode without dividing the mode before the end of the general electric opening and the mode after the end of the general electric opening, but it may be divided.

Next, transitions (transitions) from each game state, especially transitions to specific game states B and C and transitions from specific game states B and C will be described.

In the normal game state, the transition state, and the specific game state A, when the number of special figure fluctuation display games executed after the end of the jackpot state (excluding the number of times in the variable probability state) reaches the ceiling number of times, the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction ) and transition to the specific game state B (time saving mode #3). In addition, in the normal game state, the transition state, and the specific game state A, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit result (time saving result, time saving pattern), suddenly time saving (c time saving) and specific game state C (time saving mode #4).

In addition, when the number of ceiling times is reached during the specific game state A or when the support hit result occurs, the time saving state may be continuously (overlapping) caused by the ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, or continuously It does not have to be generated. Basically, regardless of the number of times of the remaining time reduction in the specific game state A, transition to the specific game state B, C when the conditions to transition to the specific game state B, C (reaching the ceiling number of times and occurrence of support hit result) are established However, it may be changed whether or not to transition according to the number of remaining time saving. For example, if the number of times of time saving in the specific game state B (b number of times of time saving m3) is greater than the number of times of time saving remaining in the specific game state A (the number of times of time saving not yet consumed), from the specific game state A to the specific game state B transition to When the number of times of time saving in specific game state C (c number of times of time saving m4) is larger than the number of times of time saving remaining in specific game state A, transition from specific game state A to specific game state C is performed. If the number of time reductions (m3, m4) in the specific game states B and C is equal to or less than the number of time reductions remaining in the specific game state A, even if the time reduction pattern is displayed, the specific game states B and C do not occur and are specified. The game state A does not transition to the specific game states B and C. In addition, the time saving pattern does not have to be displayed in the case of the ceiling time saving.

Basically, when the number of times of time saving in the specific game states B and C ends, it shifts to the remaining reservation digestion mode, but if the number of times of time saving in the specific game state A remains, it is made to return to the specific game state A. good too. That is, if the number of times of time saving in the specific game state A remains even after the number of times of time saving in the specific game state B and C ends, the specific game state A continues from the specific game state B, C to the specific game state A It may return and not transition to the transition state (remaining pending consumption mode).

Also, when the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state A or when the support hit result occurs, regardless of the relationship between the number of time reductions in the specific game states B and C and the remaining number of time reductions in the specific game state A, It is also possible to have a configuration that does not generate a time saving state due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving. Even in this configuration, the specific game state A does not transition to the specific game states B and C even if the time saving pattern is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is preferable not to generate (not overlap) a time saving state due to sudden time saving (c time saving) due to a support hit result (time saving pattern) during the specific game state A. That is, even in the specific game state A, there is a case where the support hit result is won against the special figure 2 variable display game, but even if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, it is possible not to suddenly generate a time saving state due to time saving (c time saving). preferred. In this case, the display device 41 or the lamp display device 80 may display a lost pattern as a decorative special pattern for presentation. Also, in the same way as described in FIG. 14 of the first embodiment, in this embodiment, without providing a support hit result for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, even in the normal mode (normal game state), suddenly time saving (c It is preferable not to generate a time saving state due to time saving. Therefore, in the present embodiment, preferably, transition to the specific game state C (time saving mode #4) only from the transition state for digesting the remaining hold (remaining hold digestion mode). In this way, the value of the remaining pending consumption mode increases, and the player comes to expect the remaining pending consumption mode intensively, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 60, when the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state B, C or when the support hit result occurs, the time saving state is continued by the ceiling time saving or sudden time saving (overlapping ) may be generated or may not be generated continuously. That is, it is also possible to transition from the specific game states B and C to the specific game states B and C.

When the transition condition is established from the specific game states B and C, the state transitions to a transition state (which may be included in the normal game state) that digests the remaining hold. The transition conditions for transitioning from the specific game states B and C to the transition state may be the same as the transition conditions for transitioning from the specific game state A to the transition state. The transition conditions are (i) that the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific gaming state exceeds the number of times of shortening time m3, m4 (first predetermined number of times, the initial value of the number of times of shortening time variation 2), and (ii) The second predetermined number of times (time exceeding the initial value of the shortened variation count 1). In the present embodiment, the condition (iii) of the first embodiment (completion of opening the electric power for a predetermined number of times) is not provided because it is not necessary. In addition, the second predetermined number of times may be obtained by adding the maximum value (for example, 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number to the number of times of working hours reduction.

It should be noted that the number m1-m4 of time-saving modes #1-#4 and the number of ceiling times m5 can be appropriately adjusted to change the game characteristics.

For example, in order to balance the profits of the specific game state A and the specific game states B and C, m1 (a time saving number 1) < m4 (c time saving number) < m2 (a time saving number 2) < m5 (ceiling number) < You may adjust so that the relationship of m3 (b number of times of time saving) may be satisfied.

Also, for example, m1 (a time saving number of times 1) < m2 (a time saving number of times 2) < m4 Adjustment may be made so as to satisfy the relationship of (c times of time reduction) < m5 (ceiling times) < m3 (b times of time reduction).

Also, for example, m1 (a time saving number of times 1) < m4 (c time saving number of times) < m3 (b time saving number of times) < m2 (a time saving number of times 2) < m5 (ceiling number of times) can be adjusted to satisfy

[Time saving number of times corresponding to the pattern and the number of prescribed remaining reservations]
FIG. 61 is a table showing, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions and the prescribed remaining pending number (prescribed remaining pending number) corresponding to the symbol that is the type of hit in the special figure variation display game. The pattern is a pattern for a big hit (including a V prize after a small win), and here it is determined by a big hit pattern random number, and time-saving patterns are excluded.

This embodiment is the same as the first embodiment, except that the number of time reductions is different for the big hit symbol A of the special figure 1 variable display game. The symbol G of the jackpot (jackpot with remaining pending) in the special figure 2 variable display game in the state without the general electric support is the same as in the first embodiment. Regarding the jackpot (including the V prize in the small hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game with the general electric support, the number of times of time saving is fixed to 3 times, so there is only one type of pattern S .

In the normal game state (normal mode), when a big hit (symbol A) is generated by the special figure 1 variable display game, the game shifts to a specific game state A (time saving mode #1) after the big win state ends. In the specific game state A, when a big win (symbol S) is generated by the special figure 2 variable display game, the game returns to the specific game state A (time saving mode #1) after the big win state ends. In the specific game states B and C, when a big hit (symbol S) is generated by the special figure 2 variable display game, the game shifts to the specific game state A (time saving mode #1) after the big win state ends. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, in the time saving mode #1 of the specific game state A, the number of times of time saving is fixed to 3 times, and the number of prescribed remaining reservations is fixed to 4 pieces.

[Characteristics of normal map fluctuation display game and normal electric movement]
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the characteristics of the general pattern variation display game and the general pattern movement in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 62(A), there is only one winning pattern (hitting stop pattern, normal pattern winning pattern) in the normal pattern fluctuation display game. In this embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of general electric support, the probability per general pattern is always a constant value of 250/251, and unlike the first embodiment, low probability (low probability general pattern) and high probability (high probability general pattern) probability) is not controlled to vary between Incidentally, as in the first embodiment, the low probability lower than 250/251 may be set in the normal game state.

The start memory number (normal pattern pending number) of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is 4. The maximum count number (upper limit of count number) is 10 for general electricity.

The normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is a constant value of 500 msec. It should be noted that the normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1 may be set to a value longer than 500 msec in the normal game state. The normal map stop time FZ2 (normal map display time) is 600 msec. Although not shown in FIG. 62, the total FZ3 of the normal electric remaining ball processing time and the normal ending time may be, for example, 700 msec, which is equal to or longer than the normal electric fluctuation time FZ1 or the normal electric stop time FZ2.

As shown in FIG. 62(B), the normal variable prize winning device 37 (universal electric) is opened only once for one hit of the normal pattern variable display game to enter the winning easy state. However, the normal power release time is short (for example, 48 msec) in a state without power support such as a normal game state, and a long time (eg, 3400 msec) in a state with power support such as a short working time state. The normal/universal power release pattern (normal/universal power release mode) differs depending on the game state. As described above, the probability of winning a general pattern is always a constant value regardless of the game state, so in the present embodiment, the easy winning state of the general electricity support has a longer general electricity open time than the case without the general electricity support. It is realized by

In addition, the general electric open time may be shorter than the general electric power fluctuation time FZ1, the general electric power stop time FZ2, the general electric power remaining ball processing time and the general electric power ending time total FZ3 in the state without the electric power support. , in the state with power support, it may be longer than the time FZ1-FZ3 associated with the control of these power maps and power.

〔Timing chart〕
FIG. 63 shows, from the time saving state as a specific game state to the transition state (which may be included in the normal game state), the game state, the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation), the general figure state, the general electric state, the special figure 2 It is a timing chart showing the number of reservations and the like. In addition, in FIG. 63, for the sake of simplicity, the timing of ending the time saving and the timing of starting the disconnection of the mains are aligned, but they may be shifted.

FIG. 63(A) shows a situation in which the time saving modes #1 and #2 of the specific game state A (first specific game state) following the big hit are finished and transition to the transition state (remaining pending digestion mode). In the case of FIG. 63 (A), the stop display time STP1 (first period ) is set longer than the long-term general electric open time OPN (third period, for example, 3400 msec) for general electric support. That is, the relationship STP1>OPN is set.

In addition, the game control device 100 can set the stop display time corresponding to the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) after the end of the big hit (A4804), but in this embodiment, the time saving The stop display time of the final variation is also set corresponding to the type of the time saving mode (specific game state). Corresponding to the time saving mode #1, #2 (specific game state A), the stop display time STP1 of the time saving final fluctuation is set longer than the long electric power open time OPN when the electric power becomes easy to win. .

In addition, in FIG. 63, the time saving final variation will be described as a variation in which the number of times of special figure 2 variation after the end of the big hit will be the number of times of time saving (three times). However, the time saving final variation may be a special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation display game), and the total number of executions of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) It may be the above-mentioned second predetermined number of times.

Assuming that the special figure 2 reservation number is the maximum value of 4 before the start of the time saving final fluctuation, the special figure 2 reservation number decreases by 1 to 3 at the time saving final fluctuation of the special figure 2, but the normal fluctuation winning device When the game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 due to the opening of the general electric power of 37, the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 4 again. When the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 just before the end of the time saving final fluctuation, depending on the hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal figure fluctuation) started at this time, even in the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving end becomes open.

Hypothetically, if the variation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 remaining hold fluctuation) starts during the long-time electric power open in the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving ends, the special figure 2 hold number will decrease by 1. It becomes 3, and here, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 4 again, which is the number of special figure 2 reservations (remaining reservations) that are digested after the time saving state ends. The remaining pending number becomes 5 (1 + 4). In addition, if the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed twice during the general electricity opening in the remaining reservation digestion mode, the remaining number of reservations may be 6 (larger than 5).

Since the specific game state A (time-saving mode #1, #2) passes through the jackpot state, the player's privilege and game value are large as the number of balls released (the number of acquired balls). Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of remaining reservations does not exceed the specified number of remaining reservations of four and does not become five or more so as not to excessively give a privilege or game value to the player. For this reason, as described above, the stop display time STP1 of the time saving final variation in the specific gaming state A is set to be longer than the long general electricity open time OPN that becomes the general electricity support, and the remaining during the general electricity open time OPN The pending digestion (execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is prevented from being started (STP1>OPN). As a result, the number of remaining reservations can be held at four, which is the predetermined number of remaining reservations.

In addition, the normal open time (for example, 48 msec) caused by the hit result of the normal map fluctuation in the remaining hold digestion mode is the normal open time OPN ( For example, compared to 3400 msec), it is a considerably short time. For this reason, in the short-time normal power release in the remaining hold digestion mode (the normal power release after the normal power release due to the normal power release time OPN), the special figure 2 hold (remaining hold) does not accumulate and the number of remaining holds increases. Therefore, the number of remaining reservations is 4, which is the specified remaining number of reservations.

In addition, considering the normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1 and the normal pattern stop time FZ2, the relationship of stricter conditions STP1 > (OPN + FZ2), or STP1 > (FZ1 + FZ2 + OPN) relationship can be set, but the normal pattern fluctuation time Since FZ1 and the general power supply stop time FZ2 are considerably shorter than the general power supply open time OPN and can be ignored, by setting the relationship of STP1>OPN, the effect of keeping the number of remaining holds at 4 of the specified number of remaining holds is get enough.

On the other hand, in FIG. 63 (B), the specific game states B and C (time saving state, second specific game state) due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving are completed, and the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode ). In the case of FIG. 63 (B), the stop display time STP2 (second period ) is set shorter than the long-term general electric open time OPN (third period, for example, 3400 msec) that provides general electric support. That is, the relationship STP2<OPN is set. Corresponding to time saving modes #3 and #4 (specific game states B and C), the stop display time STP2 of the time saving final fluctuation is set shorter than the long electric power open time OPN when the electric power becomes easy to win. (A4804).

For this reason, when the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (special figure 2 remaining hold fluctuation) starts while the electric power is open in the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving mode # 3 and # 4 are finished, the number of special figure 2 holds is reduced by 1 to 3. When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during this general electricity opening, the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 4 again, and it is the number of special figure 2 reservations (remaining reservations) that are digested after the time saving state ends. The remaining pending number becomes 5 (1 + 4). In addition, if the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed twice while the general electricity is open in the remaining reservation digestion mode, the remaining number of reservations will be 6 (larger than 5).

The specific game states B and C (time-saving modes #3 and #4) occur without going through the jackpot state, and the player's benefits and game value as the number of balls released (the number of acquired balls) are small. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the possibility that the number of remaining reservations exceeds four and becomes five or more is increased so as to give the player greater benefits and game value. For this reason, as described above, the stop display time STP2 of the short time final variation of the specific game states B and C is set shorter than the long general electricity open time OPN that becomes the general electricity support, and during the general electricity open time OPN Digestion of remaining pending (execution of special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is made easy to start (STP2<OPN).

Of course, if the game ball does not pass through the normal figure starting gate 34 just before the end of the time saving final fluctuation, the remaining hold digestion mode after the time saving end will not cause a long electricity opening with a long electricity opening time OPN, or this long electricity The opening will be pushed forward and some will be opened before the end of the short time. In this case, even if the relationship of STP2<OPN is set, the number of remaining reservations may remain at 4, which is the prescribed number of remaining reservations, and may not reach 5 or more.

In addition, considering the normal pattern fluctuation time FZ1 and the normal pattern stop time FZ2, it is possible to set a looser condition STP2 < (OPN + FZ2) relationship, or STP2 < (FZ1 + FZ2 + OPN) relationship, but more STP2 value By setting a strict condition STP2<OPN with a narrow range, the possibility that the number of remaining pending items will be 5 or more is surely increased.

In the present embodiment, the relationship of STP2 (second period) < OPN (third period) < STP1 (first period) is established, and the relationship of STP2 < STP1 is established regardless of the length of the mains open time OPN. holds. In this way, the stop display time STP1 (first period) of the time saving final variation in the specific game state A (time saving mode #1, #2) is changed to the specific game state B, C (time saving mode #3, #4). It is set longer than the stop display time STP2 of the final variation. Here, the stop display time of the time saving final variation is the same as the time from the end of the final special figure variation display game in the specific game state to the start of the next special figure variation display game when there is a remaining hold.

It should be noted that, regardless of the general electricity open time OPN, even if the relationship of STP2 < STP1 is established, the start of the remaining hold fluctuation after the end of the specific game state B, C is earlier than the case of the specific game state A, It is possible to increase the possibility that the number of remaining reserves for the specific game states B and C will be larger than for the specific game state A. - 特許庁For this reason, the difference (difference in privilege and game value) between the specific game state A in which a large number of balls are paid out through the big win state and the specific game states B and C in which small balls are paid out without going through the big win state is alleviated. can be done. Therefore, even in specific game states B and C (time saving mode #3, #4) due to ceiling time saving or sudden time saving, such as specific game state A (time saving mode #1, #2) following a big hit, Benefits and game values are compensated, and interest in games increases.

In addition, when the conditions for generating the specific game state B and C are established during the specific game state A, that is, when the ceiling number of times is reached during the specific game state A or when the support hit result occurs, the time saving final fluctuation may be set to STP2 (second period), which is shorter than STP1, instead of STP1 (first period). In this case, after the big hit, the time saving state (specific game state B, C) due to the ceiling time saving or sudden time saving can be continuously (overlapped) generated from the specific game state A, but the stop display time of the time saving final fluctuation is short. set to STP2, and after a series of time-saving states (specific game state A and specific game states B, C) after the big hit, after the time-saving final fluctuation, a small STP2 (second period) benefit and game value are further given, It can improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, basically, when the number of times of time saving in the specific game states B and C that continue to the specific game state A ends, the system shifts to the remaining reserved consumption mode, and the time saving final fluctuations are the fluctuations in the specific game states B and C. When specific game states B and C occur from specific game state A, the time reduction fluctuation count 1 and 2 areas are overwritten to the time reduction count (initial value of time reduction fluctuation count 1 and 2) of specific game state B and C This is because the number of remaining time reductions in the specific game state A disappears. However, even if the number of time reductions in the specific game states B and C continuing to the specific game state A is completed, the remaining number of time reductions in the specific game state A is copied to another predetermined area and remains without disappearing. In the case of , it is not necessary to return to the specific game state A from the specific game states B and C continuing to the specific game state A, and not to shift to the transition state (residual hold digestion mode). In this case, the time saving final variation is the variation in the specific game state A. The remaining number of time reductions is smaller than the initial value of the time reduction variation number 2 for the specific game state A and greater than zero.

In addition, even if the time saving pattern (sapo hit result) that can cause the specific game state B and C is stopped and displayed during the specific game state A, the stop display time of the time saving final variation is set to STP1, which is larger than STP2, instead of STP2. can be set. Even if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed, in the case of a configuration (preferred configuration) that does not continuously generate the time saving state by the time saving pattern from the specific game state A, the long first period (STP1) By holding the number of remaining reservations to be consumed after the specific game state A at the specified remaining number of reservations, it is possible to prevent the specific game state A following a big win from becoming too advantageous. In addition, even in the case of such a configuration as to continuously generate the time-saving state by the time-saving pattern from the specific game state A, since the specific game state B, C passes through the specific game state A following the big hit, the specific game It is possible to prevent states B and C from becoming too advantageous.

[Actions and effects of the second embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a special figure variation display game), and when the result of the game is a special result, the player An advantageous special game state (for example, a jackpot state) can be generated. The game control means can generate a first specific game state (for example, a specific game state A) that is advantageous to the player following the special game state following the generation of the special game state, and generates the special game state. It is possible to generate a second specific game state (for example, specific game states B and C) that is advantageous to the player. The game control means controls the first period from the end of the final game in the first specific game state to the start of the next game (for example, the stop display time STP1 of the time saving final variation) to the end of the final game in the second specific game state. to the start of the next game (for example, the stop display time STP2 of the time saving final variation).

In such a gaming machine 10, since the second period is shorter than the first period, after the end of the second specific game state, the starting memory (residual hold) accumulated to the maximum in the second specific game state is consumed quickly, and this It is possible to store extra starting memory (residual hold) by the amount. For this reason, the first specific game state (for example, specific game state A) in which the profit of the special game state (for example, ball output) can be obtained via the special game state, and the profit of the special game state without passing through the special game state ( For example, the difference in profit between the second specific game state (for example, specific game states B and C) in which no balls are obtained can be alleviated. Therefore, even in the second specific game state that does not involve the occurrence of the special game state, the profit is compensated and the interest in the game increases.

The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment is convertible between an easy-win state and an easy-non-win state, and the first specific game state and the second specific game state are easier to convert to the easy-win state than the normal game state. A variable winning device (for example, a normal variable winning device 37) is provided. A third period (for example, open-circuit time OPN) during which the variable winning device is in the easy winning state is shorter than the first period (STP1) and longer than the second period (STP2). Therefore, it is possible to hold the number of remaining reservations digested after the end of the first specific game state (for example specific game state A) to the specified number of remaining reservations, and second specific game state (for example specific game states B, C) It is possible to increase the possibility that the number of remaining reservations that will be consumed after the end of will exceed the prescribed number of remaining reservations. As a result, even in the second specific game state that does not involve the occurrence of the special game state, profits are ensured and the interest in the game increases.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the game control means (for example, the game control device 100) sets the period from the end of the final game in the first specific game state to the start of the next game to the first period (STP1). The period from the end of the final game in the second specific game state to the start of the next game can be set as the second period (STP2). The game control means, when the condition for generating the second specific game state is established during the first specific game state (for example, when the ceiling number of times is reached or when the support hit result occurs), the first specific game state Alternatively, the period from the end of the final game in the specific game state as the second specific game state to the start of the next game can be set not to the first period but to a second period shorter than the first period.

In such a gaming machine 10, after a series of game states including the special game state, the first specific game state, and the second specific game state, a small second period (STP2) of special benefits and game values are further given, It can improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the game control means (for example, the game control device 100) can set the period from the end of the final game in the first specific game state to the start of the next game as the first period. A period from the end of the final game in the second specific game state to the start of the next game can be set as the second period. The game control means, even if the result of the game that can cause the second specific game state (for example, time saving pattern, support hit result) is displayed during the first specific game state, the first specific game state or the second specific game The period from the end of the final game to the start of the next game in the specific game state as a state can be set not to the second period but to a first period (STP1) longer than the second period (STP2).

In such a gaming machine 10, even if the result of the game that can generate the second specific game state is displayed, the second specific game state is not continuously (overlapped) generated from the first specific game state. In the case of , the long first period (STP1) can prevent the first specific game state following the special game state from becoming too advantageous. Also, even in the case of a configuration in which the second specific game state is continuously (overlapped) generated from the first specific game state, the second specific game state passes through the first specific game state following the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second specific game state from becoming too advantageous.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 81. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to a variation pattern table (variation pattern selection table, variation pattern group) and the like for selecting a variation pattern for a variation display game.

[Game board]
The game board 30 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 of FIG. 64 is different from the game board 30 of FIG. 2 in that a normal figure start gate 34 is added near the general winning opening 35 in the game area 32 on the left lower side of the center case 40. . Two normal figure start gates 34 are present in the game areas 32 on the right side and the lower left side of the center case 40 . The function and configuration of the normal map starting gate 34 itself are the same as in the first embodiment. That is, inside the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34 and is detected by the gate switch 34a, the normal pattern variation display game is executed.

Since there is a normal figure start gate 34 in the lower left game area 32, even if it is a left hit (normal hit) that makes the game ball flow down on the left side of the game area 32, the game ball at the normal figure start gate 34 By passing, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is executed. When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a winning result, the movable member 37b is converted to an open state (easy winning state), and the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 (general electric) is permitted. However, in order to win the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 of the game area 32 on the right side, the player must, immediately after the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 on the lower left, the shooting mode of the game ball (hitting ) is required to quickly switch from left-handed to right-handed. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 on the lower left and the normal variable winning device 37 in the right game area 32 is converted to the open state, the game ball successfully enters the normal variable winning device 37. is not limited.

[Example of game state transition diagram (game flow)]
FIG. 65 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) illustrating game state transitions in the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is similar to FIG. 60, but in the specific game state B (time reduction mode # 3) generated by reaching the ceiling number of times, the general electric support becomes high support, and the specific game state C (time reduction mode # 3) generated by the time reduction pattern 4) differs from FIG. 60 in that the general electric support becomes a medium support. In addition, in the present embodiment, the specific game state is a time-saving state, but a part or all of the specific game state is a high-probability state with a high-probability jackpot probability (general electric support / special pattern high probability). is also possible.

In the middle support, the variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than the normal game state without the normal power support (power support), but more difficult to convert to the open state than the high support. Therefore, the profit obtained by the player increases in the order of no electric support (no general electric support)<middle support<high support. In the specific game state C, the normal variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than the normal game state, but more difficult to convert to the open state than the specific game state B.

In addition, in the specific game state A (time saving mode #1, #2) that occurs following the big hit, the general electric support may be the same type of high support as the specific game state B, or another type of high support. It can be support. In other types of high supports, the normal variable winning device 37 is easier to convert to the open state than the specific game state C, and is harder or easier to convert to the open state than the specific game state B. If the high supports of the specific game state A and the specific game state B are of the same type, the control becomes simple, while if they are of different types, variations in the game are produced.

In the specific game states A and B, since the normal variable winning device 37 is easily opened, hitting to the right aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 is recommended as the shooting mode of the game ball. Therefore, in the specific game states A and B, the main starting region is the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting region is the first starting winning port 36, so the main variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable The display game is a special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, as described above, the occurrence of the winning to the first start winning port 36 or the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory, special figure 1 pending) is the first to enable execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game It is a starting condition. In addition, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the generation of the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory, special figure 2 reservation) is the second start condition that makes it possible to execute the special figure 2 variation display game there is

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the specific game state C, although the normal variable winning device 37 is slightly easier to open than in the normal game state due to the middle support, if the right-handed hit is always continued during the specific game state C, the start winning opening 36 The disadvantage of not winning the prize will be bigger. For example, if the number of prizes won into the starting prize-winning port 36 per unit number of shot balls in the case of left-handed hitting is greater than the number of prizes won in the normal variable prize-winning device 37 per unit number of fired balls in the case of right-handed hitting, The disadvantage in hitting is greater than the disadvantage in hitting left-handed.

For this reason, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state C, left-handed hitting aiming at the starting prize-winning opening 36 is basically recommended as the shooting mode (how to hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the specific game state C, the main starting area is the first start winning port 36 and the secondary starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, so the main variable display game is the special figure 1 variable display game and the secondary variable display game is It becomes a special figure 2 variable display game.

As the production mode of the specific game state A, there are time saving modes #1 and #2 as in FIG. 54A and FIG. In the present embodiment, the numbers m1 and m2 of time saving modes #1 and #2 are fixed values of 4 times and 30 times, respectively, but may be variable values in order to increase game variations. For example, the number of times m2 of time saving may be selected by lottery to be 20 times, 30 times, or 50 times. In this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the small hit probability of the special figure 2 variation display game is 1/15.79, and the time saving frequency m2 is small. Therefore, in the time-saving mode #2, since a small hit (big hit state of V passage) does not occur with certainty, the next continuation fixed mode (fixed mode) does not occur.

The production mode of the specific game state B is the time saving mode #3, and the production mode of the specific game state C is the time saving mode #4. It can be distinguished from the time saving state by (c time saving) by production. Incidentally, it is also possible to reduce the development cost by making the performance mode the same in the specific game state B and the specific game state C so as to share the performance. In the present embodiment, the numbers m3 and m4 of time saving modes #3 and #4 are fixed values of 251 times and 30 times, respectively, but they may be variable in order to increase game variations. For example, there are multiple time-saving patterns such as 50 time-saving patterns, 30 time-saving patterns, and 20 time-saving patterns. A lottery may be made to set the average number of times of the number of times of shortening of working hours m4 to 30 times.

In addition, time-saving modes #3 and #4 are different production modes from time-saving modes #1 and #2. C) can be distinguished by the presentation. Incidentally, the same production mode can be used for the specific game state A and the specific game states B and C to reduce the development cost by making the production common.

Next, the transition (transition) from each game state will be described.

In this embodiment, the number of ceiling times m5 is 580 times, during the specific game state A and in the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), after the end of the jackpot state under predetermined conditions (special low probability state, non-variable state state) The number of times of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed never reaches the ceiling number of times. Therefore, there is no transition to the specific game state B from the specific game state A and the remaining pending digestion mode.

Then, in this embodiment, in the normal game state or the specific game state C, when the number of special figure fluctuation display games executed under predetermined conditions after the end of the jackpot state reaches the ceiling number of times, the ceiling time reduction (b time reduction) Then, it transitions to the specific game state B (time saving mode # 3).

In addition, in this embodiment, there is no support hit (time saving result, time saving pattern) in the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, and there is a support hit only in the result of the special figure 1 variation display game. In order to do this, the support hit determination process (A3607-A3609) is executed in the big hit flag 1 setting process (FIG. 14), and conversely, the support hit determination process (A3707- A3709) is not executed. Therefore, basically, during the specific game state A in which the main variable display game is the special figure 2 variable display game, the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), and the specific game state B, the transition to the specific game state C is not performed.

Then, in the present embodiment, in the normal game state where the main variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is the result of the support hit (time saving pattern), suddenly time saving (c time saving ) as a specific game state C (time saving mode # 4). In this way, in a normal game state in which the player's profit is small and the presentation tends to be monotonous, the benefit of winning the support (time-saving pattern) can be provided to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the transition condition is satisfied without occurrence of a small hit or a big hit in the specific game states B and C, the transition state (remaining reservation digestion mode) for digesting the remaining reservation is made. The transition condition for transitioning from the specific game states B and C to the transition state may be the same as in FIG. 60 of the second embodiment. That is, the transition conditions are (i) that the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific gaming state exceeds the number of times of reduction in time m3, m4 (first predetermined number of times), and (ii) special figure variation in the specific gaming state Either the total number of executions of the display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display game) exceeds a second predetermined number of times that is larger than the number of times of time reduction m3 and m4 (first predetermined number of times) It is to be. In addition, the second predetermined number of times may be obtained by adding the maximum value (for example, 4) of the special figure 1 reservation number or the special figure 2 reservation number to the number of times of time saving. Also, regarding the condition (i) when transitioning from the specific game state C to the transition state, even if the number of executions of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game) in the specific game state C exceeds the time reduction number m4 good.

[Time saving number of times corresponding to the pattern and the number of prescribed remaining reservations]
FIG. 66 is a table showing the number of times of reduction in working hours and the number of prescribed remaining reservations corresponding to the symbols that are the types of hits in the special figure variation display game in the third embodiment. The pattern is a pattern in the case of a big hit (including a big hit by V winning), and the time saving pattern is excluded here.

As shown in (A), in this embodiment, in the state without general electric support, the jackpot pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game includes only the pattern A1 (mainly the jackpot in the normal game state). . Regarding the pattern A1, it is the same as the pattern A of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, except that the number of times of time saving (here, four times) is different. In addition, in the state with general electric support, there is only the pattern P1 in the jackpot pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game (mainly the jackpot in the specific game state C). Regarding the pattern P1, the number of times of time saving is 30 times (m2), and the prescribed number of remaining reservations is 4. The big-hit symbols A1 and P1 are not the big-hit by V winning, and are stop symbols determined by the big-hit symbol random numbers. It should be noted that it is possible to configure the symbol A1 and the symbol P1 to be the stop symbols of the big hit related to the V prize in the small win of the special figure 1 variable display game. , the symbol A1 and the symbol P1 may be a small-hit stop symbol determined by a small-hit symbol random number.

When the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit in the state without the general electric support, the symbol is only the symbol A1, and the distribution is 100%. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variation display game of the main variation display game becomes a big hit in the normal game state, the game transitions to the time saving mode #1 of the specific game state A (4 times of time saving) after the big win state. In addition, the pattern P1 may be provided in addition to the pattern A1, and the transition to the time saving mode #2 of the specific game state A may be made after the big hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game (dotted line in FIG. 65 etc.). Alternatively, the pattern P1 may be provided instead of the pattern A1, and when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit, the normal game state may be changed to the time saving mode #2 of the specific game state A via the big win state. .

In the state with general electric support, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the symbol is only the symbol P1, and the distribution is 100%. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variation display game of the main variation display game becomes a big hit in the specific game state C, the game transitions to the time saving mode #2 (30 times of time saving) of the specific game state A after the big win state. In addition, a pattern A1 may be provided in addition to the pattern P1, and the transition to the time saving mode #1 of the specific game state A may be made after the jackpot state of the special figure 1 variable display game. Alternatively, a pattern A1 is provided instead of the pattern P1, and when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit, the transition from the specific game state C to the time saving mode #1 of the specific game state A via the big win state is performed. good.

As in (B), regarding the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable display game in the state with general electric support, there is only one type of pattern S1 in which the number of times of reduction in time m2 given after the jackpot is 30 times. The allocation is 100%. In addition, in the present embodiment, the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is due to the V prize in the small hit, but it is not limited to this. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the main fluctuation display game becomes a big hit in the specific game state AC with general electric support, the transition to the time saving mode # 2 of the specific game state A is made. In addition to the pattern S1, two patterns are provided for the number of times of time reduction m2 of 20 times and 50 times, and one of 20 times, 30 times, and 50 times is selected as the number of times of time reduction m2 by lottery of patterns by distribution. good.

In this embodiment, the small hit probability differs between the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the small hit upper limit judgment value (A3900) is the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display. It differs from game to game. The small hit probability of the special figure 2 variation display game is 1/15.79, while the small hit probability of the special figure 1 variation display game is 1/199.80. Therefore, in the specific game state A, the specific game state B, and the transition state (remaining pending digestion mode) in which the main variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, the main variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game. Compared to the normal game state and the specific game state C, it is easier to generate a small win and a big win due to the V prize in the small win.

The pattern G1 of the special figure 2 variable display game jackpot (jackpot by V winning in the small hit in the remaining reserve) in the state without the general electric support is the same as the pattern G of the first embodiment. There is only one type of pattern, that is, a pattern G1 in which the number m2 of time saving given after the big hit is 30 times, and the distribution is 100%. Therefore, when the special figure 2 variation display game of the main variation display game becomes a big hit in the transition state (remaining hold digestion mode), the transition to the time saving mode #2 of the specific game state A is made. In addition, the pattern G1 and the pattern S1 may be used as a common pattern because the pattern G1 and the pattern S1 shift to the same time-saving mode after the big hit is completed. In addition to the pattern G1, two patterns, 20 times and 50 times of the number of times of time reduction m2, are provided, and one of 20 times, 30 times, and 50 times is selected as the number of times of time reduction m2 by lottery of patterns by distribution. good. Also, a pattern A1 may be provided in addition to the pattern G1, and the transition to the time saving mode #1 of the specific game state A may be made (dotted line in FIG. 65).

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the normal game state, the transition state, the specific game state A, the specific game state B, and the specific game state C occur based on individual occurrence conditions (transition conditions). (transition conditions) may be different from each other.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes a big hit in the specific game state C, the time saving mode is performed after the big hit is finished, as in the case where the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a big hit (in the case of symbols S1 and G1). Transition to # 2 and get 30 times of time saving with high support. Therefore, even if the specific game state C is medium support rather than high support, it is very advantageous to the player and the interest in the game is improved. In addition, since the specific game state C of the middle support does not change to the state with the general electric support, it is treated as a consecutive game in which the big hit state and the specific game state continue without going through the normal game state.

In addition, as illustrated in the pie chart of the ratio of the upper limit of the number of rounds in (C), when there are multiple upper limits of the number of rounds (number of jackpot rounds), there is a jackpot pattern corresponding to each upper limit of the number of rounds. good. For example, as in (C), when there are three types of round number upper limit values 9R, 6R, and 3R for the special figure 2 variable display game jackpot, pattern S1-9R (distribution 15%), pattern S1 -6R (10% distribution), S1-3R (distribution 75%), G1-9R (15% distribution), G1-6R (10% distribution), G1-3R (75% distribution) , there may be a symbol corresponding to the upper limit of the number of rounds. Incidentally, in the case of a big win due to a V prize in a small win, the small win may be regarded as one round and may be included in the round number upper limit value, or the small win may not be included in the round number upper limit value.

[Time-saving operation status]
FIG. 67 is a table summarizing the operating conditions of time saving when a new time saving action opportunity occurs from each game state. The time-saving activation trigger is a big hit if it is a time-saving (a time-saving) via a big hit, and if it is a ceiling time-saving (b time-saving), it reaches the ceiling number of times, and if it is suddenly time-saving (c), it is a time-saving pattern. setting and derivation (display).

As described above, in the normal game state (including the remaining pending digestion mode) and the specific game state AC, when a big hit occurs as a trigger for the occurrence of a time saving, a time saving is activated immediately after the big hit ends via the big hit state. Then transition to the specific game state A.

In the normal game state (including the remaining hold digestion mode), the specific game state A, and the specific game state C, when the ceiling number of times is reached as a trigger for b time saving, b time saving is activated and it is possible to transition to specific game state B is. However, in the specific game state B, even if the ceiling number of times is reached as a trigger for b time saving, the new ceiling time saving activation flag (A5115) is not generated, and the new b time saving is inoperable. In this way, it is prohibited to repeatedly generate b time saving in the specific game state B, to prevent the situation in which the specific game state B is substantially extended, and to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous. can. It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, since the ceiling number of times cannot be reached in the specific game state A and the remaining hold digestion mode, the specific game state A and the transition from the remaining hold digestion mode in the normal game state to the specific game state B never do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

In addition, as described above, when the ceiling number of times is reached, the middle support specific game state C (c time reduction) transitions to the high support specific game state B (b time reduction), the production mode is from time saving mode # 4 to time saving mode # 3 , and the performance changes. Also, in this case, the method of hitting the game ball is switched from the left-hand hitting state in which left-hand hitting is recommended to the right-hand hitting state in which right-hand hitting is recommended, and the main variation display game changes from the special figure 1 variation display game to the special figure 2 variation. Switch to display game.

In addition, in the normal game state (excluding the remaining hold digestion mode), when the time saving pattern is derived at the support hit as a trigger for c time saving, c time saving is activated and transitions to specific game state C. However, in the specific game state A, the specific game state B, and the remaining hold digestion mode of the normal game state, the main variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and as described above, the special figure 2 variation display Since support hits (time saving patterns) do not occur in the game, c time saving does not operate and transition to specific game state C does not occur. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the specific game state C, even if the time saving pattern is derived as a trigger for c time saving by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, for example, the initial value of the number of times of time reduction fluctuation setting (A5126) and support operation By not executing the setting process (A5127), the operation of the c time saving is prohibited and the new c time saving is made inoperable. In this way, it is possible to prohibit the repeated occurrence of c time reduction in the specific game state C, eliminate the situation in which the specific game state C is substantially extended, and prevent the player from being excessively advantageous. In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived in the specific game state C, it is also possible to reset the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations, execute the support operation setting process, and operate a new c time saving. However, even in this configuration, if the remaining number of times of time saving is larger than the initial value of the number of times of time reduction fluctuation (the number of times of time saving of new c time saving), the remaining number of times of saving time will suddenly decrease, so a new c You may disable the time saver and cancel it.

In addition, in the specific game states A and B, if the start winning port 36 is won and there is no special figure 2 start memory, the special figure 1 variable display game may be executed, but the c time saving operation is forcibly prohibited It is also possible not to transition to the specific game state C by pressing. In order to do this, in the specific game states A and B, even if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a support hit (time saving pattern), the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations is set (A5126) and the support operation The configuration is such that the setting process (A5127) is not executed.

[Display of collective display device]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the display of the collective display device 50 regarding the third embodiment. The display of the collective display device 50 other than the display shown in FIG. 68 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

In this embodiment, since there is no probability variable state of special figure high probability, unlike the first embodiment, the LED lamp D9 (third game state display unit 59) is the LED lamp D7 (first game state display unit 57) and Similarly, lighting or extinguishing informs that it is right-handed or left-handed (normal hitting).

In the state without general power support (no power support), that is, in the normal game state or transition state, the LED lamps D7 and D9 of the collective display device 50 are extinguished to indicate the left-handed state (normal hitting state), The LED lamp D17 of the collective display device 50 is also extinguished to indicate that the variable time reduction function is not in operation (that is, the non-time saving state).

In the specific game state C, which is c time saving, the LED lamps D7 and D9 are extinguished to indicate that it is in a left-handed state (normal hitting state), while the LED lamp D17 is lit to indicate that the variable time reduction function is operating (i.e. It indicates that it is a time saving state). However, exceptionally, if a normal pattern variation display game hit (normal pattern hit) occurs during c time reduction (specific game state C), the normal pattern is stopped at the timing of the winning pattern, right hand hitting state in which the general electricity is released LED lamps D7 and D9 as right-handed LEDs light up to indicate that. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34 in the lower left game area 32 in the left-handed state, the normal pattern fluctuation display game executed becomes a hit, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by the middle support. When converting to a state, an instruction (suggestion) to hit to the right is notified to the player.

In the specific game state C, the display device 41 shows left-handed instruction display and right-handed, corresponding to the left-handed state and right-handed state indicated by the LED lamps D7 and D9 of the collective display device 50. You may display the right-handed instruction|indication display which instruct|indicates. By doing so, even an inexperienced player can easily grasp right-handed hitting, and can easily receive the benefit of opening the general electric power supply by the middle support. It should be noted that the right-handed instruction display on the display device 41 is displayed not at the timing when the LED lamps D7 and D9 are turned on, but at the timing when the normal variable prize winning device 37 (general electricity) is actually opened so as to benefit the player. may be Also, in the specific game state C, when the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 is a short time (for example, 50 msec or less) per normal pattern (in the case of a normal electric opening pattern H1 described later), so as not to disappoint the player. , the indication of hitting to the right may not be displayed on the display device 41 .

In addition, in the specific game state C, the right-handed state where right-handed is recommended occurs exceptionally. At 41, a left-handed instruction display may be displayed. In this way, since a skilled player hits to the right in response to the opening of the general electric power supply, it becomes easier to receive benefits from the medium support, and there is a possibility that the operation of the gaming machine 10 will improve as the player tries to increase his skill level. be.

Further, in the specific game state C, since the left-handed state is normal, the left-handed instruction display may not be displayed on the display device 41 so as not to make the player uncomfortable. The left-handed instruction display may be displayed on the display device 41 only for a predetermined period when the transition is made.

Furthermore, in the specific game state A that is a time saving and the specific game state B that is b time saving, the LED lamps D7 and D9 are lit to indicate that it is a right-handed state, and the LED lamp D17 is lit to shorten the fluctuation time. Indicates that the function is active.

During the big win state and the small win game state, the LED lamps D7 and D9 are lit to indicate a right-handed state, and the LED lamp D17 is extinguished to indicate a state in which the variable time reduction function is not activated (that is, a non-time-saving state). indicates that It should be noted that, exceptionally, in the specific game state, during a short-time small hit game state without V winning due to the small hit result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (while the small hit is open in FIG. 81), the variable time shortening function is set. In order to keep it working without turning it off (without saving the time saving flag), the LED lamps D7 and D9 light up to indicate that it is in the right-handed state, and the LED lamp D17 lights up to activate the variable time reduction function. Indicates that it is in a state (that is, a time saving state). In addition, during a long-time small-hit game state due to the small-hit result of the special figure 2 variable display game (during the small-hit opening in Fig. 81), the V prize is surely generated and the big hit is achieved, so the variable time reduction function is turned off. Then (by saving the time saving flag), the LED lamp D17 is turned off to indicate that the variable time reduction function is not in operation (that is, the non-working time saving state).

[Characteristics of normal map fluctuation display game and normal electric movement]
FIG. 69 and FIG. 70 are diagrams showing the characteristics of the general pattern variation display game and the general pattern movement in the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 69, there are three types of winning patterns (hitting stop pattern, normal drawing winning pattern) in the normal pattern fluctuation display game. In this embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of general electric support, the probability per normal pattern is always a constant value 250/251, and changes between low probability (low probability normal pattern) and high probability (high probability normal pattern) not controlled as such. In addition, it is good also as a low probability lower than 250/251 in the specific game state C of normal game state or middle support.

The start memory number (normal pattern pending number) of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is 4. The maximum count number (upper limit of count number) for general electric is 5. The normal pattern stop time (normal pattern display time) is 600 msec regardless of the game state.

The normal pattern fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is 5000 msec in the normal game state and the transition state without the general electric support (electric support), and 4900 msec in the c specific game state C, and a short time. It is 200 msec in the specific game state A of b and the specific game state B of b time saving. Normal figure fluctuation time is shortened in the order of no electric support (normal game state, transition state)> medium support (specific game state C)> high support (specific game state A, B). In this way, in the specific game state C of the medium support, compared to the normal game state and the transition state without the general power support (low support), it is a little easier to enter the general power winning easy state (open state). , In the specific game states A and B of high support, it is extremely easy to enter the easy win state of the general electric power. In addition, normal pattern fluctuation time is set based on the support state (that is, no power support, medium support, high support) corresponding to each game state in normal pattern normal processing (A7920 in FIG. 36).

As shown in FIG. 70(A), by a lottery based on the distribution of 65521 normal pattern winning pattern random numbers (A7710), the winning stop pattern number 1 corresponding to the winning 1 pattern is set with a probability of 65321/65521. A winning stop pattern number 2 corresponding to a winning 2 symbol is set with a probability of /65521, and a winning stopping pattern number 3 corresponding to a winning 3 symbol is set with a probability of 100/65521 (A7912).

Depending on the combination of lighting / extinguishing of the LED lamps D8, D10, D18 of the variable display unit 53 for the normal pattern variation display game, the winning 1 pattern is (light off, lit, light off), and the winning 2 pattern is (light off, light off, lights up), and the winning 3 symbols are displayed like (lights out, lights up, lights up). In addition, the lost symbols of the lost stop symbol number (A7909) which is the stop symbol number 0 are displayed like (light off, light off, light off).

The general electric open pattern is an open mode of the ordinary fluctuation prize winning device 37 (universal electric) per one general pattern. In the normal time, that is, in the normal game state and the transition state, the general electric open pattern is a pattern H1 of short electric open once for all symbols of 1 to 3 hits, and the pattern H1 is 100% probability. There is no public electricity support because it is selected (no electricity support). In addition, in the specific game state A (a time reduction) and the specific game state B (b time reduction), the general electric open pattern is a pattern H3 of long electric open once for all patterns of 1 to 3, Since the pattern H3 is selected with a probability of 100%, the support is high.

On the other hand, in the specific game state C (c short time), the normal electric open pattern is the pattern H1 for the winning 1 symbol, and the normal electric 2 times open pattern H2 for the winning 2 and 3 symbols. H1 and pattern H2 are mixed. The pattern H1 of short-time normal/universal open once is selected with a probability of 65321/65521×100%, and the pattern H2 of normal/electrical open twice is selected with a probability of 200/65521×100%. In this way, in the specific game state C, the selection probability of the pattern H1 in which the mains are open for a shorter time than the pattern H2 is much higher than the selection probability of the pattern H2. In the medium support (specific game state C), by making it slightly more advantageous than without the electric support (normal game state), the profit on the player side and the game center side are improved so that the profit on the player side does not become too large. adjusting profits.

In addition, as described above, since the patterns corresponding to wins 2 and 3 are the same in each game state, wins 2 and 3 may be combined into one win.

As shown in FIG. 70(B), in the short-time opening pattern H1, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened only once for a short time. In pattern H1, the normal electric open time (A8407) is 36 msec, the normal electric remaining ball processing time (A8708) is 600 msec, the normal electric ending time (A8903) is 100 msec, and after the normal electric ending, the next normal electric fluctuation display game is possible. The recovery time up to is 4 msec (interrupt cycle of timer interrupt processing).

In the pattern H2 of opening the electric power twice, the ordinary variable winning device 37 is opened twice, and the opening time of the electric power is 36 msec for the first opening and 1624 msec for the second opening. The normal/commercial open time (A8407) for the first opening is the same as the normal/commercial open time of 36 msec in pattern H1. In the first opening, the pattern H2 is indistinguishable from the pattern H1, but in the second opening, the player is surprised and the amusement of the game is improved. The power open time for the second open (A8704) is considerably longer than the power open time for the first open. In pattern H2, the electrical open time (1624 msec) of the second opening or the total open time (36 msec+1624 msec) of the first and second openings is longer than the electrical open time of 36 msec in pattern H1. In addition, the normal electric remaining ball processing time, the normal drawing ending time, and the return time of pattern H2 are the same as those of pattern H1, and the control of the normal electric is simplified.

Furthermore, in pattern H2, the wait time (A8702) between the first and second openings is longer than the first and second electrical opening times, eg, 3000 msec. The player who confirmed the passage of the game ball to the lower left normal starting gate 34 and the opening of the first normal electric current has a margin to switch from left hitting to right hitting due to this long wait time, and the second time It is possible to hit right in time for the opening of the discharge. The total time (36 msec + 3000 msec + 1624 msec + 704 msec) from the start of the mains disconnection to the completion of the return time of pattern H2 is longer than the total time (36 msec + 704 msec) of pattern H1 and the total time (2800 msec + 704 msec) of pattern H3.

In the long-time open pattern H3, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened only once for a long time. The electrical open time (A8407) of pattern H3 is 2800 msec, which is longer than the electrical open time of pattern H1 (36 msec). ). Therefore, the pattern H3 makes it easier to win a prize to the normal variable prize winning device 37 than the patterns H1 and H2. The normal electric remaining ball processing time, the normal drawing ending time, and the return time of pattern H3 are the same as those of patterns H1 and H2, and the control of the normal electric is simplified.

As described above, the total open time of the general electric power increases in the order of pattern H1 < pattern H2 < pattern H3, and the selection probability of pattern H1 having the shortest total open time is no electric support (normal game state, transition state) > medium support (specific game state C) > high support (specific game state A, B). Then, the selection probability of the pattern H1 is 100% without the electric support, and the selection probability of the pattern H3 is 100% with the high support. In addition, as described above, the normal figure fluctuation time decreases in the order of no electric sapo > medium sapo > high sapo. Therefore, the profit obtained by the player increases in the order of no electrical support<intermediate support<high support.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the general electric open time, the hit start pointer value, and the hit end pointer value are the general pattern stop pattern information (hit 1-3 symbols), and the support state ( (A8405-A8407 in FIG. 39, A8704 in FIG. 41). Therefore, with respect to the pattern H1 when the general voltage is disconnected, the pattern H2 when the normal voltage is disconnected, and the pattern H3 when the normal voltage is disconnected, the normal voltage disconnection time is set for each of the patterns H1 to H3. Then, regarding the pattern H1 and the pattern H3, the win start pointer value and the win end pointer value are set to the same value (here, 0), and the general electricity is opened only once. Further, regarding the pattern H3, the winning start pointer value and the winning end pointer value are set to different values (here, 0 and 2), and the general electricity is opened twice.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the pattern H2 is the only pattern that has the second normal open. , And, only for the support state (middle support) corresponding to the specific game state C, that is, only for the pattern H2, it is set by the general electric operation transition setting process (A8702 and A8704 in FIG. 41).

The normal electric remaining ball processing time and the normal drawing ending time are related to the normal drawing stop pattern information (1-3 hits) and the support state according to each game state (no electric support, medium support, high support) The same value is set (A8708 in FIG. 41, A8903 in FIG. 42) regardless of which of the patterns H1 to H3. However, these may be set corresponding to the general pattern stop symbol information and the support state.

[Special figure information setting process]
FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process according to the third embodiment. Special figure information setting processing is executed in special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3404, A3504). Note that in the process of FIG. 71, unlike FIG. 19 of the first embodiment, the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation are not distinguished for simplicity, but they may be distinguished.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group selection pointer table (A14201), and uses this variable group selection pointer table to obtain a variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A14202). As shown in FIG. 65, production modes such as normal mode, remaining hold consumption mode, time saving mode #1-#4, etc. correspond to each game state (normal game state, transition state, specific game state AC). Therefore, by the processing of step A14202, a variation pattern table is set according to each game state as described later.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the variation group selection offset table (A14203), and uses this variation group selection offset table to obtain the offset data corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag and the stop symbol pattern (A14204 ).

The fluctuation pattern discrimination flag indicates the pattern of the fluctuation to be started (special figure 1 or special figure 2), and whether the special figure fluctuation display game to be started is a special figure 1 fluctuation display game or a special figure 2 fluctuation display game. discriminate. Therefore, by the processing of step A14204, the variation pattern table can be made different between the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game as described later. Also, the stop symbol pattern corresponds to the result of the special figure variation display game (big hit, small hit, support hit, loss). Therefore, by the processing of step A14204, it is possible to vary the variation pattern table corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game.

Next, the game control device 100 adds the variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A14205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation distribution information area as the variation distribution information (A14206).

[Variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process according to the third embodiment. Variation pattern setting processing is executed in special figure 1 variation start processing and special figure 2 variation start processing (A3406, A3506). Note that in the process of FIG. 72, unlike FIG. 20 of the first embodiment, the first half variation and the second half variation are not distinguished for simplicity, but they may be distinguished. For simplicity, only one variation pattern random number (for example, variation pattern random number 2) out of variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is used.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable selection address table (variation group table) (A14301). Then, the address of the fluctuation pattern table (variation pattern selection table, fluctuation selection table) corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information (A14206) is acquired and prepared (A14302). Here, the variation pattern table is a variation pattern group consisting of a group of one or more variation patterns (variation numbers), and is set by obtaining its address (for example, top address). As described above, in the special figure information setting process (FIG. 71), the fluctuation distribution information is set based on the effect mode corresponding to the game state, the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag, and the stop symbol pattern. For this reason, each game state (normal game state, transition state, specific game state AC), special figure type (type of special symbol: special figure 1 or special figure 2), result of special figure fluctuation display game (jackpot, A variation pattern table (variation pattern group) can be set corresponding to small hits, support hits, and losses.

After that, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (A14303). Then, the allocation processing (A14304) is performed, and the variation number obtained as a result of the allocation is acquired and saved in the variation number area (A14305). The variation number is associated with a predetermined variation pattern, and indicates a predetermined variation pattern (for example, normal reach loss A, SP3 reach big hit B, etc.). In this way, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation number as the variation pattern is set by the allocation process as a lottery based on the variation pattern table.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process according to the third embodiment. The fluctuation start information setting process is executed in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3407, A3507). In FIG. 73, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 23 of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted. In the process of FIG. 73, unlike FIG. 23 of the first embodiment, there is no distinction between the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation for the sake of simplicity, but they may be distinguished.

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is neither a small hit nor a big hit (the result of A4600b is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether it is the time saving mode #1 or the remaining pending digestion mode. (A4600c). In the case of the time saving mode # 1 or the remaining pending digestion mode (the result of A4600c is "Y"), the variation time value corresponding to the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) after the end of the big hit Save in the special game processing timer area (A4615). As a result, in the time saving mode # 1 or the remaining pending digestion mode, in the case of loss (no support hit), the fluctuation time value of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set for each special figure 2 fluctuation number after the end of the big hit Rotational speed control is performed. There is a possibility that the interest in the game can be improved by controlling the number of rotations in the time saving mode #1 or the remaining hold digestion mode.

In step A4600c, instead, it is determined whether it is a specific game state A (time saving mode #1, #2) or a remaining pending digestion mode, and in the specific game state A or remaining pending digestion mode, In this case, rotation speed control of the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game may be performed. Alternatively, in step A4600c, it is determined only whether or not it is the remaining pending digestion mode, and only in the remaining pending digestion mode, if it is out, the rotation speed control of the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game is performed. good too. In step A4600c, it is determined only whether or not it is the time saving mode #1, and only in the time saving mode #1, if it is lost, the rotation speed control of the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game may be performed .

When the variation display game to be started is not the special figure 2 variation display game but the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A4600a is "N"), the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is small. If it is a hit or a big hit (result of A4600b is "Y"), or if it is neither time saving mode #1 nor remaining reservation digestion mode (result of A4600c is "N"), execute the processing of steps A14601-A14605 do.

The game control device 100 clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random number 2 (A14601). Then, the variable time value table is set (A14602), and the variable time value corresponding to the variation number indicating the variation pattern is obtained using the variable time value table (A14603). Thereby, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern is obtained. Subsequently, the variable time value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A14604). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation number (that is, variation pattern) is prepared as an effect command (A14605). Thereby, the variation command (MODE, ACTION) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the next effect command setting process (A4610).

In FIG. 73, the processing of steps A4600a, A4600b, A4600c, A4615, and A4616 may be omitted, and the variation time value corresponding to the variation number (variation pattern) may be acquired in all cases (A14603).

[Setting status of fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 74 shows the setting status of the variation pattern table (variation pattern selection table, variation selection table, variation pattern group) (A14302) set based on the processing of FIGS. It is a table shown for (special figure 1 or special figure 2). As described above, in order to select the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game (first variation display game) by lottery, the special figure 1 variation pattern table is set, and the special figure 2 variation display game (second variation display game ) to select the variation pattern by lottery, the special figure 2 variation pattern table is set.

The special figure 1 variation pattern table related to the special figure 1 variation display game is a normal game state (normal mode) without electric support, a specific game state C (time saving mode # 4) with medium support, and a specific game with high support In state B (time saving mode #3), the same common variation pattern table A is set (A14302). Then, with reference to this variation pattern table A, the variation pattern (variation number) of the special figure 1 variation display game is selected by lottery in the distribution process (A14304).

In the special figure 2 variation pattern table related to the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation pattern table A is set in the same way as the special figure 1 variation pattern table in the normal game state. On the other hand, unlike the normal game state, in the specific game state C and the specific game state B, the common same variation pattern table C is set for the special figure 2 variation pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 65, when transitioning from the specific game state C to the specific game state B by reaching the ceiling number of times, since there is no change in the time saving state (time saving mode), the same special figure type variation display game ( Regarding the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game), if the variation pattern table is kept the same without changing, there is little discomfort, and the game rules are not violated. If the variation pattern table is made the same, the variation pattern or the variation time value of the variation display game is made common, and the sense of discomfort is reduced.

Therefore, in the specific game state C and the specific game state B, the common same variation pattern table A is set as the special figure 1 variation pattern table (first variation pattern group), and the special figure 2 variation pattern table (second variation pattern group), the same common variation pattern table C is set. In addition, when transitioning from the normal game state to the specific game state C, there is no change in the fact that the main variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game in the left-handed state, so that there is little discomfort. With the specific game state C, the common same variation pattern table A will be set as the special figure 1 variation pattern table.

In addition, when transitioning from the specific game state C to the specific game state B, the type (state) of the general electric support transitions from medium support to high support, and the content of the game changes greatly. It is preferable to clearly switch the type of variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game in the game state C and the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific game state B) according to the change in the general electric support. Therefore, in both the specific game state C and the specific game state B, the special figure 1 variation pattern table (first variation pattern group) and the special figure 2 variation pattern table (second variation pattern group) are the variation pattern table A and the variation Like pattern table C, different ones are set.

Also, although not shown in FIG. 74, in the specific game state A (a time saving, time saving mode # 1, # 2), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern table ensures commonality of production by common fluctuation patterns and development cost For reduction, the variation pattern table A may be used as in the specific game states B and C, or a variation pattern table other than A may be used to increase the variation of effects. Similarly, in the specific game state A, the special figure 2 variation pattern table may be the same variation pattern table C as in the specific game states B and C to ensure commonality of effects and reduce costs, or to increase the variation of effects. Other than the pattern table C may be used.

Alternatively, the special figure 1 variation pattern table is the same variation pattern table as the specific game states B and C in order to ensure the commonality of the production by the common variation pattern and reduce the development cost in the time saving mode # 2 of the specific game state A. A may be used, and in the time saving mode #1, the number of time saving times is extremely small compared to the time saving mode #2 and the specific game states B and C, so a variation pattern table other than A may be used to distinguish the performance. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern table may be the same variation pattern table C as the specific game states B and C in order to ensure commonality of production and reduce development costs in time saving mode # 2, and in time saving mode # 1 , a table other than the variation pattern table C may be used to distinguish the effect.

Also, the setting of the variation pattern table in FIG. 74 may be the same regardless of the result of the variation display game. Alternatively, the setting of the variation pattern table in FIG. 74 may be changed according to the result of the variation display game (big hit, small win, support hit, loss). For example, when the result of the variation display game is lost, it is as shown in FIG. 74, but in the case of a small hit or a big hit, a common variation pattern table D is used regardless of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the game state. Therefore, regardless of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 or the game state, the variation pattern or the variation time value may be made common.

[Example of production screen]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an effect screen as a display screen of the display device 41 according to the third embodiment. (A) shows the production screen of the normal mode, which is the production mode of the normal game state without general electric support, and (B) shows the production screen of the time saving mode # 4, which is the production mode of the specific game state C of the medium support. indicates

In FIG. 75A, "high school mode", "high school stage", etc. are displayed as a mode display 679 corresponding to the normal mode, and a background image simulating a school is displayed. Although the mode display 679 and the background image are still images here, they may be moving images. The number-of-variations display 677 is "95G", indicating that the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the big hit is 95. In the special figure 1 reservation number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display part 660 on the upper right of the display screen, the numbers "4" and special figure 2 indicating the special figure 1 reservation number (special figure 1 start memory number) respectively The number "0" indicating the number of reservations (special figure 2 start memory number) is displayed.

On the display screen, a left pattern 611a, a right pattern 611b, and a middle pattern 611c can be variably displayed as decorative special patterns (large patterns). The left pattern 611a, the right pattern 611b, and the middle pattern 611c are respectively displayed in the left variation display area 610A, the right variation display area 610B, and the center variation display area 610C. Furthermore, the variable display of the decorative reduced pattern (small pattern) is executed in the variable display area 615 on the right side of the display screen.

The left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are variably displayed by vertical scrolling. For example, in vertical scrolling, a series of seven patterns (decorative identification patterns) corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7 appear in order on the display screen and are scrolled vertically (up and down) across the display screen. After moving, it disappears from the display screen. In order to save the display area, the middle pattern 611c is displayed in a different direction from the vertical scrolling of the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b. be done. Note that instead of rotational variation, front-back variation (back-and-forth scrolling) may be performed in which a series of overlapping patterns appear to move back and forth using a perspective method or the like. Also, the middle pattern 611c may be vertically scrolled like the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b.

The left pattern 611a is composed of a character image 612a (character component, character portion) representing a character and a character image 613a (character component, character portion) representing a number (character). In order to shorten the width of the entire left pattern 611a, the character image 612a and the character image 613a are arranged so that their centers are aligned substantially in the scroll direction (vertical direction), and the character image 613a is positioned on the central axis of the character image 612a. To position. Similarly, the right pattern 611b is composed of a character image 612b representing a character and a character image 613b representing a number. In order to shorten the width of the entire right pattern 611b, the character image 612b and the character image 613b are arranged so that their centers are aligned substantially in the scroll direction (vertical direction), and the character image 613b is positioned on the central axis of the character image 612b. do. Also, in order to save the display area, the middle pattern 611c is composed only of a character image 613c representing numbers.

In the normal mode, a plurality of numbers from 1 to 7 as identification information are, for example, 1 (green), 2 (blue), 3 (orange), 4 (blue), 5 (green), 6 (blue) ) and 7 (orange), but at least one number has a different color. Even numbers may be of the same color (cold color). The odd numbers are a different color than the even numbers and may include multiple colors such as green (neutral colors) and orange (warm colors). Also, in the present embodiment, when the decorative special pattern includes a character and a number, the character corresponds to the number one-to-one and differs for each number. However, the same character is used for different numbers. may

Four pending displays 682a (first pending display) are displayed in the first pending display portion 630a (standby area) that displays the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory) before execution of the variable display game as the first pending display. be done. The pending display 682a has a display mode imitating playing cards. In addition, in the pending digestion area 640, the variable pending display 682b showing the variable pending related to the special figure 1 variable display game being executed (the starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure variable display game) was turned over. It is displayed in a display mode imitating playing cards. Note that the pedestal may indicate the reserved digestion region 640 . In addition, nothing is displayed here in the second suspension display portion 630b that displays the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game as the second retention display (second start memory display). do not have.

In FIG. 75B, the background image (background movie) of the moving image (movie) is displayed on the full screen of the display device 41 . In addition, as a mode display 679 corresponding to the time-saving mode #4 of the middle support, "transcendence mode", "transcendence area", etc. are displayed at two opposing places, the upper left corner and the lower right corner. Since the plurality of mode displays 679 are displayed in the layer behind the pending display 682a, the mode display 679 in the lower right corner is hidden behind the pending display 682a in the front layer. However, the player can fully recognize the current rendering mode by the mode display 679 in the upper left corner that is not hidden by the hold display 682a. The mode display 679 is displayed in an oblique direction different from the horizontal direction in FIG. 75(A), and may be moved obliquely in a belt-like area independently of or part of the moving image of the background image. In this way, since the aspect of the mode display 679 is clearly different between the time saving mode #4 and the normal mode, the time saving mode #4 can be easily distinguished from the normal mode and visually recognized.

The number-of-variations display 677 is "124G", indicating that the number of executions of the special-figure variation display game after the end of the big hit is 124. The remaining number of times display 696 in the upper right corner of the display screen displays the remaining number of time saving, that is, the number of variable display games that can be executed in the time saving mode #4. In the special figure 1 reservation number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reservation number display part 660 on the upper right of the display screen, the number "4" indicating the special figure 1 reservation number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reservation number respectively is displayed. In addition, since it is a medium support, there are many cases where the number of the special figure 2 reserved number display unit 660 becomes other than "0" due to the winning of the normal variable winning device 37.

In time-saving mode #4 of the middle support in FIG. 75(B), similarly to the normal mode in FIG. is displayed fluctuating with . However, in FIG. 75(B), a variation mode different from that in FIG. 75(A) may be used so that it can be seen that it is the middle support. 611b may be variably displayed with rotational variation.

In the time-saving mode #4 of the middle support in FIG. 75(B), the left pattern 611a and the right pattern 611b are composed of a character image showing a character and a character image showing a number as in the normal mode of FIG. 75(A). be. The medium pattern 611c is composed only of a character image 613c representing a number. However, in FIG. 75(B), in order to make it clear that it is a middle support, a configuration mode of a decorative special pattern different from that in FIG. 75(A) may be used. Well, the left design 611a and the right design 611b may be composed only of character images. In addition, when using the same character for the same number in the time saving mode #4 and the normal mode, the display mode may be changed within a range in which the same character can be recognized by the common feature.

Also, in the medium support time saving mode # 4, the multiple numbers from 1 to 7 as identification information are, for example, 1 (red), 2 (red), 3 (red), 4 (red), 5 (red) ), 6 (red), and 7 (red). The color of the character is also the same color (red) as the number. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to understand that it is the time-saving mode #4 with the middle support, which is different from the normal mode without the general power support. Also, to make it easier to understand that it is time saving mode # 4, the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 such as the upper production unit 40c and the side production unit 40d, and the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 such as the decoration devices 18a and 18b It may emit light in the same color as the number (red). In addition, since time saving mode # 4 and normal mode are in common left-handed state and special figure 1 fluctuation display game is the main fluctuation display game, make it easy to visually distinguish time saving mode # 4 from normal mode is important.

In addition, in the time saving mode # 4, in the first suspension display portion 630a (standby area) that displays the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game as the first hold display, the hold display 682a (first 1 pending display) are displayed four times. However, unlike the normal mode of FIG. 75(A), the pending display 682a has a star-shaped display mode. Also by this, time saving mode #4 can be easily distinguished from normal mode. Further, in the pending digestion area 640, a variable pending display 682b indicating variable pending related to the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is displayed in a star-shaped display mode.

In addition, when there is a prize to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the middle support, the second start memory (special figure 2 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game is set as the second hold display (second start memory display). 2 may be displayed in the pending display portion 630b. Alternatively, the distinction between the second pending display portion 630b and the first pending display portion 630a may be eliminated, and the second pending display may be displayed in a common pending display portion (standby area) together with the first pending display.

In addition, in the middle support time saving mode # 4, unlike the normal mode without the general power support, the upper production unit 40 c is placed in front of the player side of the display screen of the display device 41 as a movable accessory (movable member). , vibrating slowly and repeatedly up and down along the display screen. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game with respect to the time saving mode #4 which is medium support and can shift to the time saving mode #2 of 30 times of time saving. In addition, by providing an effect that can appear in the time saving mode #4 but does not appear in the normal mode (operation effect of the upper effect unit 40c), the time saving mode #4 can be easily distinguished from the normal mode. In addition, the upper effect unit 40c may operate from the start of the variation of the decorative special symbol in the special symbol variation display game, and may stop the operation when the variation ends or when the predetermined effect occurs.

Furthermore, in the time saving mode #4 of the middle support, some of the effects (notice effects) that can appear in the normal mode do not appear. Effects that can appear in normal mode but do not appear in time-saving mode #4 include changes to a specific mode of pending display in the pending change notice, pre-reading effects due to the movement of movable characters, certain types of dialogue notices, There are certain types of step-up productions and the like.

Above, I explained the difference in production between the medium support time reduction mode # 4 and the normal mode. Time saving mode #4 may be easily distinguished from time saving modes #2 and #3. For example, between time saving mode # 4 and time saving mode # 2, # 3, the display mode of mode display 679, the background image, the configuration mode and variation mode of the decorative special pattern, the number color and character color of the decorative special pattern , and possible effects may be changed.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 76A is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process according to the third embodiment. External information editing processing is executed in timer interrupt processing (A1319). In addition, in FIG. 76A, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG. 44B of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

If the time saving signal control timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates -1 (A9526), and then determines whether or not the time saving mode #3 (during b time saving, specific game state B) (A9527a ). In addition, the timer initial value of the time saving signal control timer is set in the time saving signal control timer area in step A5702 of the support operation setting process (FIG. 27) (for example, a fixed time of 128 msec). If the game control device 100 is not in the time saving mode #3 (the result of A9527a is "N"), the process proceeds to step A9527c.

When the game control device 100 is in the time saving mode #3 (the result of A9527a is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the time saving signal control timer is 0 (A9527b). If the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (result of A9527 is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated as it is, and if the time-saving signal control timer is not 0 (result of A9527b is "N"), big hit 3 The ON data of the signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9528), and the external information editing process ends.

As a result, at the start of the ceiling time saving (b time saving) due to reaching the ceiling number of times, the ON data of the jackpot 3 signal is output to an external device such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. . After that, the output of the ON data of the big hit 3 signal continues only during the timer initial value (for example, fixed time of 128 msec) set in the time saving signal control timer area.

If the game control device 100 is not in the time saving mode #3 (the result of A9527a is "N"), it determines whether it is other than the time saving mode #4 (during c time saving, specific game state C) (A9527c). If it is in a game state other than time saving mode #4 (specific game state C) (the result of A9527c is "Y"), the external information editing process is terminated as it is, and if it is time saving mode #4 (specific game state C) Then (the result of A9527c is "N"), the ON data of the 4 jackpot signals are saved in the external information output data area (A9529), and the external information editing process is terminated.

As a result, at the start of a sudden time saving (c time saving) due to a time saving pattern (sapo hit), the ON data of the jackpot 4 signal is sent to an external device such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. output. After that, the output of the ON data of the jackpot 4 signal continues during the time saving mode #4 (specific game state C).

In addition, the game control device 100 may also add a determination as to whether or not the time saving signal control timer is 0 in step A9527c. That is, in step A9527c, it may be determined whether the time saving mode is other than #4 or the time saving signal control timer is zero. In this way, the on-data of the jackpot 4 signal is output only during the timer initial value (for example, a fixed time of 128 msec) from the start of the time saving mode #4 (specific game state C).

[Output of jackpot signal (external information)]
FIG. 76B is a time chart showing the ON/OFF states of jackpot 1-4 signals as external information. (I) shows the state before and after entering b time saving (that is, before and after reaching the ceiling number of times). (II) shows the state before and after entering the c time saving (that is, before and after the time saving pattern derivation).

The jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, and jackpot 4 signal may be signals defined by the machine type. In this embodiment, the big win 1 signal is turned on at the start of the big win or the small win, and turned off at the end of the big win or the small win. The big win 2 signal is turned on at the start of the big win or the small win and turned off at the end of the big win or the small win. Furthermore, the big win 2 signal is turned on at the start of time saving of high support (excluding time saving of medium support) and turned off at the end of the remaining hold digestion mode (when the variable display game relating to the last remaining hold is stopped).

The big win 3 signal is turned on at the start of the big win or the small win, and turned off at the end of the big win or the small win. Furthermore, the jackpot 3 signal is turned on at the start of b time reduction (ceiling time reduction) and turned off after a short fixed time (for example, 128 msec) has elapsed. The jackpot 4 signal is turned on at the start of the short working hours of the medium support (excluding the short working hours of the high support) and turned off at the end of the short working hours of the medium support.

In FIG. 76B (I), when entering b time saving by reaching the ceiling number of times, the game state changes from the normal game state to the specific game state B. When entering b time saving of high sapo, ON data of 2 jackpot signals (2 jackpot signals in ON state) are output as a signal related to the start of time saving. The output of the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal continues for a long time until the end of the remaining pending digestion mode, that is, until the last variable display game related to the remaining pending is stopped.

Moreover, if it rushes into b time reduction, the ON data of 3 jackpot signals will be output to an external device during the short fixed time (for example, 128 msec) by the process of FIG. 76A. As a result, the external device can recognize the occurrence of b time saving or the number of times of reaching the ceiling, distinguishing from the occurrence of time saving (a time saving) or c time saving due to a big hit. In addition, the external device can distinguish between the case where the big win 3 signal is generated by the big win or the small win (when it continues for a long time) and the case where the big win 3 signal is generated by b time reduction (when it continues for a short time). can.

In addition, in FIG. 76B (I), since no big win, small win, or short time c occurs, the big win 1 signal and the big win 4 signal remain off.

In FIG. 76B (II), if it rushes into c time saving (sudden time saving) by the time saving pattern, the ON data of 4 jackpot signals will be output to an external device by the process of FIG. 76A. As a result, the external device can recognize the occurrence of c (specific game state C) or the derivation of time saving symbols, distinguishing from the occurrence of time saving (a time saving) or b time saving due to a big hit. The output of the ON data of the jackpot 4 signals continues for a long time until the end of the short time c (specific game state C).

In FIG. 76B (II), since the big win, the small win, and the short time b do not occur, the big win 1 signal, the big win 2 signal, and the big win 3 signal remain off. In addition, even if it enters into the short time c of the medium sapo, the on data of the two jackpot signals generated in the short time of the high sapo (two jackpot signals in the on state) will not be output.

[Output of test signal]
FIG. 77A shows, as a test signal output to the test firing test device, a normal symbol 1 high probability state signal (1 bit), a normal electric accessory 1 open extended state signal (1 bit), a normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal ( 1 bit), easy winning state signals 1 to 4 (4 bits), and easy winning state determination signal (1 bit). FIG. 77B illustrates winning easy state signals 1 to 4 corresponding to medium and high support.

Normal electric accessory 1 open extended state signal, normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, normal pattern 1 high probability state signal, etc. Normal electric normal state signal indicating the state of normal electric power and the state of normal electric power fluctuation is easy to win The state signals 1 to 4 can be turned on at the same time or with a delay. The easy winning state determination signal can be turned on at the same time as or with a delay from the easy winning state signals 1 to 4, and the time difference between the ON timings of the easy winning state determination signal and the easy winning state signals 1 to 4 may be 0 msec or more.

FIG. 77A particularly illustrates a case where the game state transitions in the order of normal game state → specific game state C (middle support, c short time) → specific game state B (high support, b short time) → jackpot state or transition state. do.

In the normal game state, when the time-saving pattern is derived by hitting the support of the special figure 1 variable display game, the specific game state C occurs, and the type of the general electric support becomes the medium support (winning easy state 2). At this time, first, the 4-bit win easy state signals 1 to 4 indicating the type of the general electric support are changed from the indefinite state to 01H corresponding to the medium support, and output to the test firing test device. Subsequently, an easy winning state determination signal indicating that the general power support state (easy winning state) has been determined is turned on for a predetermined period (2 msec or more, for example 32 msec) and output to the test firing test device. Next, a normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal indicating that the general electric opening time is longer, and a normal pattern 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal indicating that the general pattern fluctuation time is shorter than the normal game state, It is output to the test firing test device as a state signal indicating the state of the general electric power and the state of the general electric power map fluctuation. In FIG. 77A, the winning easy state signals 1 to 4 → the winning easy state determination signal → the electric/general map state signal are changed in this order.

After that, when the number of times of the special figure variation display game executed under a predetermined condition (special figure low probability state) after the end of the jackpot state in the specific game state C reaches the ceiling number, the specific game state B occurs, and the general electric support becomes a high support (easy winning state 1). At this time, the 4-bit prize easy state signals 1 to 4 indicating the type of general electric support are changed from 01H corresponding to medium support to 00H corresponding to high support and output to the test firing tester. Subsequently, an easy winning state determination signal indicating that the general electric support state (easy winning state) has been determined is turned on for a predetermined period (2 msec or more, for example 32 msec) and output to the test firing test device. Then, the normal electric accessory 1 open extended state signal and the normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal are continuously maintained on from the specific game state C and output to the test-firing test device.

After that, when transitioning from the specific game state B to the jackpot state or the transition state, the winning easy state signals 1 to 4 become indeterminate, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal and the normal pattern 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal are turned off. becomes.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the probability per normal pattern is always a constant value 250/251 without changing, so the probability per normal pattern is higher than normal. The probability state signal is not turned on. However, when the normal pattern hit probability becomes high only at the time of high support, the normal pattern 1 high probability state signal is changed to ON as shown by the dotted line and is output to the test firing test device. When the normal pattern per probability is high in both the middle support and the high support, during the same period as the ON period of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal and normal pattern 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal, normal pattern 1 The high-probability state signal is turned on and output to the sighting test equipment.

78 and 79 are a table and a time chart showing how firing position designation signal 1 and firing position designation signal 2 are output as test signals output to the test-firing test apparatus. Both the shooting position specifying signal 1 and the shooting position specifying signal 2 are signals indicating a right-handed shot in which a game ball should be shot to the game area 32 on the right side.

As shown in FIG. 78 (A), in the medium support (specific game state C), when the general electricity is opened in the pattern H1 by the general pattern hit, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on and output, but the firing position Designation signal 2 is turned off. On the other hand, in the middle sapo, when the general electric is opened in the pattern H2 by hitting the general map, both the firing position designation signal 1 and the firing position designation signal 2 are turned on and output. In this way, the output states of the firing position designation signal 1 and the firing position designation signal 2 are different in the pattern H1 open and the pattern H2 open, so the test firing test equipment detects these two types of open. can be distinguished and recognized. In addition, in order to distinguish between open and cold power, only one of the firing position designation signal 1 and the firing position designation signal 2 is turned on when the power is open in pattern H1, and the power is open in pattern H2. A configuration in which only the other is turned on is also possible. In addition, both the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned off during the period during which the normal game hit does not occur even during the medium support and during the period during the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 78(B), during the electric sapo other than the middle sapo (high sapo, specific game state A and specific game state B), during the small hit, during the big hit, since it is a right-handed state, the firing position designation signal 1 and firing position designation signal 2 are both turned on and output.

For example, as shown in FIG. 79, when there is a small hit during the normal electric opening of the pattern H1, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on at the start of the electric open of the pattern H1, and the firing position designation signal at the start of the small hit. 2 is turned on, and the firing position designation signal 1 and the firing position designation signal 2 are turned off at the end of the small win. When there is a normal electric opening of the pattern H1 during the small winning, the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned on at the start of the small winning, and the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 at the end of the small winning. turns off. When there is a pattern H1 open just before the end of the small win, the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned on at the start of the small win, the firing position specifying signal 2 is turned off at the end of the small win, and the pattern At the end of H1, the discharge position designation signal 1 is turned off.

When there is a small hit during the normal electric opening of the pattern H2, the firing position designating signal 1 and the firing position designating signal 2 are turned on at the start of the normal electric opening of the pattern H2, and the firing position designating signal 1 and the firing position designating signal 1 are turned on at the end of the small winning. The firing position designation signal 2 is turned off. When there is a normal electric opening of the pattern H2 during the small winning, the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned on at the start of the small winning, and the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 at the end of the small winning. turns off. When there is a pattern H2 electrical opening just before the end of the small win, the firing position specifying signal 1 and the firing position specifying signal 2 are turned on at the start of the small winning, and the firing position specifying signal 1 at the end of the electrical opening of the pattern H2. , the firing position designation signal 2 is turned off.

[Operations such as the big prize mouth and lever solenoid]
FIG. 80 shows, in the case of a small hit result of the special figure 1 variable display game, the opening operation of the upper big winning opening of the second special variable winning device 39, the ON/OFF operation of the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86, and the like. is a time chart illustrating (A) shows a situation where there is no remaining ball error, and (B) shows a situation where there is a remaining ball error. The operation related to the opening and closing (closing) of the upper big winning opening of the second special variable winning device 39 is controlled by the small hit opening process (A2612). The on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b, that is, the opening/closing operation of the specific area 86 is controlled by the lever solenoid control process (A2618).

In FIG. 80(A), in the case of the small hit result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, unlike the case of the small hit result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the upper big prize opening of the second special fluctuation prize winning device 39 is is opened once for a short period of time. This short time is, for example, the shorter one of the small hit opening time (for example, 1000 msec) and the time until the specified number of wins to the upper big winning opening.

During this short time opening of the upper big winning opening, the lever solenoid 86b is turned on for a short time (for example, 100 msec), and the specific area 86 is opened. However, since the opening of the specific area 86 (V winning opening) is very short, the game ball hardly enters the specific area 86 . Therefore, during the opening of the small hit by the result of the special figure 1 variable display game, the big hit by the V prize hardly occurs.

A V winning as a ball entering the specific area 86 is detected by the specific area switch 72 of the specific area 86 . The specific area switch 72 is activated when the lever solenoid 86b is turned on, and deactivated when processing of remaining balls is completed. Also, while the specific area switch 72 is valid, a special electric accessory operating signal is turned on as a test signal and output to the test firing test apparatus.

The upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) is turned on in a pulse form when a game ball entering the upper special winning opening is detected. Immediately after that, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball, so there is no remaining ball error. In addition, when the specific area switch 72 detects a game ball, when the processing of the remaining ball is completed, irregular winning information indicating that the jackpot is due to an unexpected abnormal V winning is sent to the effect control device 300 together with the ending command. sent to. And the production control device 300 executes processing corresponding to the irregular winning information, such as notifying that it is an abnormal V winning.

In addition, the processing of the remaining balls is started from the time when the small hit is opened (when the upper grand prize opening is closed), and the time when the remaining ball counter becomes 0 or the time when the remaining ball processing time elapses, whichever is later. to end. The remaining ball counter is updated by +1 after the game ball passes through the upper big winning opening switch 39a, and is updated by -1 when the game ball (remaining ball) is detected by the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72. be. In FIG. 80(A), the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball before the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) elapses and the remaining ball counter is already zero. Therefore, the small hit remaining ball processing (A2613) is completed when the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) elapses, and the specific area switch 72 becomes invalid at this point.

In the present embodiment, the small winning ending is performed after the processing of the remaining balls. (A2613) Between the small hit ending time (for example, 2000msec), the ending of the small hit continues. The game processing number "0" relating to the special figure normal processing is set in the small hit end processing and saved in the special figure game processing number area. When a big hit is generated by winning a V prize, a fanfare effect (B2102) corresponding to the fanfare command (A5806) is executed during the fanfare time.

In FIG. 80(B), as in FIG. 80(A), the upper big prize opening is opened only for a short period of time, and during this short time opening of the upper big prize opening, the lever solenoid 86b is operated for a short time (for example, 100 msec), and the specific area 86 is opened. The specific area switch 72 becomes effective when the lever solenoid 86b is turned on. However, there is a residual ball error, even if the residual ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) has elapsed, the small hit residual ball processing is not completed. For this reason, according to the on-off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b (that is, the opening pattern of the specific area 86), after turning on and off in a short time, after an interval (for example, 2900 msec), the lever solenoid 86b is turned on again for a long time. It turns off according to the cancellation of the error (end of processing of remaining balls). Here, the interval time is the sum of the small hit opening time (eg 1000 msec) and the remaining ball processing time (eg 1900 msec), but it is not limited to this. Incidentally, the ON/OFF pattern of the lever solenoid 86b is set in common for the small hit by the special figure 1 variation display game and the small hit by the special figure 2 variation display game (FIG. 81).

After that, until the residual ball error is canceled, the small hit residual ball processing continues, the lever solenoid 86b is maintained on, and the specific area switch 72 is maintained in an effective state. Then, while the specific area switch 72 is valid, a special electric accessory operating signal is turned on as a test signal and output to the test firing test device. When the residual ball error is canceled and the small hit residual ball processing is completed, the ending becomes a small hit as in FIG. 80(A).

When a game ball entering the upper special winning opening is detected and the upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) is turned on and off in pulses, a remaining ball error monitoring time (for example, 3000 msec) elapses, a remaining ball error occurs. A remaining ball error occurring flag indicating that the ball is in the middle is set to ON. After that, when the remaining ball counter reaches 0, the remaining ball error occurrence flag is turned off and the remaining ball error is canceled. For example, the measurement of a timer relating to the remaining ball error monitoring time and the ON/OFF of the remaining ball error occurrence flag are performed by providing the remaining ball monitoring process in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (A1310).

FIG. 81 shows, in the case of the small hit result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the opening operation of the upper big winning opening of the second special variable winning device 39, the ON/OFF operation of the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86, and the like. is a time chart illustrating (A) shows a situation where there is no remaining ball error, and (B) shows a situation where there is a remaining ball error.

In FIG. 81(A), in the case of the small hit result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, unlike the case of the small hit result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (FIG. 80), the second special fluctuation winning device 39 After being opened once for a short period of time (for example, 48 msec), the big winning opening is opened multiple times over a long period of time at intervals (for example, 2860 msec). For example, multiple times of opening consists of 48 msec x 19 times of opening and 424 msec x 18 times of closing, and this long time is a total of 8544 msec or the time until the specified number of prizes are won in the upper grand prize opening. In order to make such an opening pattern of the upper big winning a prize opening, for example, in the process during the opening of the small winning, the opening and closing of the second special variable winning device 39 may be controlled by the control pointer in the same way as the general electric opening pattern.

Further, in FIG. 81(A), the lever solenoid 86b is turned on and off in a short time (for example, 100 msec) according to the aforementioned on/off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b, and then after an interval (for example, 2900 msec), the lever solenoid 86b is turned on again. turns off after being on for a long time. The long time here is the shorter of 21000 msec and the time until the processing of the remaining balls is completed. In addition, in the case of a small hit by the special figure 2 variable display game, the on-off pattern of the lever solenoid 86b (that is, the opening pattern of the specific area 86) and the opening pattern of the upper big winning opening are the opening of the upper big winning opening multiple times. It is the same until it starts, and it is interlocked substantially synchronously (the lever solenoid 86b and the upper grand winning opening solenoid 39b are also interlocked substantially synchronously).

The upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) is turned on in a pulse form when a game ball entering the upper special winning opening is detected. Immediately after that, or before processing the remaining balls, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball, so there is no remaining ball error. In addition, when the specific area switch 72 detects a game ball, the irregular winning information is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 because it is a big hit due to a normal V winning prize. Only the ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the end of the processing of the remaining balls.

In addition, the processing of the remaining balls starts at the end of the opening of the small hit (when the upper grand prize opening is closed), and when the remaining ball processing time elapses and the remaining ball counter becomes 0 (when the error is canceled). end at the later of In FIG. 81(A), before the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) elapses, the remaining ball outlet switch 73 or the specific area switch 72 detects the game ball and the remaining ball counter has already become 0. The small hit remaining ball processing (A2613) ends when the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) elapses, and the specific area switch 72 becomes invalid at this point.

In this embodiment, after the processing of the remaining ball, it becomes the ending of the small hit, but the ending of the small hit continues during the small hitting ending time (for example, 4200 msec) set in the small hitting remaining ball processing (A2613). Incidentally, the small winning ending time in the case of the small winning by the special figure 2 variation display game is longer than that in the case of the small winning by the special figure 1 variation display game.

In FIG. 81(B), the upper big winning opening is opened in the same opening pattern as in FIG. 81(A). The opening pattern of the upper grand prize opening does not depend on the presence or absence of a remaining ball error. Also, in FIG. 81(B), the lever solenoid 86b operates in the same ON/OFF pattern as in FIG. 81(A) until the end of the small hit release, but since there is a residual ball error, the residual ball processing time (for example, 1900 msec) elapses. However, the lever solenoid 86b remains on for a long time of 21000 msec.

After that, until the residual ball error is canceled, the small hit residual ball processing continues, and the specific area switch 72 is maintained in an effective state. Then, while the specific area switch 72 is valid, a special electric accessory operating signal is turned on as a test signal and output to the test firing test device. When the residual ball error is canceled and the small hit residual ball processing is completed, the ending becomes a small hit as in FIG. 81(A). The occurrence and cancellation of the remaining ball error are as described with reference to FIG. 81(B).

[Action and effect of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information. The game control means provides a first specific game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, specific game state B or specific game state A is also possible) and a second specific game state that is generated under different conditions from the first specific game state. (For example, specific game state C) can be generated. The game control means is capable of executing a first variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 variable display game) as a variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition, and based on the establishment of the second start condition. A second variable display game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) can be executed. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first variation pattern group (for example, special figure 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A) for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game, The second variation pattern group (for example, special figure 2 variation pattern table, variation pattern table C) for selecting the variation pattern of the 2 variation display game is made different.

For example, the main variation display game becomes the second variation display game in the first specific game state and the first variation display game in the second specific game state, and so on. The main variation display game may be different depending on the state. However, in such a gaming machine 10, by making the first variation pattern group and the second variation pattern group different in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, it is selected in the special figure variation display game. It is possible to clearly switch the type of variation pattern to match the type of specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect suitable for the type of the specific game state, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, in the third embodiment, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the first variation pattern group (for example, special figure 1 variation pattern table) is made the same as in the normal game state. Therefore, the type of variation pattern selected in the first variation display game is common to the normal game state, the first specific game state, and the second specific game state, and the sense of incongruity in the performance is reduced. Interest can be improved. Furthermore, game control is also simplified. Also, the game rules and the like are not violated.

Also, in the third embodiment, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the second variation pattern group (for example special figure 2 variation pattern table) is made the same. Therefore, the kind of variation pattern selected in the second variation display game is common in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and the production gives a sense of incongruity, thereby improving the interest of the game. . Furthermore, game control is also simplified. Also, the game rules and the like are not violated.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, It is possible to generate a special game state (for example, a jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player. The gaming machine 10 is capable of converting between an easy winning state (for example, open state) in which game balls are easy to win and a non-easy winning state (for example, closed state) in which game balls are difficult to win, and in a specific game state, winning is easier than in a normal game state. A variable winning device (for example, a normal variable winning device 37) that facilitates conversion to a state is provided. The game control means, when the number of executions of the variable display game under a predetermined condition (for example, a special figure low probability) reaches a predetermined number (for example, the number of ceiling times), the first specific game state without generating a special game state. (For example, specific game state B, b time saving) can be generated, and when the result of the variable display game becomes a specific result (for example, time saving pattern) different from the special result, the second without the occurrence of the special game state Specific game state (for example, specific game state C, c short time) can be generated. The game control means is capable of executing a first variable display game (for example, a special figure 1 variable display game) as a variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition, and based on the establishment of the second start condition. A second variable display game (for example, special figure 2 variable display game) can be executed. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first variation pattern group (for example, special figure 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A) for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game, The second variation pattern group (for example, special figure 2 variation pattern table, variation pattern table C) for selecting the variation pattern of the 2 variation display game is made different. Variable winning device (for example, normal variable winning device 37), in the second specific game state (for example, specific game state C, c time reduction), it is easier to convert to the easy winning state than the normal game state, but the first specific It becomes more difficult to convert to the winning easy state than the game state (for example, specific game state B, b time saving).

Main fluctuation display game (for example, special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the second specific game state, special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the first specific game state) and type of general electric support (for example, high in the first specific game state Support, medium support in the second specific game state) may differ between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. However, in such a gaming machine 10, by making the first variation pattern group and the second variation pattern group different in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, it is selected in the special figure variation display game. It is possible to clearly switch the type of variation pattern that is displayed according to the type of specific game state, and by extension, the type of general electric support. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect suitable for the type of the specific game state, and by extension, the type of the general electric support, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the game control means, with the occurrence of a special game state (for example, jackpot state), following the special game state, the third specific game state (for example, specific game state A , a time saving) can be generated. The variable winning device (for example, normal variable winning device 37) is the first specific game state (for example, specific game state B, b time saving) and the third specific game state (for example, specific game state A, a time saving), the second It becomes easier to convert to the win easy state than the specific game state (for example, specific game state C, c short time).

Therefore, the general electric support in the second specific game state can be set to medium support, and the general electric support in the first specific game state and the third specific game state can be set to high support. And, the second specific game state is a plurality of other specific game states (the first specific game state and the third specific game state), and the benefits obtained by the player and the shooting mode of the game ball. Both players can be in a specific game state with different characteristics, and the game can be sharpened and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the game ball can be converted into an easy winning state in which it is easy to win and a non-easy winning state in which it is difficult to win. A variable winning device (for example, a normal variable winning device 37) is provided which facilitates conversion from the normal game state to the winning easy state in the electric support state). The game control means can generate a first specific game state (for example, specific game state A or specific game state B) after the end of the special game state (for example, jackpot state), and the result of the variable display game is different from the special result. When a specific result (for example, time saving pattern) is obtained, a second specific game state (for example, specific game state C) can be generated without generating a special game state. The game control means makes it easier to convert the variable winning device to the winning easy state in the first specific game state than in the second specific game state. The game control means can execute a first variable display game as a variable display game based on establishment of a first starting condition, and can execute a second variable display game based on establishment of a second starting condition. be. In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, a first variation pattern group (for example, special figure 1 variation pattern table, variation pattern table A) for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game, The second variation pattern group (for example, special figure 2 variation pattern table, variation pattern table C) for selecting the variation pattern of the 2 variation display game is made different.

For example, the main variation display game becomes the second variation display game in the first specific game state and the first variation display game in the second specific game state, and so on. The main variation display game may be different depending on the state. However, in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the first variation pattern group and the second variation pattern group are made different from each other, and the type of variation pattern selected in the special figure variation display game is It can be switched according to the type of the specific game state and, by extension, the frequency of the variable winning device entering the easy winning state (for example, the type of general electric support). Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect according to the type of the specific game state and, by extension, the frequency (degree) in which the variable winning device enters the easy winning state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the game control means, in the first specific game state (for example specific game state A or specific game state B), the second specific game state (for example specific game state C ), the variable winning device (for example, the normal variable winning device 37) can be easily converted to the easy winning state, and as a variable display game, the first variable display game can be executed based on the establishment of the first start condition, The second variation display game can be executed based on the establishment of the second starting condition, and the first variation pattern group for selecting the variation pattern of the first variation display game is played in the normal game in the second specific game state. same as the state.

A second specific game state (for example, a specific game state C) that is more difficult to convert to an easy-to-win state than a first specific game state (for example, a specific game state A or a specific game state B) is converted into an easy-to-win state of the variable winning device. The frequency (degree) of conversion may be closer to the normal game state than the second specific game state. Therefore, in the second specific game state, if the first variation pattern group is the same as in the normal game state, the type of variation pattern selected in the first variation display game in the second specific game state is the normal game state. While reducing a sense of incongruity in performance in common with , two specific game states having different frequencies of conversion to an easy-to-win state can improve the amusement of the game. Also, the game control is simplified. In particular, in the second specific game state and the normal game state, when the hitting method (right hitting or left hitting), which is the shooting mode of the game ball, is the same, and the main variation display game is common to the first variation display game. , the first variation pattern group is the same in the second specific game state and the normal game state, and the advantage of standardizing the types of variation patterns in the first variation display game is increased (if not standardized, the sense of incongruity is greatly increased). turn into).

[Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 88. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The fourth embodiment relates to wiring between circuit boards and the like.

[Circuit diagram of normal FFC connection]
FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing wiring normally connected from the decoration control board 750 (first circuit board) of the effect control device 300 to the LED board 862 (second circuit board).

The decoration control board 750 is configured as part of the effect control device 300 and is connected to the LED board 862 via the FFC relay board 861 . The LED board 862 performs light emission control of lighting members provided in the game machine 10 (such as the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18). In addition, the lighting member and the LED board 862 may be provided in various movable members (movable accessories of the board production device 44, projecting production unit 13 of the frame decoration device 18). The distance between board 862 and decoration control board 750 can vary. Also, the decoration control board 750 may be a board connected to the effect control device 300 .

The decoration control board 750 is a connector CN11 having 11 various terminals (11 terminals) such as a serial data signal (game board SDA) terminal, a clock signal (game board SCL) terminal, a DC12V terminal, a DC5V terminal, and a ground (GND) terminal. Prepare.

The game board SDA terminal is a terminal for transmitting (transmitting) a serial data signal (game board SDA) from the effect control device 300 to the LED board 862 by the I2C communication method (or I ² C communication method). Similarly, the game board SCL terminal is a terminal for transmitting (transmitting) a clock signal (game board SCL) by the I2C communication system to the LED board 862 . The connector CN11 has one game board SDA terminal (terminal 6) and one game board SCL terminal (terminal 8). Note that the decoration control board 750 may be provided with a terminal capable of receiving a signal from the LED board 862 .

In addition, the DC12V terminal and the DC5V terminal are terminals (feeding terminals) for supplying (feeding) the voltages of DC12V and DC5V from the power supply device 400 to the LED substrate 862, respectively. The ground (GND) terminal is a terminal (ground terminal, ground terminal) that supplies a ground voltage (GND, 0V) to the LED substrate 862 . The connector CN11 has three DC12V terminals (terminals 1-3), one DC5V terminal (terminal 4), and five GND terminals (terminals 5, 7, 9-11).

The connector CN11 of the decoration control board 750 is connected via a harness 871 to the connector CN21 (terminal 11) of the FFC relay board 861 fixed in the gaming machine 10 by screws or the like. In the present embodiment, the harness is a collective component in which a plurality of wires (wires such as signal wires, ground wires, power wires, etc.) are bundled, and is also called wire harness or cable.

As shown in FIG. 82, the harness 871 is composed of a plurality of (11 wires) wires 871-1 to 871-11 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 11 of the connector CN11.

Wires 871-1 to 871-3 of the harness 871 are wires (DC 12V wires) connected to terminals 1 to 3 of the connector CN11 to supply DC 12V. Similarly, the wiring 871-4 is a wiring (DC5V wiring) that is connected to the terminal 4 of the connector CN11 and supplies DC5V. Wirings 871-5, 871-7, 871-9 to 871-11 are wirings (GND wirings) connected to terminals 5, 7, 9 to 11 of the connector CN11 to supply ground voltage. The wiring 871-6 of the harness 871 is connected to the terminal 6 of the connector CN11 to transmit (transmit) the game board SDA, and the wiring 871-8 of the harness 871 is connected to the terminal 8 to transmit (transmit) the game board SCL. transmission).

The outermost wiring 871-1 among the three wirings 871-1 to 871-3 for supplying DC 12V functions as a wiring (test line TD) for connection test (connection determination), and is normally connected during non-testing. DC12V (DC12V (TEST)) is sometimes supplied. That is, the wiring 871-1 is part of the test line TD between the decoration control board 750 (first circuit board) and the LED board 862 (second circuit board), and the wirings 871-2 and 872-3 are normal Part of the DC12V wiring. The test line TD is provided in parallel with the normal DC12V wiring, and the normal DC12V wiring is properly (normally) connected between the decoration control board 750 (first circuit board) and the LED board 862 (second circuit board). It becomes a connection test wiring (connection determination wiring) that can determine whether or not the connection is connected.

Similarly, the outermost wiring 871-11 among the four wirings 871-5, 871-7, 871-9 to 871-11 for supplying the ground voltage is a connection test wiring (test line TG), that is, It functions as a connection test wiring (connection determination wiring), and supplies a ground voltage (GND (TEST)) during non-testing and normal connection.

Thus, between the decoration control board 750 and the FFC relay board 861, DC 12V and ground voltage are supplied not by a single wiring but by a plurality of wirings (three or four wirings). As a result, even if one or two wirings of the harness 871 are excessively bent or interfere with other members and break, the other unbroken wiring can be used to continue the control of the LED board 862 . .

Furthermore, in the harness 871, by using the outermost wirings 871-1 and 871-11, which are likely to be subjected to the most external force and are likely to become disconnection starting points, as wirings for the connection test, normal connection can be ensured. This makes it easier to detect whether or not the

In the FFC relay board 861, the terminals of the connector CN21 can be connected to the connector CN22 (12 terminals) by branching wiring from some terminals into a plurality of branches such as two or three branches.

A wiring (test line TD) from terminal 1 of connector CN21 is connected to terminal 12 of connector CN22. On the other hand, the wiring (test line TG) from terminal 11 of connector CN21 is connected to terminal 1 of connector CN22. Therefore, the two wirings (test lines TD and TG) connected to the terminals 1 and 11 of the connector CN21 exchange their positions in the FFC relay board 861, thereby changing their positions. It becomes the wiring (test lines TG, TD) connected to the terminals 1 and 12 of the connector CN22.

The connector CN22 of the FFC relay board 861 is connected via a harness 872 to the connector CN31 (12 terminals) of the LED board 862 that is movable and repositionable within the gaming machine 10 . The harness 872 is a flexible flat cable (FFC), and can be deformed so as to be bent in accordance with the movement of the LED substrate 862 and the change in layout.

The harness 872 is composed of a plurality of (twelve) wires 872-1 to 872-12 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 12 of the connector CN22 and the connector CN31. The four wirings 872-2 to 872-4, 872-12 (DC12V wiring) supply DC12V, and the wirings 872-1, 872-6, 872-8, 872-10, 872-11 (GND wiring) Five supply the ground voltage. The wiring 872-5 (DC5V wiring) supplies DC5V, the wiring 872-7 transmits (transmits) the game board SDA, and the wiring 872-9 transmits (transmits) the game board SCL.

As with the harness 871, the outermost wires 872-1 and 872-12 of the harness 872 function as wires for connection test. The wiring 872-1 serves as a test line TG for connection testing, and supplies a ground voltage (GND (TEST)) during non-testing and normal connection. The wiring 872-12 becomes the test line TD for the connection test, and supplies DC 12V (DC12V (TEST)) during non-testing and normal connection.

The LED board 862 has a connector CN31 (12 terminals) corresponding to the wires 872-1 to 872-12 of the harness 872. FIG.

The harness 872 is bent and connected to the LED board 862, so that the layout relationship of the wiring on the connector CN31 side of the LED board 862 is upside down as shown in FIG. For example, the test line TG (wiring 872-1) connected to the terminal 1 of the connector CN22 of the FFC relay board 861 is connected to the terminal 12 of the connector CN31 of the LED board 862. FIG. Also, the test line TD (wiring 872-12) connected to the terminal 12 of the connector CN22 is connected to the terminal 1 of the connector CN31.

In the harness 872 between the FFC relay board 861 and the LED board 862, 12V DC and ground voltage are supplied not by a single wire but by a plurality of wires (4 or 5 wires). As a result, even if one to three wirings of the harness 872, which is a flexible flat cable weak against external force, are bent excessively or interfere with other members and are disconnected, other wirings that are not disconnected are used. can continue to control the LED board 862. For example, even if several of the DC 12V wires (four wires) and GND wires (five wires) of the harness 872 are disconnected, if at least one each of the DC 12V wires and the ground voltage supply wires remain, the LED board 862 Control can continue.

Furthermore, in the FFC relay board 861, the positional relationship of the connection test wiring (test lines TD and TG) is switched. As a result, for example, even if four wires (872-1 to 872-4) from the outside of the harness 872 to the fourth DC12V wire (872-4) are disconnected, the outermost wire on the opposite side DC 12V can be supplied to the LED board 862 using the arranged test line TD (872-12). In this way, in the harness 872, the test line TD (872-12) is arranged as a spare (backup) wiring on the side opposite to the normal DC12V wiring (872-2 to 872-4), so that one side Even if disconnection occurs at one side, the control of the LED substrate 862 can be continued using the wiring arranged at the other side.

Further, in the harness 872, by using the outermost wires 872-1 and 872-12, which are likely to be subjected to the most external force and are likely to become disconnection starting points, as connection test and reinforcing wires, the harness can be It can be easily detected whether or not the LED board 862 and the FFC relay board 861 are normally connected without disconnection of the 872 .

Furthermore, in the FFC relay board 861, the test line TD that connects the terminal 1 of the connector CN21 and the terminal 12 of the connector CN22 is electrically independent without being connected to other wiring such as normal DC12V wiring. It is formed as one circuit (series circuit, series wiring). Similarly, the test line TG that conducts between the terminal 11 of the connector CN21 and the terminal 1 of the connector CN22 forms an electrically independent circuit (series circuit) without being connected to other wiring such as normal GND wiring. , series wiring).

While the test lines TD and TG are formed independently in this manner, normal DC 12V wiring other than the DC 12V test line TD is formed so as to be connected to other DC 12V wiring within the FFC relay board 861, Ordinary GND wirings other than the ground voltage test line TG are formed so as to be connected to other GND wirings. That is, in normal DC12V wiring and GND wiring, after connecting (connecting) the wiring from the terminals 2 and 3 and the terminals 5, 7, 9 and 10 of the connector CN21, they are branched into a plurality of branches such as three-way and four-way branches. are connected to terminals 2, 3, 4 and terminals 6, 8, 10, 11 of the connector CN22.

By connecting normal DC 12V wiring (for example, 3 lines) and GND wiring (for example, 4 lines) in this manner, the number of wiring lines in the FFC relay board 861 can be reduced and the structure can be simplified. Since the FFC relay board 861 is fixed inside the gaming machine 10 and does not move, there is a low possibility that the internal wiring will be disconnected. can be combined into one.

Also, in the LED substrate 862, normal DC12V wiring is connected to the test line TD, and normal GND wiring is connected to the test line TG.

Then, by performing a connection test (conductivity test (test)) using the test lines TD and TG, it is possible to determine whether the harness 871 and the harness 872 are correctly connected (normal connection state, continuity state). can be checked.

The connection test is performed with the harness 871, the FFC relay board 861, the harness 872, and the LED board 862 all connected. In the connection test, for example, the connector of the harness 871 is pulled out from the connector CN11, and the resistance value between the two wires on the side of the harness 871 corresponding to the terminal of the connector CN11 of the decoration control board 750 is measured with a tester (circuit meter). It can be done by

For example, whether or not the DC12V wiring is normally connected can be determined by connecting the test line TD (wiring 871-1) of the harness 871 and one of the normal DC12V wirings (871-2, 871-3). This can be confirmed by measuring the resistance between

Further, whether or not the GND wiring is normally connected is determined by the test line TG (wiring 871-11) of the harness 871 and any of the normal GND wirings (871-5, 871-7, 871- 9, 871-10).

The resistance value when these wires are connected normally is extremely small compared to the very large resistance value (>xMΩ (∞, insulated state)) when they are not connected normally (circuit The value approximates the combined resistance of internal wiring, resistors, etc.). Also, in a normal connection state, the resistance value between the DC 12V wiring (871-1 to 871-3) and the GND wiring (871-5, 871-7, 871-9 to 871-11) that are not connected becomes a very large resistance value. Therefore, when the resistance value between the 12V DC wiring and the GND wiring, which are not connected, is extremely small, they are not normally connected (abnormal connection state, short-circuit state).

In the connection test, the DC5V wiring (wiring 871-3), the game board SDA wiring (wiring 871-5), and the game board SCL wiring (wiring 871-7) are not connected to other wiring (independently 83A), that is, whether it has a very large resistance value with respect to other wirings.

[Circuit diagram of FFC connection with deviation on both sides]
With reference to FIGS. 83A and 83B, the case where the terminals at both ends of the harness 872 are connected to the connector CN22 and the connector CN31 while being displaced one by one will be described.

FIG. 83A is a circuit diagram showing a state in which the terminals at both ends of the harness 872 are connected to the connector CN22 and the connector CN31 while being shifted one by one.

For example, as shown in FIG. 83A, wiring 872-1 (test line TG) of harness 872 is not connected to both connector CN22 and connector CN31 (floating wiring, wiring independent of the circuit). As a result of connecting the wiring 872-2 to the terminal 1 of the connector CN22 and the terminal 12 of the connector CN31, the wiring 872-2 functions as a wiring that supplies GND (TEST).

On the other hand, wiring 872-12 (test line TD) is connected to terminal 11 (GND) of connector CN22 and terminal 2 (GND) of connector CN31, and functions as a normal GND wiring. Similarly, the wires 872-3 to 872-11 are also connected one by one. board SCL) is in a state that deviates from the normal connection state.

As described above, in the circuit diagram of FIG. 83A, as a result of the terminals at both ends of the harness 872 being shifted one by one, they are connected to terminals different from those to which they should be connected, and the normal connection state is not established (FFC misalignment on both sides of the connection).

Here, a case where a connection test is performed in the state of both sides of the FFC connection shown in FIG. 83A will be described.

The terminal 12 of the connector CN22 is not connected to the harness 872, and the connection of DC12V (TEST) is interrupted. For example, the connector of the harness 871 is pulled out from the connector CN11, and the resistance value between the test line TD (wiring 871-1) of the harness 871 and one of the normal DC 12V wiring (871-2, 871-3) is measured by the connection test, it shows a very large resistance value. Therefore, it can be detected that the wiring 872-12 for DC12V (TEST), which should originally function as the test line TD in the harness 872, is not properly connected (because it is a GND wiring). can.

On the other hand, the wiring 872-2 of the harness 872 is connected to the connector CN22 and the connector CN31 as described above, and the connection of GND (TEST) is not interrupted. Therefore, it is impossible to check the connection deviation of GND (TEST) in the harness 872 by the connection test. For example, when measuring the resistance value between the test line TG (wiring 871-11) of the harness 871 and any normal GND wiring (wiring 871-5, 871-7, 871-9, 871-10), , the resistance becomes small.

As with the wiring 872-2 of the harness 872, the wiring 872-3 to 872-12 are also connected to the connector CN22 and the connector CN31, and are connected to normal DC12V connection, normal GND connection, DC5V connection, game board SDA connection, game The board SCL connection is not broken. The various wirings are not connected (independently) to other (other types of) wirings, and have a very large resistance value with respect to the other wirings. Therefore, even if the resistance values between various wirings and other wirings are measured in the connection test, it is impossible to confirm whether or not the wirings are in a normal connection state.

Also, the wiring misalignment in which the wiring 872-1 of the harness 872 is not connected to both the connector CN22 and the connector CN31 cannot be confirmed by the connection test.

However, as a result of detecting that the wiring 872-12 for DC12V (TEST) is not properly connected by the connection test as described above, an opportunity is obtained to reconnect the harness 872 normally. At the same time, the connection deviation of the wires 872-1 to 872-11, that is, the connection deviation of the entire harness 872 can be corrected in the same manner.

FIG. 83B is a circuit diagram showing a state in which the terminals at both ends of the harness 872 are connected to the connector CN22 and the connector CN31 while being shifted one by one to the opposite side of FIG. 83A.

For example, as shown in FIG. 83B, wiring 872-12 (test line TD) of harness 872 is unconnected (floating wiring, wiring independent of the circuit) to both connector CN22 and connector CN31. As a result of connecting the wiring 872-11 to the terminal 11 of the connector CN22 and the terminal 1 of the connector CN31, the wiring 872-11 functions as wiring for supplying DC12V (TEST).

On the other hand, the wiring 872-1 (test line TG) is connected to the terminal 2 (DC12V) of the connector CN22 and the terminal 11 (DC12V) of the connector CN31, and functions as a normal DC12V wiring. Similarly, the wires 872-2 to 872-10 are also connected one by one. board SCL) is in a state that deviates from the normal connection state. Therefore, in the circuit diagram of FIG. 83B as well, the terminals at both ends of the harness 872 are not in a normal connection state (FFC connection is deviated on both sides) (opposite to FIG. 83A), as in the circuit diagram of FIG. 83A.

Here, the case where the connection test is performed in the state of both sides of the FFC connection shown in FIG. 83B will be described.

The terminal 1 of the connector CN22 is not connected to the harness 872, and the connection of GND (TEST) is interrupted. For example, the connector of the harness 871 is pulled out from the connector CN11, and the test line TG (wiring 871-11) of the harness 871 and any normal GND wiring (871-5, 871-7, 871-9, 871-10 ), a very large resistance value is measured by a connection test. Therefore, it can be detected that the wiring 872-1 for GND (TEST), which should originally function as the test line TG in the harness 872, is not properly connected (it is a wiring for DC12V). can.

On the other hand, the wiring 872-11 of the harness 872 is connected to the connector CN22 and the connector CN31 as described above, and the connection of DC12V (TEST) is not interrupted. Therefore, it is impossible to check the connection deviation of DC12V (TEST) in the harness 872 by the connection test. For example, when measuring the resistance value between the test line TD (wiring 871-1) of the harness 871 and one of the normal DC 12V wiring (wiring 871-2, 871-3), the resistance value becomes a small value. .

As with the wiring 872-11 of the harness 872, the wiring 872-1 to 872-10 are also connected to the connector CN22 and the connector CN31, and are connected to normal DC12V connection, normal GND connection, DC5V connection, game board SDA connection, game The board SCL connection is not broken. The various wirings are not connected (independently) to other (other types of) wirings, and have a very large resistance value with respect to the other wirings. Therefore, even if the resistance values between various wirings and other wirings are measured in the connection test, it is impossible to confirm whether or not the wirings are in a normal connection state.

Also, the wiring misalignment in which the wiring 872-12 of the harness 872 is not connected to both the connector CN22 and the connector CN31 cannot be confirmed by the connection test.

However, as a result of detecting that the wiring 872-1 for GND (TEST) is not properly connected by the connection test as described above, an opportunity is obtained to reconnect the harness 872 normally. At the same time, the connection deviation of the wires 872-2 to 872-12, that is, the connection deviation of the entire harness 872 can be corrected in the same manner.

[Regarding one-side misalignment of FFC connection]
When the harness 872 is normally connected to one of the connector CN22 or the connector CN31 and is connected to the other connector with a deviation of one by one, the wiring 872-1 (test line TG) of the harness 872 or the wiring Either one of 872-12 (test line TD) is left unconnected to the other connector.

Therefore, when a connection test is performed, the resistance value between the unconnected test line (test line TG or test line TD) and the normal wiring (DC12V wiring or GND wiring) is very large. Therefore, it can be easily detected that the connection is not normally established. In these one-side displaced connection modes, the wiring 872-1 and the wiring 872-12 are connected to one connector, and the wiring is not floating.

[Circuit diagram of normal connection state of FFC connection of comparative example]
Here, a case where a connection test is performed with the FFC connection of the comparative example will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG.

FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing conventional wiring normally connected from the decoration control device 1750 of the effect control device 300 to the LED board 1862 as a comparative example. Note that description overlapping with FIG. 82 will be omitted as appropriate.

Decoration control device 1750 is connected to LED board 1862 via FFC relay board 1861 . The decoration control device 1750 comprises a connector CN111 having nine various terminals (9 terminals). The connector CN111 is connected to the connector CN121 (9 terminals) of the FFC relay board 1861 via the harness 1871. FIG.

The harness 1871 is composed of a plurality of (nine) wires 1871-1 to 1871-9 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 9 of the connector CN111.

Wires 1871-1 and 1871-2 of the harness 1871 are wires (DC12V wires) connected to terminals 1 and 2 of the connector CN111 to supply DC12V. Similarly, the wiring 1871-3 is a wiring (DC5V wiring) that is connected to the terminal 3 of the connector CN111 and supplies DC5V. Wirings 1871-4, 1871-6, 1871-8, and 1871-9 are wirings (GND wirings) connected to terminals 4, 6, 8, and 9 of the connector CN111 to supply a ground voltage. A wire 1871-5 is a wire connected to the terminal 5 of the connector CN111 for transmitting the game board SDA, and a wire 1871-7 is a wire connected to the terminal 7 for transmitting the game board SCL.

Here, unlike the harness 871 of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 82 and the like, the conventional harness 1871 does not have the test line TD (DC12V (TEST)) and the test line TG (GND (TEST)). Also, the FFC relay board 1861, the harness 1872, and the LED board 1862, which will be described below, do not have the test line TD or the test line TG.

In the FFC relay board 1861, the terminals of the connector CN121 are connected to the connector CN122 (10 terminals) by branching the wiring from some terminals into a plurality of branches such as bifurcation or trifurcation.

The connector CN122 of the FFC relay board 1861 is connected to the connector CN131 (10 terminals) of the LED board 1862 that is movable and repositionable in the game machine 10 via a flexible flexible flat cable (FFC) harness 1872. be done.

The harness 1872 is composed of a plurality of (ten) wires 1872-1 to 1872-10 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 10 of the connector CN122. Three wirings 1872-1 to 1872-3 (DC12V wiring) supply DC12V, and four wirings 1872-5, 1872-7, 1872-9, 1872-10 (GND wiring) supply ground voltage. . Also, the wiring 1872-4 (DC5V wiring) supplies DC5V, the wiring 1872-6 transmits the game board SDA, and the wiring 1872-8 transmits the game board SCL.

Also, the LED board 1862 has a connector CN131 (10 terminals) corresponding to the wires 1872-1 to 1872-10 of the harness 1872. FIG.

Here, in the conventional circuit, when a connection test was performed, DC 12V wiring, GND wiring, DC 5V wiring (wiring 1871-3), game board SDA wiring (wiring 1871-5), game board SCL wiring (wiring 1871- It can be confirmed that 7) is not connected to other (different type) wiring.

However, in a conventional circuit that does not have the test line TD or the test line TG, it is not possible to check the connection of the DC 12V wiring itself or the connection of the GND wiring itself by a connection test like the circuit of this embodiment. can't.

For example, the DC12V wiring from terminals 1 and 2 of the connector CN121 is connected within the FFC relay board 1861, and the resistance value between the two DC12V wirings of the harness 1871 is always small. As a result, even if the resistance value between the two DC12V wires (wirings 1871-1 and 1871-2) of the harness 1871 is measured by a connection test, it is impossible to check whether the harness 1872 is properly connected. Can not.

Similarly, the GND wiring from terminals 4, 6, 8, and 9 of connector CN121 is also connected within FFC relay board 1861, and the four GND wirings of harness 1871 (1871-4, 1871-6, 1871- 8, 1871-9) is small even if it is measured by a connection test, it is impossible to confirm whether the harness 1872 is properly connected.

[Regarding the deviation state of the FFC connection in the comparative example]
Referring to FIG. 88, the case where the terminals of harness 1872 are connected to connector CN122 and connector CN131 in a state of being displaced one by one will be described.

[One-side deviation state of FFC connection in comparative example]
FIG. 88(a) is a circuit diagram showing a state in which the terminals on one side of the harness 1872 are displaced one by one and connected to the connector CN131.

While the harness 1872 is normally connected to the connector CN122, the wirings 1871-2 to 1872-10 are connected to the terminals 2 to 10 of the connector CN131 in a state of being shifted one by one. 1872-1 is in an unconnected state.

On the other hand, normal DC 12V wiring is connected to LED substrate 1862 by wiring 1872-2 and 1872-3.

Then, when a connection test is performed, the resistance value between the two DC 12V wires of the harness 1871 is reduced because the DC 12V wires from the terminals 1 and 2 of the connector CN121 are connected in the FFC relay board 1861, and the harness 1872 is not able to confirm whether it is connected normally.

In the connection test, it was detected that the resistance between the DC12V wiring (wiring 1871-1, 1871-2) and the DC5V wiring (wiring 1871-3) was small, and it was confirmed that the harness 1872 was not properly connected. You can. As shown in FIG. 88(a), the harnesses 1872 are connected to the LED board 1862 while being shifted one by one, so that the DC5V wiring is connected to the DC12V wiring in the LED board 1862. As shown in FIG.

Similarly, the resistance value between the GND wiring (1871-4, 1871-6, 1871-8, 1871-9), the game board SDA wiring (wiring 1871-5), and the game board SCL wiring (wiring 1871-7) is small. By detecting this, it is possible to confirm that the harness 1872 is not properly connected. As shown in FIG. 88(a), within the LED board 1862, the game board SDA wiring and the game board SCL wiring are connected to the GND wiring.

It should be noted that even if the terminals of the harness 1872 are connected to the connector CN131 with the terminals shifted one by one to the opposite side of FIG. Can not. Similarly, if the terminals of the harness 1872 are connected to the connector CN122 with a deviation of one by one, the connection test between the DC12V wirings and the connection test between the GND wirings cannot be performed.

[Deviation state of FFC connection on both sides of the comparative example]
FIG. 88(b) is a circuit diagram showing a state in which the terminals on both sides of the harness 1872 are displaced one by one and connected to the connector CN122 and the connector CN131.

The wiring 1872-1 of the harness 1872 is disconnected. Also, the wires 1872-2 to 1872-10 connected to the terminals 1 to 9 of the connector CN122 while being shifted one by one are connected to the corresponding terminals 2 to 10 of the connector CN131. As a result, the wiring of the harness 1872 that is shifted by one from the original wiring is connected to the connector CN131, and the DC12V connection, GND connection, DC5V connection, game board SDA connection, and game board SCL connection are not interrupted. The various wirings are not connected (independently) to other (other types of) wirings, and have a very large resistance value with respect to the other wirings. Therefore, even if the resistance values between various wirings and other wirings are measured in the connection test, it is impossible to confirm whether or not the wirings are in a normal connection state.

As a result, in the circuit diagram of the comparative example, even if the terminals at both ends of the harness 1872 are displaced one by one and connected to terminals different from those to which they should be originally connected (even if both sides are misaligned), normal operation can be performed. Unlike this embodiment, it is not possible to detect that the device is not connected to the device.

[Circuit diagram of modified FFC connection]
84 to 86, circuit diagrams of modified FFC connections will be described.

FIG. 84 is a schematic diagram showing the wiring connection configuration from the decoration control board 750 (first circuit board) of the modified example to the board decoration motor M1, the drop right board 866R, and the drop left board 866L (plurality of second circuit boards). is.

As shown in FIG. 84, the modification control board 750 (which may be part of the production control device 300) includes a board decoration motor M1 and a drop relay via a fixed relay board 863 and a movable relay board 864. A substrate 865 is connected. Also, the drop relay board 865 is connected to a drop right board 866R and a drop left board 866L.

The board decoration motor M1 is driven and controlled based on a motor control signal (that is, output signals of MCS1 to MCS4, etc.) from the driver of the decoration control board 750 (for example, the board effect movable body control circuit 334 (FIG. 4)). It is used to perform a performance operation of a movable performance unit (a movable accessory, for example, a board performance device 44) provided on the game machine 10 or the game board 30. - 特許庁It should be noted that the motor control signal here is a signal ( That is, it refers to the output signals of MCS1 to MCS4, etc.), and does not include a signal of a drive voltage (DC15V, etc.) that is a constant voltage or a signal of a ground voltage. Further, the decoration control board 750 can perform control such that, for example, when any one of the motor control signals is 0V, a current is supplied to the corresponding coil of the board decoration motor M1.

The decoration control board 750 has two DC15V terminals in the connector CN12 for supplying the voltage of DC15V from the power supply device 400 to the board decoration motor M1, and one DC15V terminal is common to the A-phase and /A-phase coils. and the other DC15V terminal is a common terminal for the B-phase and /B-phase coils.

A motor control signal is output (transmitted) from the driver of the decoration control board 750 through the fixed relay board 863 and the movable relay board 864 to the board decoration motor M1.

The drop-right board 866R and the drop-left board 866L have an LED driver circuit (IC chip, etc.), and control light-emitting members (LEDs, etc.) that emit logos, characters, etc. of the movable effect units that are moved by the board decoration motor M1, for example. used to The right drop board 866R and the left drop board 866L are controlled in light emission based on a control signal (ie, game board SDA or game board SCL) from a driver (not shown) in the decoration control board 750. FIG.

The fixed relay board 863 is a relay board fixed within the game machine 10 , and the movable relay board 864 and the drop relay board 865 are relay boards that are movable and changeable within the game machine 10 .

The decoration control board 750 and the fixed relay board 863 are connected by a plurality of (for example, two) harnesses 873 and 874 . Similarly, the fixed relay board 863 and the movable relay board 864 are connected by a plurality of (for example, two) harnesses 875 and 876 .

The movable relay board 864 is connected to the panel decoration motor M1 by a harness 877 and connected to the drop relay board 865 by a harness 878 . Similarly, drop relay board 865 is connected to drop right board 866R by harness 879R and to drop left board 866L by harness 879L.

Note that the decoration control board 750 may be connected with a board surface motor sensor or the like for detecting the rotational position such as the initial position of the board decoration motor M1.

In addition, the decoration control board 750 is directly connected to another motor and a board surface motor sensor for detecting the rotational position of the other motor through another harness without passing through a relay board such as the fixed relay board 863. may Also, the decoration control board 750 may be connected to a board that controls other members such as the board surface decoration LED driver, the upper speaker 19a, the lower speaker 19b, and the production button switch 25a.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the details of the circuit diagram of the FFC connection of the modification will be described.

85 is a detailed diagram 1 (upstream side) showing the details of the FFC connection configuration of the modification, and FIG. 86 is a detailed diagram 2 (downstream side) showing the details of the connection configuration of the FFC connection of the modification. ).

As shown in FIG. 85, the decoration control board 750 includes a connector CN12 having eight various terminals (8 terminals) and a connector CN13 having nine various terminals (9 terminals).

The connector CN12 has DC15V terminals (2 terminals) and MCS terminals (output terminals, 6 terminals) for outputting the motor control signals MCS1 to MCS4. The connector CN13 has a DC12V terminal (2 terminals), a DC5V terminal (1 terminal), a GND terminal (4 terminals), a game board SDA terminal (1 terminal), and a game board SCL terminal (1 terminal).

The DC15V terminal and the DC12V terminal are terminals (power supply terminals) for supplying (powering) DC15V and DC12V from the power supply device 400 to the board decoration motor M1, the drop right board 866R, and the drop left board 866L. Similarly, the DC5V terminal is a terminal that supplies DC5V, and the GND terminal is a terminal that supplies a ground voltage (earth terminal, ground terminal).

The MCS terminal outputs motor control signals MCS1 to MCS4, MCS1-T, MCS4-T (parallel signals) from the driver (for example, the board effect movable body control circuit 334 (FIG. 4)) in the decoration control board to the board decoration motor M1. It is a terminal for (transmission). The motor control signals MCS1-T and MCS4-T are motor control signals output to wiring for connection test. The motor control signal MCS1-T becomes the same signal as the motor control signal MCS1, and the motor control signal MCS4-T becomes the same signal as the motor control signal MCS4.

The game board SDA terminal is a terminal for transmitting a serial data signal (game board SDA) to the drop right board 866R and the drop left board 866L, and the game board SCL terminal is a terminal for transmitting a clock signal (game board SCL) to the drop right board 866R and This is a terminal for transmitting to the drop left board 866L.

Connector CN12 of decoration control board 750 is connected to connector CN41 of fixed relay board 863 via harness 873 .

As shown in FIG. 85, the harness 873 is composed of a plurality of (eight wires) 873-1 to 873-8 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 8 of the connector CN12.

Wires 873-4 and 873-5 of the harness 873 are wires (15V DC wires) that are connected to the terminals 4 and 5 of the connector CN12 and supply 15V DC.

Wirings 873-2, 873-3, 873-6, and 873-7 are connected to terminals 2, 3, 6, and 7 of connector CN12, respectively, and are wirings (MCS1 to MCS4 wiring (parallel communication line)).

The wiring 873-1 is the MCS1 wiring that is connected to the terminal 1 of the connector CN12 and outputs the motor control signal MCS1-T, but also functions as a test line (MCS1-T wiring) for connection test.

Similarly, the wiring 873-8 is an MCS4 wiring that is connected to the terminal 8 of the connector CN12 and outputs the motor control signal MCS4-T, but also functions as a test line (MCS4-T wiring) for connection test.

In the fixed relay board 863, the terminals of the connector CN41 branch the wiring from some of the terminals into a plurality of branches such as four or five (not shown) to the connector CN43 (24 terminals) and the connector CN44 (20 terminals). Can connect.

Also, the MCS1-T wiring, which is a test line from terminal 1 of connector CN41, is connected to terminal 24 of connector CN43. On the other hand, the MCS4-T wiring, which is a test line from terminal 8 of connector CN41, is connected to terminal 1 of connector CN43. Therefore, the two test lines (MCS1-T wiring and MCS4-T wiring) connected to the terminals 1 and 8 of the connector CN41 exchange their positions in the fixed relay board 863, thereby changing their positions. As a result, test lines (MCS4-T wiring and MCS1-T wiring) are connected to terminals 1 and 24 of the connector CN43.

The connector CN43 of the fixed relay board 863 is connected to the connector CN51 (24 terminals) of the movable relay board 864 via the harness 875 of the FFC.

The harness 875 is composed of a plurality of (24 wires) wires 875-1 to 875-24 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 24 of the connector CN43 and the connector CN51. Wirings 875-2 to 875-5 are MCS1 wirings, wirings 875-6 to 875-10 are MCS2 wirings, wirings 875-15 to 875-19 are MCS3 wirings, and wirings 875-20 to 875-23. is the MCS4 wiring. Wirings 875-11 to 875-14 are DC15V wirings.

A wiring 875-1 is a test line (MCS4-T wiring) for outputting the motor control signal MCS4, and a wiring 875-24 is a test line (MCS1-T wiring) for outputting the motor control signal MCS1.

The movable relay board 864 has a connector CN51 (24 terminals) corresponding to the wires 875-1 to 875-24 of the harness 875. FIG.

The harness 875 is bent to invert the arrangement of the wires, and is connected to the connector CN51 of the movable relay board 864 .

In the movable relay board 864, the test line for connection test (MCS1-T wiring) outputs the motor control signal MCS1, is connected to the normal motor control signal MCS1 wiring, and is connected to the test line for connection test (MCS4-T wiring) outputs the motor control signal MCS4 and is connected to the normal motor control signal MCS4 wiring. Although not shown, normal motor control signal MCS2 wiring, motor control signal MCS3 wiring, and DC15V wiring are also connected in the movable relay board 864 so as to be grouped into one or two.

Also, as shown in FIG. 85, the DC 15V wiring is connected from the connector CN44 of the fixed relay board 863 to the connector CN52 of the movable relay board 864 via the harness 876, then combined into one, and then connected to the connector CN53, for example. It may be connected to terminal 4 (lower route in FIG. 85). That is, the 15V DC wiring can be branched into an upper route in FIG. In this case, for example, the terminal 4 of the connector CN41 of the fixed relay board 863 and the terminal 3 of the connector CN53 of the movable relay board 864 are used as terminals for the upper route, and the terminal 5 of the connector CN41 and the terminal 4 of the connector CN53 are used. is used as a terminal for the lower route, it is possible to separate the harness to be subjected to the connection test and to make the circuit configuration easy to understand.

The connector CN53 of the movable relay board 864 is connected via a harness 877 to the panel decoration motor M1.

The harness 877 is composed of a plurality of (six) wires 877-1 to 877-6 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 6 of the connector CN53 and the connector CNM of the panel decoration motor M1. The wiring 877-1 outputs the motor control signal MCS1, and the wiring 877-2 outputs the motor control signal MCS2. Wirings 877-3 and 877-4 supply DC 15V. The wiring 877-5 outputs the motor control signal MCS3, and the wiring 877-6 outputs the motor control signal MCS4.

Even if the wiring from the decoration control board 750 to the board decoration motor M1 is branched (at harnesses 875 and 876, for example), it will eventually return before being connected to the board decoration motor M1. Therefore, it is not difficult to connect wiring to the panel decoration motor M1.

Here, the test line (MCS1-T wiring) for outputting the motor control signal MCS1 extends from the wiring 873-1 of the harness 873 to the movable relay board 864 as one electrically independent circuit (serial circuit, series wiring). It is formed. The test line (MCS1-T wiring) is connected inside the movable relay board 864 to the normal motor control signal MCS1 wiring other than the test line.

Therefore, in a connection test from the connector CN12 side of the decoration control board 750 in the harness 873, the resistance value between the wiring 873-1 of the test line (MCS1-T wiring) and the wiring 873-2 of the normal motor control signal MCS1 wiring is By measuring , it is possible to check whether or not the harness 873 and the harness 875 (especially the wiring for the motor control signal MCS1) are correctly connected. The connection test can be performed from the connector CN12 side of the harness 873 by, for example, unplugging the connector of the harness 873 from the connector CN12.

For example, when the harness 873 and the harness 875 are correctly connected (normal connection state, conductive state), the resistance between the wirings 873-1 and 873-2 is extremely small.

Similarly, in the connection test, by measuring the resistance value between wiring 873-8 of the test line (MCS4-T wiring) and wiring 873-7 of the normal motor control signal MCS4 wiring, harness 873 and harness 875 ( In particular, it is also possible to check whether or not the motor control signal (MCS4 wiring) is correctly connected. For example, in a normal connection state, the resistance between the wirings 873-8 and 873-7 is extremely small.

Also, in a normal connection state, the wirings 873-1 and 873-2 that serve as wirings for the motor control signal MCS1 and the wirings 873-8 and 873-7 that serve as wirings for the motor control signal MCS4 are not connected. value is very large. Similarly, in a normal connection state, the resistance value between wirings of different types (heterogeneous) becomes a very large value.

On the other hand, the connector CN13 of the decoration control board 750 is connected to the connector CN42 of the fixed relay board 863 via the harness 874 .

The harness 874 is composed of a plurality of (nine) wires 874-1 to 874-9 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 9 of the connector CN13.

The wiring 874-2 of the harness 874 is a wiring (DC12V wiring) that is connected to the terminal 2 of the connector CN13 to supply DC12V, and the wiring 874-3 is a wiring that is connected to the terminal 3 of the connector CN13 and supplies DC5V ( DC5V wiring).

Wirings 874-4, 874-6, and 874-8 are wirings (GND wirings) connected to the terminals 4, 6, and 8 to supply a ground voltage. The wiring 874-5 is a wiring (game board SDA wiring) connected to the terminal 5 of the connector CN13 to transmit the game board SDA (game board SDA wiring), and the wiring 874-7 is connected to the terminal 7 of the connector CN13 to transmit the game board SCL ( game board SCL wiring).

The wiring 874-1 is a DC12V wiring connected to the terminal 1 of the connector CN13 and supplies DC12V, but also functions as a test line (DC12V-T wiring) for connection test.

Similarly, the wiring 873-9 is a GND wiring connected to the terminal 9 of the connector CN13 and supplies a ground voltage, but also functions as a test line (GND-T wiring) for connection test.

In the fixed relay board 863, like the connector CN41, the terminals of the connector CN42 can also be connected to the connector CN44 (20 terminals) by branching the wiring from some terminals into multiple branches such as three or five branches (not shown). . It should be noted that a part of the branched wiring may be connected to the connector CN43 (24 terminals).

A DC 12V-T wiring, which is a test line from terminal 1 of connector CN42, is connected to terminal 20 of connector CN44. On the other hand, the GND-T wiring, which is a test line from terminal 9 of connector CN42, is connected to terminal 1 of connector CN44. Therefore, the two test lines (DC12V-T wiring, GND-T wiring) connected to the terminals 1 and 9 of the connector CN42 exchange their positions in the fixed relay board 863, thereby changing their positions. As a result, the test lines (GND-T wiring, DC12V-T wiring) connected to the terminals 1 and 20 of the connector CN44 are formed.

The connector CN44 of the fixed relay board 863 is connected to the connector CN52 (20 terminals) of the movable relay board 864 via the harness 876 of the FFC.

The harness 876 is composed of a plurality (20 wires) of wires 876-1 to 876-20 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 20 of the connector CN44 and the connector CN52. Wirings 876-2 to 876-4 are normal DC 12V wirings, wirings 876-5 to 876-10 are DC 15V wirings, and wirings 876-11 and 876-12 are DC 5V wirings. Also, wiring 876-13, 876-14, 876-16, 876-17, 876-19 are GND wiring, wiring 876-15 is game board SDA wiring, and wiring 876-18 is game board SCL wiring. be.

The wiring 876-1 is a test line (GND-T wiring) that supplies a ground voltage, and the wiring 876-20 is a test line (DC12V-T wiring) that supplies DC12V.

The movable relay board 864 has a connector CN52 (20 terminals) corresponding to the wires 876-1 to 876-20 of the harness 876. FIG. The harness 876 is bent to invert the arrangement of the wiring and is connected to the connector CN52 of the movable relay board 864 .

In the movable relay board 864, between the connector CN52 and the connector CN54, the GND-T wiring of the test line is independent from other wiring such as normal GND wiring, and the DC12V-T wiring of the test line is It is independent without being connected to other wiring such as normal DC12V wiring. The test line (DC12V-T wiring) from terminal 1 of connector CN52 is connected to terminal 1 of connector CN54, and the test line (GND-T wiring) from terminal 20 of connector CN52 is connected to terminal 9 of connector CN54. do. Also, the normal GND wiring and the normal DC 12V wiring are connected together in the movable relay board 864, respectively. Although not shown, the 5V DC wiring and the 15V DC wiring are also connected in the movable relay board 864 so as to be integrated into one. Also, the DC15V wiring is connected to the terminal 4 of the connector CN53, for example.

The connector CN54 of the movable relay board 864 is connected to the drop relay board 865 via the harness 878 .

The harness 878 is composed of a plurality of (nine) wires 878-1 to 878-9 corresponding to the terminals 1 to 9 of the connector CN54 and the connector CN61 of the drop relay board 865 (see FIG. 86). The wirings 878 - 1 to 878 - 9 have the same wiring configuration (arrangement) as the wirings 874 - 1 to 874 - 9 of the harness 874 . As for the wiring configuration of the wirings 878-1 to 878-9, if the two test lines (DC12V-T, GND-T) are arranged on the outermost side, the arrangement of the DC12V wiring, the DC5V wiring, etc. can be changed as appropriate. may

As shown in FIG. 86, the drop relay board 865 has a connector CN61 (9 terminals), a connector CN62 (12 terminals), and a connector CN63 (12 terminals). Connector CN61 corresponds to wires 878-1 to 878-9 of harness 878. FIG.

In the drop relay board 865, the wiring from the terminals 1 to 9 of the connector CN61 can be branched into a plurality of branches (not shown), four or eight, and connected to terminals of the connector CN62 or the connector CN63. The terminal 12 of the connector CN62 and the terminal 1 of the connector CN63 are connected to each other, and are not directly connected to the terminal of the connector CN61. there is

A test line (GND-T wiring) from terminal 1 of connector CN61 is connected to terminal 1 of connector CN62. On the other hand, the test line (DC12V-T wiring) from terminal 9 of connector CN61 is connected to terminal 12 of connector CN63.

The connector CN62 of the drop relay board 865 is connected to the connector CN71R (12 terminals) of the right drop board 866R via the FFC harness 879R, and the connector CN63 is connected to the connector CN71L (12 terminals) of the left drop board 866L by the FFC. are connected via a harness 879L.

The drop right board 866R has a connector CN71R (12 terminals) corresponding to the wires 879R-1 to 879R-12 of the harness 879R. Also, the drop left board 866L has a connector CN71L (12 terminals) corresponding to the wires 879L-1 to 879L-12 of the harness 879L. The harnesses 879R and 879L are bent to reverse the layout of the wiring. Harness 879R is connected to connector CN71R of drop right board 866R, and harness 879L is connected to connector CN71L of drop left board 866L.

The harness 879R is composed of a plurality of (twelve) wires 879R-1 to 879R-12 corresponding to terminals 1 to 12 of the connector CN62 and connector CN71R. Wirings 879R-2 and 879R-3 are normal DC12V wirings that are not test lines, and wirings 879R-4 and 879R-5 are DC5V wirings. Also, wirings 879R-6, 879R-7, 879R-9, and 879R-11 are normal GND wirings that are not test wirings, wirings 879R-8 are game board SDA wirings, and wirings 879R-10 are game board SCL wirings. is. These various wirings are connected to corresponding terminals 2 to 11 of the connector CN71R of the drop right board 866R.

Similarly, the harness 879L is composed of a plurality of (twelve) wires 879L-1 to 879L-12 corresponding to terminals 1 to 12 of the connector CN63 and connector CN71L. Wirings 879L-10 and 879L-11 are normal DC12V wirings that are not test lines, and wirings 879L-9 and 879L-8 are DC5V wirings. Also, wirings 879L-7, 879L-6, 879L-4, and 879L-2 are normal GND wirings that are not test lines, wiring 879L-5 is game board SDA wiring, and wiring 879L-3 is game board SCL wiring. is. These various wirings are connected to corresponding terminals 2 to 11 of the connector CN71L of the drop left board 866L. Note that the wirings 879L-2 to 879L-11 of the harness 879L have an arrangement configuration (arrangement) that is upside down from the wirings 879R-2 to 879R-11 of the harness 879R.

A wiring 879L-12 is a test line (GND-T wiring) for supplying a ground voltage.

Wirings 879R-1, 879R-12, and 879L-1 are test lines (DC12V-T wirings) for supplying DC12V. The arrows in FIG. 86 show the direction of the current in the DC12V-T wiring as an example in order to make the connections of the test lines easier to understand, but the arrows may be reversed if the direction of the current is reversed.

The terminals 1 and 12 of the connector CN71R are electrically connected within the drop right board 866R, and the current from the wiring 879R-1, that is, the current of the DC12V-T wiring flows from the terminal 12 to the terminal 1 as indicated by the arrow in FIG. , to the wiring 879R-12. Therefore, the direction of current in the wiring 879R-1 (right arrow in FIG. 86) is opposite to the direction of current in the wiring 879R-12 (left arrow in FIG. 86). Then, the current of the DC 12V-T wiring flows sequentially from the terminal 12 of the connector CN62 of the drop relay board 865 to the terminal 1 of the connector CN63, the wiring 879L-1 of the harness 879L, and the terminal 12 of the connector CN71L of the left drop board 866L.

The DC12V-T wiring is connected to the normal DC12V wiring within the drop left board 866L, and the GND-T wiring is connected to the normal GND wiring within the drop left board 866L.

Thus, in the circuit diagrams of the modifications shown in FIGS. 84 to 86, the test lines (MCS1-T wiring, MCS4-T wiring, DC12V-T wiring, GND-T wiring) are connected to the respective harnesses (harnesses 873 to 876). , 878 to 879L) as one electrically independent circuit (series circuit, series wiring).

Therefore, even in the circuit diagram of the modified example, in the connection test, the resistance value between the test line (MCS1-T, wiring 873-1) of the motor control signal MCS1 of the harness 873 and the normal MCS1 wiring (wiring 873-2) is measured. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether or not the MCS1 wiring is in a normal connection state. When the MCS1 wiring is in the normal connection state, the resistance value between these wirings is extremely small compared to when it is not in the normal connection state.

Similarly, in the connection test, by measuring the resistance value between the test line (MCS4-T, wiring 873-8) of the motor control signal MCS4 of the harness 873 and the normal MCS4 wiring (wiring 873-7), the MCS4 wiring It is also possible to check whether the is in a normal connection state.

Furthermore, in the connection test, the resistance between the test line (MCS1-T, wiring 873-1) for the motor control signal MCS1 and the test line (MCS4-T, wiring 873-8) for the motor control signal MCS4 is very large. It is a value, and you can also check that it is not connected.

Similarly, the connection test should also confirm that the resistance between the regular MCS1 wire (wire 873-2) and the regular MCS4 wire (wire 873-7) is very high and not connected. preferable.

Also, between the DC12V-T wiring (wiring 874-1) of the harness 874 and the normal DC12V wiring (wiring 874-2), or between the GND-T wiring (wiring 874-9) and the normal GND wiring (wiring 874-8) By measuring the resistance value between these wirings, it is possible to confirm whether or not these wirings are in a normal connection state. Furthermore, the DC12V-T wiring (wiring 874-1) and the GND-T wiring (wiring 874-9) are not connected, and the normal DC12V wiring (wiring 874-2) and the normal GND wiring (wiring 874-9) are not connected. 8) It is preferable to confirm by a connection test that there is no connection between them.

In this way, by measuring the resistance value between wires that should be connected and the resistance value between wires that should not be connected by the connection test, it is possible to determine whether the circuit diagram of the modification is in a normal connection state. can be easily confirmed while the harnesses 875 and 876 of the FFC are connected.

Further, by connecting the fixed relay board 863 and the movable relay board 864 with not one but a plurality of (two) flexible flat cables (harnesses 875 and 876), the flexibility of connection is increased, and the movable relay board 864 can be You can expand your range of motion. Further, even if one of a plurality of flexible flat cables (FFC) is bent excessively and broken, only the broken FFC needs to be replaced, resulting in cost reduction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 84 and the like, a plurality of (for example, two) harnesses (particularly, FFC (harnesses 875, 876)). In this way, by using multiple harnesses to connect to the motors and substrates that move movable accessories, etc., it becomes possible to increase or decrease the number of harnesses according to the increase or decrease in the number of members. It can be done easily. Also, even if the performance specifications of the game machine 10 are changed to increase or decrease the number of motors (accessories), the game machine 10 can be easily reused. Note that the distance between a plurality of members such as the movable accessory (board decoration motor M1, right drop board 866R, left drop board 866L, etc.) and the decoration control board 750 changes according to the movement (operation) of the movable accessory. It is possible.

Furthermore, the harnesses 875, 876, 879R, and 879L of the FFC of the modified example are configured by a plurality of (2 to 5) wirings such as MCS1 wiring to MCS4 wiring, DC12V wiring, GND wiring, etc., instead of a single (1) wiring. be. As a result, even if there is a wire that is bent excessively or interferes with another member and is disconnected, the control of the board decoration motor M1, the drop right board 866R, and the drop left board 866L is continued using other unbroken wires. can do. For example, even if several MCS1 wirings (four wires) and MCS2 wirings (five wires) of the harness 875 are broken, if at least one each remains, the control of the panel decoration motor M1 can be continued.

Furthermore, within the fixed relay board 863, the positional relationship between the MCS1-T wiring and the MCS4-T wiring is reversed. As a result, for example, even if nine wirings (wirings 875-1 to 875-9) from the outside of the harness 875 to the ninth MCS2 wiring (wiring 875-9) are broken, the remaining MCS2 wirings (wiring 875-10) or the MCS1-T wiring (wiring 875-24) arranged on the opposite side, the control of the board decoration motor M1 can be continued.

Similarly, in the fixed relay board 863, the positional relationship between the DC12V-T wiring and the GND-T wiring is reversed. As a result, for example, even if nine wirings (wirings 876-1 to 876-9) from the outside of the harness 876 to the ninth DC15V wiring (wiring 876-9) are broken, the remaining DC15V wiring (wiring 876-10) and DC12V-T (wiring 876-20) arranged on the outermost side on the opposite side can be used to continue to control the drop right board 866R and the drop left board 866L.

The fixed relay board 863 and the movable relay board 864 may be connected by harnesses (FFC) equal to or greater than the number of motors connected to the movable relay board 864. By increasing the number of connectors, the fixed relay board 863 and the movable relay board 864 may be connected to two or more harnesses. In addition, between the fixed relay board 863 and the movable relay board 864, like the DC 15V wiring, the motor control signals MCS1 to 4 and the signals to the drop right board 866R and the drop left board 866L (game board SDA, game board SCL) are transmitted. It may be transmitted by another harness.

[Functions and effects of the fourth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment can execute a game (variation display game) and an effect related to the game, and a first circuit board for control (for effect control) (for example, a decoration control board 750 ), a second circuit board (for example, LED board 862, board decoration motor M1, drop right board 866R, drop left board 866L) capable of transmitting or receiving signals between the first circuit board, and the first circuit board Wirings (wirings 871-2 and 871-3 of the harness 871, wirings 872-2 to 872-4 of the harness 872, etc.) connected between the second circuit boards via at least one connector (connectors CN11 to CN31, etc.) ), and when the wiring is provided in parallel between the first circuit board and the second circuit board, and the wiring is correctly connected between the first circuit board and the second circuit board (in a normal connection state connection judgment wiring (test lines TD (wirings 871-1, 872-12), test lines TG (wirings 871-11, 872- 1) etc.).

According to such a game machine 10, it is appropriately determined whether or not the wiring between the first circuit board and the second circuit board is properly connected using the connection determination wiring provided in parallel with the wiring. (confirmation) I can. As a result, even in the case where unconnected wiring occurs, such as when the FFC connection is deviated from both sides, which cannot be determined conventionally, it is possible to confirm that the wiring is not properly connected using the connection determination wiring. Since the opportunity to reconnect the wiring is obtained, the misalignment of the connection of the entire wiring can be normally corrected.

Also, the game machine 10 can change the distance between the first circuit board and the second circuit board. According to such a game machine 10, for example, the second circuit board can be provided on a movable accessory (member) that can be displaced, and the second circuit board on the member whose distance from the first circuit board changes relatively. It is possible to appropriately determine (confirm) whether or not the wiring is properly connected on the substrate. Moreover, even if a general-purpose flexible flat cable (FFC) with a small terminal hole is used for the wiring between the first circuit board and the second circuit board so as to follow the movement of a displaceable movable accessory, for example. , the connection test can be easily performed by applying a tester from the first circuit board (upstream side).

In addition, in the game machine 10, the first circuit is connected via the side of the connection determination wiring corresponding to the terminal of the connector of the first circuit board and the side of the wiring corresponding to the terminal of the connector connected to the first circuit board. It can be determined whether the wiring is properly connected between the board and the second circuit board. According to such a game machine 10, the connector of the wiring and the connection determination wiring is pulled out on the first circuit board side, and the connection test is performed between the connection determination wiring and the wiring. and the second circuit board are properly connected.

In addition, in the game machine 10, the wiring for connection determination and the wiring are partially installed as a flexible flat cable, and the wiring for connection determination is located on the outermost side of the flexible flat cable with the wiring interposed therebetween. According to such a game machine 10, since the wiring for connection determination is arranged on the outermost side of the flexible flat cable which is likely to be the starting point of disconnection, which is likely to be the starting point of disconnection, the wiring is disconnected. Therefore, it can be easily determined whether or not the first circuit board and the second circuit board are properly connected.

Further, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a connection determination wiring and a relay substrate that relays the wiring, and the connection determination wiring and the wiring are not electrically connected in the relay substrate. According to such a game machine 10, the wiring for connection determination and the wiring from the first circuit board are connected to the second circuit board without conducting through the relay board, so the relay board is removed. Therefore, it is possible to easily check whether the wiring is correctly connected on the whole of the first circuit board and the second circuit board only by performing a connection test between the connection determination wiring and the wiring.

In addition, in the game machine 10, the wiring for connection determination and the wiring are partially installed as a flexible flat cable, and the connector on the side of the first circuit board and the second circuit board are mounted on the relay board that relays the wiring for connection determination and the wiring. The positions of the terminals for connection determination wiring are reversed between the connector on the flexible flat cable side and the connector on the flexible flat cable side. According to such a game machine 10, the positional relationship of the terminals of the connection determination wiring is reversed (inverted) between the connector on the first circuit board side and the connector on the second circuit board side. Even if the wiring on one side of the cable is broken, the connection determination wiring arranged on the opposite side can be used as a spare wiring to continue the control of the second circuit board.

Further, in the game machine 10, the wiring is a conductive wire for voltage or ground (DC 12V wiring, GND wiring). Further, in the gaming machine 10, wiring is a serial communication line (game board SDA wiring, game board SCL wiring). In addition, in the game machine 10, the wiring is a parallel communication line for motor control. Therefore, according to the game machine 10, the connection determination wiring can be used by installing it in parallel with the general wiring. Therefore, the connection determination wiring can be used for various circuits in general.

[Fifth embodiment]
A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 97. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to fourth embodiments. In addition, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to fourth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The fourth embodiment relates to the display of the display device when the power is turned on or reset.

[Back side of game machine]
First, referring to FIG. 89, the configuration of the game control device 100 (main board) and the like arranged on the back side of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a back view of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

A game control device 100 (main board) is arranged on the back side of the game board 30 of the game machine 10 for comprehensively controlling the game through the switch base 738 located on the outer side of the front frame 12, which is the open end side. A production control device 300 is provided for controlling the display device 41 and the like based on a production control command (production command) transmitted from the game control device 100 via the control base 733 above the switch base 738 . Behind the effect control device 300, a protective cover 737 covering the back surface of the effect control device 300 and the upper back surface of the game control device 100 is provided. When the game board 30 configured as described above is housed in the housing portion of the front frame 12, the protective cover 737 and the game control device 100 arranged on the back surface of the game board 30 protrude behind the frame 11. .

A storage unit 750 is disposed on the upper back surface of the front frame 12 to store game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) provided in the island facility, and to align and flow down the stored game balls. . A payout unit 790 that pays out game balls falling from the storage unit 750 to the upper tray 21 (see FIG. 1) is disposed on the inner side of the front frame 12 on the hinge side (shaft attachment end side).

In addition, on the outer side of the lower back surface of the front frame 12, a payout control device 200 that controls the operation of the payout unit 790 based on data transmitted from the game control device 100, and based on the rotation operation of the operation handle 24 A ball shooting device 742 for shooting game balls is provided. A connection terminal 743 for connecting to a card unit (not shown) is provided inside the lower back surface of the front frame 12, and power is supplied to various devices in the central portion of the lower back surface of the front frame 12. A power supply device 400 is arranged slightly closer to the inner side.

In addition, it is possible to set game conditions on the lower side of the back surface of the game control device 100, slightly closer to the inside, that is, on the game control device 100, slightly closer to the hinge side (the shaft attachment end side, the inner side) than the central portion of the front frame 12. A setting key switch 93 (key switch) of a (changeable) setting change device 42 (setting means, setting device, setting change means), a RAM initialization switch 112 capable of executing RAM initialization, and a performance display device 152 (display, LED lamp) are provided. The RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch 102 (set value change button switch, button switch), and together with the setting key switch 93, a setting change device 42 (setting means, setting device) capable of setting settings related to game conditions. , setting change means).

The performance display device 152 is a 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display (LED lamp, payout 7-segment ), and also functions as a probability setting value display device when the probability setting values for display are displayed.

In this way, the setting key switch 93, the RAM initialization switch 112, and the performance display device 152 are provided near the inside of the game machine 10, and cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened wide, for example. It is placed in a position where it cannot be reached unless the operator (manager or attendant of the game hall) reaches out. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting change device 42 and cannot confirm the display of the performance display device 152 . Also, since the setting key switch 93, the RAM initialization switch 112, and the performance display device 152 are provided inside the game machine 10, they are not hidden (overlapped) by the initial operation of the movable accessory.

In addition, the performance display device 152 functioning as a probability setting value display device displays any one of four 7-segment type (8-segment type including dots) displays during setting change or setting confirmation. (For example, the leftmost or rightmost display) may display the probability setting value. Note that the performance display device 152 displays the payout rate (base value), etc., except during setting change or setting confirmation.

In addition, the payout monitoring error monitored by the payout control device 200 is displayed on the outer side of the lower back surface of the payout control device 200, that is, on the open end side (outer side) of the lower front frame 12 in the payout control device 200 7 A payout display device 203 is provided as a segment type display (LED lamp). In this way, the payout display device 203 is provided near the outer side inside the game machine 10, so that the operator can easily check the display without opening the front frame 12 wide. On the other hand, a general player who cannot open the front frame 12 cannot confirm the display of the payout display device 203 . In addition, since the payout display device 203 is provided inside the game machine 10 in the same manner as the setting key switch 93 and the like, it is not hidden (overlapped) by the initial action of the movable accessory. 89, the payout display device 203 is disposed diagonally to the lower left of the performance display device 152, that is, away from the performance display device 152 vertically or horizontally. Therefore, even if the payout control device 200 is arranged adjacent to the game control device 100, the payout display device 203 is not arranged side by side with the performance display device 152 and is arranged at a position separate from the performance display device 152, resulting in display confusion. can be prevented.

[Display change table according to the fifth embodiment]
Next, with reference to the table of FIG. 90, examples of display changes of various display devices when the state of the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment changes will be described.

FIG. 90 is a table for explaining an example of display changes of the performance display device 152, the payout display device 203, and the display device 41 (liquid crystal display device) when the state of the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment changes. FIG. 90(A) shows an example of display change when the system is restarted after an error such as a main failure occurs, and the display changes to a variable setting state, etc. FIG. This is an example of display change in the case of

As shown in FIGS. 90(A) and 90(B), when the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is the normal state (playing), the performance display device 152 displays the ball output rate (base value). , the payout display device 203 flashes the lower segment "_", and the display device 41 displays a decorative special pattern (identification information) which is variably displayed or statically displayed and a customer waiting demonstration. Note that the payout display device 203 may blink any one of the 7 segments instead of blinking the lower segment "_" (such as blinking the middle segment "-"). , the segments may be cyclically lit, for example, in a figure-of-eight pattern.

Next, after the gaming machine 10 in the normal state is restarted (power is turned off and on), when a main abnormality (main board management error) and a payout monitoring error occur, the performance display device 152 (abnormality notification means) displays the main abnormality. (notification), the payout display device 203 (error notification means) displays (notifies) a payout monitoring error, and the display device 41 (effect display means) displays (notifies) that there is a main abnormality.

A main abnormality is an abnormality of the game control device 100 (main board, main board), and is monitored by the game control device 100, as in the first embodiment. A main abnormality is, for example, a RAM abnormality that is an abnormality of the RAM 111c. When there is a main abnormality, it becomes a game stop state in which game processing such as special game processing, normal game processing, and accessory game processing cannot be executed (A1025 and A1026).

A payout monitoring error is an error monitored by the payout control device 200, and is, for example, a shot ball running out error, an overflow error, or a disconnection error. The shot ball running out error occurs when there are no game balls to be paid out or when the shoot unit is jammed. An overflow error occurs when the lower tray 23 is full, and a disconnection error (card unit disconnection error) occurs when the card unit of the game ball lending device is not connected to the gaming machine 10.例文帳に追加It should be noted that, as in the first embodiment, by sending a signal (shot ball cut switch signal or overflow switch signal) from the payout control device 200, the game control device 100 can also detect a payout monitoring error (Fig. 3).

After that, after the gaming machine 10 is restarted again (the power is turned off and on for the second time), for example, as shown in FIG. , the performance display device 152 displays the probability setting value, and the display device 41 displays that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. On the other hand, the payout display device 203 displays again the payout monitoring error that was displayed before the power was turned off and on for the second time. For example, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (by executing the program), the payout control device 200 executes error monitoring. If the cause of the error is not resolved and the error continues to occur, the occurrence of the error is detected again. In other words, the error state before power-off (power-off) is not retained, and the payout monitoring error is displayed again when the occurrence of the error is re-detected after power-on. Therefore, although it is actually only for a short time, it is in a (temporary) normal state until an error is detected after the power is turned on (until the error is established), and the display of the payout display device 203 is It will be displayed normally. Alternatively, the error state before the power is turned off may be retained and displayed again after the power is turned on. Further, similarly to the first embodiment, a restart accompanied by operation of the setting change device 42 (the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93) causes the setting to be changed or set to be checked.

Then, when a sub-reset (initialization on the side of the effect control means) for clearing the RAM of the effect control device 300 is executed during setting change or setting confirmation, the display device 41 displays that it is in preparation. For example, RAM clearing is clearing of RAMs (such as the RAM of the main control microcomputer 311 and the RAM 322) that provide work areas. On the other hand, the performance display device 152 continues to display the probability setting value displayed during the setting change or setting confirmation, and the payout display device 203 also continues to display the payout monitoring value displayed during the setting change or setting confirmation. Continue to display errors.

The sub-reset is, for example, when the production control device 300 is forcibly restarted due to the generation of a reset signal due to noise to the reset terminal of the main control microcomputer 311 or the like, poor contact of the power connector, etc., or when the WDT is Occurs when the time is up. In this embodiment, the main process (main program) is executed from the beginning (B0001) at the time of the sub-reset as well as when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (when the power is turned on).

It should be noted that, until the command is received after the power is turned on or after the sub-reset, based on the initial value (initial display data) (B0007), the display device 41 displays a predetermined display indicating that preparations are being made ( B0017). The initial value (initial display data) may differ between when the power is turned on and when the sub-reset is performed, and the display mode in the display screen of the display device 41 (color, background, etc. of “preparing”) may be changed between when the power is turned on and when the sub-reset is performed. It can be made different at the time of reset.

Further, for example, in the example of display change in FIG. 90(B), after the gaming machine 10 is restarted again (the power is turned off and on for the second time), when the main abnormality and the payout monitoring error occur again, the performance display device 152 and the payout The display device 203 and the display device 41 display the same display as before the second power-off and on following the occurrence of the error. That is, the performance display device 152 again displays the main error, the payout display device 203 the payout monitoring error, and the display device 41 again the main error. In this case, the restart (normal power restoration) does not involve the operation of the setting change device 42, and neither the setting change nor the setting confirmation is in progress. It should be noted that the display device 41 may temporarily display that it is in preparation during startup after the power is turned off and on for the second time, and then display again that the main abnormality has occurred.

Then, after the main abnormality and the payout monitoring error occur again, when the performance control device 300 performs a sub-reset, the display device 41 displays that preparations are being made. On the other hand, the performance display device 152 continues to display the main abnormality that was displayed after the power was turned off and on for the second time, and the payout display device 203 also continues to display the payout monitoring error that was displayed after the power was turned off and on for the second time. do.

[Display transition example 1 according to the fifth embodiment]
Next, a display transition example (display transition example 1) of various display devices when the state of the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment changes will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that these display transition examples correspond to the display change examples in FIG. 90 described above.

[Example of display transition when sub-resetting occurs while changing settings]
FIG. 91 shows an example of display transition when the system is restarted after occurrence of an error such as a main failure, transitions to a setting variable state (setting change in progress), and is sub-reset during the setting change.

As shown in FIG. 91(A), when the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is the normal state (playing), the display device 41 displays a decorative special pattern (identification information) and a customer waiting demonstration. . For example, in FIG. 91(A), the display device 41 displays a corresponding effect (not shown) by a decorative special symbol or a character that is variably displayed ("↓↓↓") by the variable display game. In addition, as indicated by hatching in FIG. 91, the decoration devices 18a and 18b of the frame decoration device 18, the frame LEDs and the frame accessory LEDs of the projecting effect unit 13, and the game board 30 are displayed according to the game state and the effect of the variable display game. The board LED provided at the bottom and the LED of the effect button 25 also perform light emission effects (hatching indicates the state of light emission). Similarly, the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c, which are movable accessories (movable members), also perform a movable effect, and the board role LEDs of the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c also emit light effects. is done. In addition, depending on the game state and the effect of the variable display game, the sound and voice effects are produced from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b. The board LED and the board accessory LED are part of the board decoration device 46 described above, and the LED of the production button 25 is part of the frame decoration device 18 .

The performance display device 152 displays, for example, a base value of "b188". The base value can be cyclically displayed by switching the type every 5 seconds (predetermined period), for example. The type of base value displayed is the real-time value being measured (i.e., the latest base value (final base value) of the control section currently being measured) → the base value measured throughout the previous control section (i.e., Final base value of the control section 1 time before) → Base value measured throughout the control section 2 times before (that is, final base value of the control section 2 times before) → Base value measured throughout the control section 3 times before Value (that is, the final base value of the control interval three times before)→Real-time value during measurement→ . . .

Digit 0 and digit 1 (identification segment) correspond to an identification segment (identification segment) that identifies and indicates the type of base value. For example, "bL" is displayed corresponding to the real-time value during the measurement of the base value, "b1" is displayed corresponding to the base value measured throughout the control section one time ago, and "b1" is displayed for the control two times before. "b2" is displayed corresponding to the base value measured over the entire section, and "b3" is displayed corresponding to the base value measured over the entire management section three times before.

Digits 2 and 3 (ratio seg) correspond to the ratio seg (ratio segment, numeric segment) that indicates the base value as a percentage (%). If there is no main failure during normal power-on (normal power recovery) without operation of the setting change device 42, the initial display (blinking of all segments of all digits) is displayed from digit 0 to digit 3.

On the payout display device 203, for example, a blinking "-" is displayed in the center segment.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), after the gaming machine 10 in the normal state is restarted (power off→power on), when a main abnormality and a payout monitoring error occur, the display device 41 displays the main abnormality Display (announce) that it is. In this way, since the main abnormality more serious than the payout monitoring error is displayed on the display device 41, the operator (game parlor manager or attendant) can easily notice the main abnormality, and the game machine 10 can be managed and restored. etc. can be performed efficiently. In addition, the display device 41 may report both the main abnormality and the payout monitoring error. Alternatively, the main failure may be displayed after the preparation is displayed during startup after the restart. In addition, the display device 41 during power shutdown (power off) becomes a black screen with no display. Note that the display device 41 can notify one of the main abnormality and the payout monitoring error when only one occurs.

When the main abnormality and the payout monitoring error occur, the decoration devices 18a and 18b of the frame decoration device 18, the frame LEDs and frame accessory LEDs of the projecting effect unit 13, the board LED provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and the effect button 25 The LED is turned off. Similarly, the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c also stop at the initial position without performing the initial operation, and the board accessory LEDs of the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c are turned off. In addition, even if the frame LED, the frame accessory LED, the board LED, and the board accessory LED emit light in a different color than during the production during the game or during the customer waiting demonstration, when the main error and payout monitoring error occur. good. Further, the main abnormality may be notified by sound or voice from the upper speaker 19a or the lower speaker 19b. Also, the movable accessories such as the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c may start the initial operation when there is no command received by the effect control device 300 for a predetermined time. It should be noted that the frame LED, the frame accessory LED, the board LED, the board accessory LED, the upper speaker 19a, and the lower speaker 19b are in the same state when only one of the main abnormality and the payout monitoring error occurs, and when both occur. , or in a different state.

For example, "E1" is displayed on the performance display device 152 as a display corresponding to the main abnormality. Digit 0 and digit 1 (identification segment) are turned off, digit 2 displays "E" indicating an error (abnormality), and digit 3 displays the corresponding error number "1". Therefore, by referring to the error number, the operator (manager or attendant of the game arcade) can quickly grasp what kind of error has occurred.

On the payout display device 203, "4" is lighted and displayed as a display corresponding to, for example, a disconnection error among the payout monitoring errors. Also, the payout display device 203 can blink during normal display. It is possible to make it easy to understand that the payout control device 200 is operating normally by displaying the payout monitoring error in a lighted state and blinking the display in the normal state. It should be noted that the light may be displayed when normal display is performed. Also, in the payout display device 203, blinking display may be used instead of lighting display. For example, it is possible to light up "1" as a corresponding display when a shootout error occurs, and to light up "2" as a corresponding display when an overflow error occurs. In this way, the performance display device 152 notifies the main abnormality, and even if a payout monitoring error occurs overlapping with the main abnormality, the performance display device 152 can notify the payout monitoring error. It becomes easy to recognize both an abnormality and a payout monitoring error.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 91(C), after the gaming machine 10 is restarted again (second power off→power on), when the setting is being changed (setting variable state), the display device 41 Indicates that the settings are being changed. For example, the display device 41 can display "setting changing" in black characters on a white background. In addition, the display device 41 may display "setting change in progress" in white characters or the like on a black background or the like. In addition, the system menu screen may be displayed together with the message "Changing settings" so that the setting change history can be selected and confirmed. An image such as a button image suggesting that the selection is possible may be displayed.

The decoration devices 18a and 18b and the frame LEDs and frame accessory LEDs of the projecting effect unit 13 are in a light emitting state indicating that the setting is being changed by red blinking (or all lighting may be possible) (hatching indicates a light emitting state). It should be noted that the light emission state during setting change or during setting confirmation described later can be made different from the effect during the game by lighting in a single color (e.g. yellow or red) or blinking at a monotonous constant cycle. , the operator can easily recognize that the setting is being changed (or the setting is being checked). Also, the frame LEDs and the frame accessory LEDs may be illuminated in white, purple, or the like as a mode dedicated to changing settings, while part of them may flash red to indicate that the settings are being changed. Also, during the setting change, the frame LEDs and frame accessory LEDs may be cyclically lit, for example, white→yellow→red→blue→extinguished→white (although blue is included, mainly warm colors). Alternatively, the LEDs of the game machine 10 may emit light in a color corresponding to the location where the LEDs of the game machine 10 are arranged, such as white for the upper LED, purple for the left LED, and red for the right LED.

On the other hand, in this example, the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c are stopped at the initial position without performing the initial operation, and the board accessory LED and the game board of the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c are displayed. The board LED of 30 and the LED of the production button 25 are turned off. In addition, the board function LED and board LED during setting change are also lit in a single color to indicate that the setting is being changed in the same way as the above frame LED and frame function LED, or partly flashes in red etc. or cyclic lighting may be used. Also, similarly, the production button 25 may be flashed in white or the like, or may be cyclically lit.

The upper speaker 19a or the lower speaker 19b may notify a sound (for example, dedicated BGM related to setting change) or voice (for example, "setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed.

The performance display device 152 displays a display corresponding to the selected set value such that the digit 3 is "1", for example. Digits 0 to 2 are in a non-lit state, and the setting value is displayed in a simple display with only digit 3, so that the operator can easily confirm the setting value while changing the setting.

On the payout display device 203, "4" is illuminated again as a display corresponding to, for example, a disconnection error among the payout monitoring errors. Therefore, even while the setting is being changed, the operator can confirm that a disconnection error has occurred by looking at the display "4" on the payout display device 203. FIG.

Note that the indicators (LED lamps) of the batch display device 50 whose settings are being changed may be all lit or all extinguished. Also, during the setting change, the first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp D7) and the second game state display unit 58 (second game state display, lamp D17) of the collective display device 50 Only one of the LEDs for displaying the status, such as the third gaming status display section 59 (the third gaming status indicator, the probability status display section, the lamp D9), may be turned on.

Then, as shown in FIG. 91(D), when the sub-reset of the effect control device 300 is performed during the setting change, the display device 41 displays that it is in preparation (for example, "preparing" or "screen in preparation"). In this way, by displaying the fact that preparation is in progress on the display device 41, it is possible to inform the operator who changes the settings that the sub-reset has been performed in an easy-to-understand manner. The display device 41 after the sub-reset may be turned off, or the customer waiting demo screen may be displayed. In addition, the display "preparing" on the display device 41 after the sub-reset is changed to " The display mode may be different from that of "preparing" that can be displayed before "main failure" is displayed. For example, the display of "preparing" on the display device 41 after the sub-reset is displayed in red characters only, while the display of "preparing" at normal power-on is displayed in white together with the characters. It can be easily identified that it is after the reset.

Further, the decoration devices 18a and 18b, the frame LEDs and frame accessory LEDs of the projecting effect unit 13, the board LED of the game board 30, and the LEDs of the effect button 25 are turned off (all off). In addition, the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c stop at the initial position without performing the initial operation, and the board accessory LEDs of the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c are turned off (all off ). In addition, when there is no command received by the effect control device 300 for a predetermined time (for example, 3 sec), the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c may start the initial operation. Also, most of the LEDs of the gaming machine 10 may be turned off, while the effect button 25 may be illuminated in white, for example. Further, the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b are muted.

The performance display device 152 maintains the display of "1" corresponding to the selected setting value in the third digit, for example. While the RAM of the effect control device 300 is cleared by the sub-reset, the game control device 100 maintains the setting variable state even after the sub-reset, and the digit 3 of the performance display device 152 is lit. In this way, by keeping the digit 3 of the performance display device 152 lit even after the sub-reset, the operator can easily recognize that the setting can be changed continuously.

The payout display device 203 maintains a lighting display of "4" as a display corresponding to, for example, a disconnection error among payout monitoring errors. Therefore, even while the setting is being changed, the operator can confirm that a disconnection error has occurred by looking at the display "4" on the payout display device 203. FIG.

Further, after that, when the disconnection error is resolved, the lighting display of "4" on the payout display device 203 is switched to the normal display of "-". On the other hand, the indication that the display device 41 is being prepared (“Preparing”) is continuously displayed.

[Example of display transition when sub-resetting occurs while checking settings]
FIG. 92 shows an example of display transition when the system is restarted after an error such as a main abnormality occurs, the system shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation in progress), and is sub-reset during the setting confirmation.

FIG. 92(A) is the same diagram as FIG. 91(A), and FIG. 92(B) is the same diagram as FIG. 91(B), so description thereof will be omitted.

After the game machine 10 is restarted again (second power off→power on), as shown in FIG. to show that For example, the display device 41 can display "Confirming settings" in black characters on a white background during setting confirmation as well as during setting change. In addition, the display device 41 may display "setting confirmation" in white characters, green characters, or the like on a black background or the like. In addition, the system menu screen may be displayed together with the message "Checking settings" so that the user can select and check the setting change history. An image such as a button image may be displayed. As the setting change history, probability setting values and their durations may be displayed as a list.

The frame LEDs and frame accessory LEDs of the decoration devices 18a and 18b and the projecting effect unit 13 are in a light emitting state indicating that the settings are being checked by flashing blue or green (may be all lit) (hatching indicates a light emitting state). As described above, it is possible to make the operator easily recognize that the setting value is fixed by making the light emission state blinking while the setting is being changed and lighting the light emission state during the setting confirmation. Also, the frame LEDs and the frame accessory LEDs may be illuminated in white, purple, or the like as a mode dedicated to setting confirmation, while part of them may emit light such as flashing blue to indicate that the setting is being confirmed. In addition, the frame LEDs and frame accessory LEDs may be cyclically lit, for example, white → green → blue → yellow → extinguished → white during setting confirmation in a cyclical lighting mode different from that during setting change (yellow is mainly included). cold colors). Alternatively, the LED of the gaming machine 10 may emit light in a color corresponding to the place where it is arranged.

On the other hand, in this example, the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c are stopped at the initial position without performing the initial operation, and the board accessory LED and the game board of the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c are displayed. The board LED of 30 and the LED of the production button 25 are turned off. In addition, the board function LED and board LED during setting confirmation are also lit in a single color to indicate that the setting is being confirmed in the same way as the above frame LED and frame function LED, and part of them blinks in blue etc. or cyclic lighting may be used. Also, similarly, the production button 25 may be flashed in white or the like, or may be cyclically lit.

The upper speaker 19a or the lower speaker 19b may notify a sound (for example, dedicated BGM related to setting confirmation) or a voice (for example, "setting is being confirmed") indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

The performance display device 152 changes from the error display of "E1" to the display corresponding to the determined setting value of, for example, "1" by restarting the gaming machine 10 again (second power off→power on). Become.

On the payout display device 203, for example, "4" is illuminated again as a display corresponding to the disconnection error. Therefore, even during confirmation of the settings, the operator can confirm that a disconnection error has occurred by looking at the display "4" on the payout display device 203. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIG. 92(D), when the effect control device 300 is sub-reset during setting confirmation, the display device 41 displays that preparations are being made. In this way, by displaying the fact that preparation is in progress on the display device 41, it is possible to inform the operator who checks the settings in an easy-to-understand manner that the sub-reset has been performed. Further, the decoration devices 18a and 18b, the frame LEDs and frame accessory LEDs of the projecting effect unit 13, the board LED of the game board 30, and the LEDs of the effect button 25 are turned off. Further, the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c stop at the initial position without performing the initial operation, and the board accessory LEDs of the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c are turned off. In addition, when there is no command received by the effect control device 300 for a predetermined time, the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c may start the initial operation.

The performance display device 152 maintains the display of "1" corresponding to the selected setting value in the third digit, for example. While the RAM of the effect control device 300 is cleared by the sub-reset, the game control device 100 maintains the setting confirmation state even after the sub-reset, and the digit 3 of the performance display device 152 is lit. In this way, by keeping the digit 3 of the performance display device 152 lit even after the sub-reset, the operator can easily recognize that the finalized set value is being displayed.

The payout display device 203 maintains a lighting display of "4" as a display corresponding to, for example, a disconnection error among payout monitoring errors. Therefore, even during confirmation of the settings, the operator can confirm that a disconnection error has occurred by looking at the display "4" on the payout display device 203. FIG.

Further, after that, when the disconnection error is resolved, the lighting display of "4" on the payout display device 203 is switched to the normal display of "-". On the other hand, the indication that the display device 41 is being prepared (“Preparing”) is continuously displayed.

[Example of display transition when sub-resetting occurs after an error occurs again]
FIG. 93 is an example of transition of display in the case of sub-resetting after an error such as a main abnormality occurs again in restarting after the occurrence of an error such as a main abnormality.

FIG. 93(A) is the same diagram as FIG. 91(A), and FIG. 93(B) is the same diagram as FIG. 91(B), so description thereof will be omitted.

After the gaming machine 10 is restarted again (power off for the second time→power on), as shown in FIG. In the same manner as in B), the main abnormality is displayed (notified) again. The display device 41 may notify both of the main abnormality and the payout monitoring error, or may display the main abnormality after displaying that it is being prepared during startup after restarting. .

Further, the frame LEDs and frame accessory LEDs of the decoration devices 18a and 18b, the projecting effect unit 13, the board LED of the game board 30, and the LED of the effect button 25 are turned off. Similarly, the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c also stop at the initial position without performing the initial operation, and the board accessory LEDs of the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c are turned off. In addition, even if the frame LED, the frame accessory LED, the board LED, and the board accessory LED emit light in a different color than during the presentation during the game or during the customer waiting demonstration when the main error and the payout monitoring error occur. good.

Further, the main abnormality may be notified by sound or voice from the upper speaker 19a or the lower speaker 19b. Also, the movable accessories such as the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c may start the initial operation when there is no command received by the effect control device 300 for a predetermined time.

After the game machine 10 is restarted again (power off for the second time→power on), the performance display device 152 again displays the error display "E1" corresponding to the main error when the main error or the like occurs again. .

On the payout display device 203, "4" is illuminated again as a display corresponding to, for example, a disconnection error among the payout monitoring errors.

Then, as shown in FIG. 93(D), after the main abnormality or the like occurs again after restarting, when the sub-reset of the effect control device 300 is performed, the display device 41 indicates that preparations are being made. indicate. In addition, the frame LEDs and frame accessory LEDs of the decorative devices 18a and 18b and the projecting effect unit 13, the board LEDs of the game board 30, the LEDs of the effect button 25, and the board accessory LEDs of the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c are , remain in the off state. In addition, the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c are stopped at the initial position without performing the initial operation, but when there is no command received by the effect control device 300 for a predetermined time, the initial operation is started. good too.

Even after the sub-reset, the performance display device 152 continues to display the error display "E1" corresponding to the main abnormality. In this way, by continuing to display the error display "E1" on the performance display device 152 even after the sub-reset, even if the display device 41 no longer displays the main-abnormality due to the sub-reset, the main-abnormality occurs. This makes it easier for the operator to recognize what is being done.

On the payout display device 203, lighting display of "4" is maintained as a display corresponding to, for example, a disconnection error. Therefore, even after the sub-reset, the operator can confirm that the disconnection error has occurred by looking at the display "4" on the payout display device 203. FIG.

Further, after that, when the disconnection error is resolved, the lighting display of "4" on the payout display device 203 is switched to the normal display of "-". On the other hand, the display indicating that the display device 41 is being prepared (“preparing”) and the error display corresponding to the main abnormality of “E1” in the performance display are continuously displayed. Since the main abnormality is canceled by turning on the power again and shifting to the setting variable state, it is not possible to resolve only the main abnormality and maintain the notification of the payout monitoring error. If the game machine 10 does not have the setting change device 42 (setting means), the main abnormality may be resolved only by turning on the power again.

Therefore, when the sub-reset is performed, the display on the display device 41 is switched to "preparing", so that the operator can easily recognize that the sub-reset has been performed. Further, even when the sub-reset is performed, the performance display device 152 and payout display device 203 continue to display the error display ("E1") indicating the main abnormality and the display ("4") corresponding to the disconnection error. Even afterward, the operator can easily confirm that a main abnormality or disconnection error has occurred. Further, when the disconnection error is resolved, the display corresponding to the disconnection error on the payout display device 203 stops, so the operator can easily confirm whether or not the error continues to occur.

[Display transition example 2 according to the fifth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, display transition example 2 of various display devices when the state of the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment changes will be described. Display transition example 2 corresponds to the example of display change in FIG. 90 described above, but unlike display transition example 1, the display change occurs after the movable accessory starts the initial action.

[Example of display transition when sub-resetting occurs while changing settings after restarting due to an error occurring during initial operation]
FIG. 94 is an example of display transition when a sub-reset is performed during a setting change after an error such as a main error has occurred during the initial operation of the movable accessory and the mobile accessory has been restarted.

As shown in FIG. 94(A), the upper effect unit 40c, which is a movable accessory (movable member), moves downward from the initial position by the initial operation after power-on of the gaming machine 10, and the front of the display device 41 (game side). It should be noted that the upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d start the initial operation when the effect control device 300 receives some command after the power is turned on. For example, in FIG. 94A, the initial operation is started by receiving the command (A1024) for notifying the main abnormality error. The initial operations of the upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d are executed in order, and the initial operations can be started after or at the same time as the display (notification) of the main abnormality by the display device 41. In addition, in FIG. 94(A), the board role LEDs of the upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d are turned off, but they can be turned on or blinked according to the initial operation.

Further, the frame LEDs and frame accessory LEDs of the decoration devices 18a and 18b, the projecting effect unit 13, the board LED of the game board 30, and the LED of the effect button 25 are turned off. It should be noted that the frame LED, the frame accessory LED, the board LED, and the LED of the effect button 25 also perform the initial operation (initial light emission operation) may be performed.

The performance display device 152 and the payout display device 203 are turned off immediately after the gaming machine 10 is powered on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), when the upper effect unit 40c is located at the operation position in front of the display device 41 by the initial operation, both the main abnormality and the payout monitoring error are detected. However, the display device 41 displays (notifies) that there is a main abnormality. That is, while the display device 41 has the same display mode as that of FIG. 91(B), visibility is poor due to the upper effect unit 40c being positioned in front.

The performance display device 152 displays, for example, the display "E1" corresponding to the main abnormality. In the payout display device 203, "4" is lighted and displayed as a display corresponding to, for example, a disconnection error among the payout monitoring errors.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 94(B), when the upper effect unit 40c is positioned in front of the display device 41, the operator notices the occurrence of an error (main abnormality or payout monitoring error). , the power shall be turned off immediately and restoration work shall be carried out.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 94(C), after the gaming machine 10 is restarted again (second power off→power on), when the setting is being changed (setting variable state), the display device 41 Indicates that the settings are being changed. That is, while the display device 41 has the same display mode as that of FIG. 91(C), the state of poor visibility due to the continued positioning of the upper effect unit 40c in front is maintained. In addition, the movable accessories (movable members) such as the upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d are arranged so as not to interfere with operations such as the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting change operation). Initial operation is restricted (prohibited) during setting change (initial operation disabled state). Therefore, for example, the upper effect unit 40c located in front of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 94(C) keeps its position during the setting change. Also, originally, the visibility is ensured by not performing the initial action while the movable accessory is in the initial position while changing the settings or checking the settings, but it is unlikely that it will occur as long as it is operated normally. Control can be simplified by intentionally not performing the initial operation even in a situation such as 94(C).

On the other hand, for example, the performance display device 152 displays "1" as the display corresponding to the selected setting value, and the payout display device 203 displays "4" as the display corresponding to the disconnection error. Therefore, by looking at the performance display device 152 and the payout display device 203 during the setting change, the operator can easily confirm the selected set value and the occurrence of the disconnection error.

Then, as shown in FIG. 94(D), when the effect control device 300 is sub-reset during the setting change, the display device 41 displays that preparations are being made. The setting variable state continues, and the initial motions of the movable accessories (movable members) such as the upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d continue to be restricted. Therefore, the upper effect unit 40c continues to be positioned in front of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 94(D).

Further, even after the sub-reset during setting change, the display of "1" corresponding to the selected set value is maintained on the performance display device 152, and the display of "4" corresponding to the disconnection error is displayed on the payout display device 203. The lighting display is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(E), when the setting change (setting variable state) is completed after the sub-reset, the initial movement of the movable accessories (movable members) such as the upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d is restricted. For example, it is canceled by the processing when the probability setting change end command is received (the result of B3004 is "Y", B3007), and the upper effect unit 40c executes the initial action (here, it returns from the action position to the initial position). after that, execute the initial operation). By completing the setting change, the game state of the gaming machine 10 returns to the normal state. When a customer waiting demo command is transmitted as an effect command from the effect control device 300 because there is no starting memory and no variable display game is being played, the display device 41 displays the customer waiting demo. In addition, the frame LEDs and frame accessory LEDs of the decorative devices 18a and 18b, the projecting effect unit 13, the board LED of the game board 30, and the LEDs of the effect button 25 are in a light emitting state along with the effect of the customer waiting demonstration (hatching indicates light emission). situation). In addition, the sound and voice related to the performance of the customer waiting demonstration may be notified from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b. On the other hand, the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c continue the resumed initial operation, but after the initial operation, the board role LEDs of the side effect unit 40d and the upper effect unit 40c are turned on for the customer waiting demonstration. Light may be emitted in accordance with the performance.

Therefore, since the movable member does not move during the setting change, it is possible to prevent interference with the operator's setting operation (setting change) and distraction during the setting operation because there is nothing moving within the operator's field of vision. can be prevented. Besides, except during setting change, the initial operation of the movable member is executed regardless of whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on when the power is turned on, that is, regardless of whether the RAM (storage means) is initialized. The initial operation is quickly executed, and information can be notified without hiding the display device 41 or the like.

When the game state changes to the normal state, the performance display device 152 displays a base value such as "bL--", for example. As described above, digit 0 and digit 1 (identifying segment) are, for example, "bL" corresponding to the real-time value during measurement of the base value. In addition, the period when the total number of out balls (the number of out balls in all game states (the number of game balls used in the game)) is less than a predetermined number (for example, 300) is excluded from measurement, and the number of digits 2 and 3 ( "--" (null) is displayed in the ratio segment). For example, when the total number of outs reaches 300, the performance display device 152 displays a base value such as "bL30".

Further, the payout display device 203 maintains the lighting display of "4" as a display corresponding to the disconnection error, for example. Further, after that, when the disconnection error is resolved, the lighting display of "4" on the payout display device 203 is switched to the normal display of "-".

In FIG. 94, the initial action of the movable accessory during setting change is restricted (prohibited). In order to avoid this, the initial action of the movable accessory during setting confirmation may be restricted (prohibited).

[Movable body control processing]
FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the procedure of movable body control processing according to the fifth embodiment. The movable object control process in FIG. 95 is a process that enables execution and restriction (prohibition) of the initial action of the movable accessory in FIG. 94 .

The effect control device 300 first determines whether it is at power-on (recovery from power failure) or sub-reset (B3001).

When it is determined that the effect control device 300 is neither when the power is turned on nor when it is sub-reset (the result of B3001 is "N"), the normal control processing is started (B3003). For example, after the production control device 300 receives the production command for the first time after the power is turned on, it becomes "N". Here, the effect command is a command that can be transmitted in the game processing (A1312a-A1313) of the game control device 100, and is a command that is transmitted when the game state is the normal state. On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that it is at the time of power-on or at the time of sub-reset (the result of B3001 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the command for changing the probability setting is received. (B3002).

A command during probability setting change is determined to be received when the MODE part indicates a setting change system (result of B1325 is "Y") in the single-shot command processing (FIG. 47). be done. That is, by opening the front frame 12 (body frame, body portion) and turning on the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 of the setting change device 42 (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the probability is set. A command under change is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1030 in FIG. 5B). When the set value change switch 102 of the setting change device 42 is pressed while the probability setting is being changed, the set value regarding the game condition is changed. In addition, the information of the set value related to the changed game condition is displayed on the performance display device 152 as the probability set value display device.

Effect control device 300, when it is determined that it has received a command during probability setting change (result of B3002 is "Y"), determines whether it has received a command to end the probability setting change ( B3004).

It is determined that the probability setting change end command has been received when the MODE section indicates the setting change type (result of B1325 is "Y") by the probability setting change end command in the single-shot command processing (FIG. 47). be done. That is, when the probability setting value has been changed and the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A1036 is "Y" and the result of A2407 is "N"), a command for ending the probability setting change is sent from the game control device 100. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 (A1039).

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when it is determined that the command during the probability setting change is not received (the result of B3002 is "N"), that is, when the power is turned on without changing the probability setting, It is determined whether or not the command has not been received (B3006). For example, an error/illegal command (B1315), a setting change command (B1325), a setting confirmation command (B1327), a RAM initialization command (A1044), a power failure recovery command (A1046), and a customer waiting demo command (A1046). ) is received, it is determined that a command (single-shot type command) has been received (not that the command has not been received). The error/illegal command (B1315) is received as, for example, a main abnormality error notification command (A1024) indicating a main abnormality, or a state ON command indicating opening of the front frame 12 (body frame). The setting change command (B1325) is received when the probability setting is being changed (A1030), and the setting confirmation command (B1327) is received when the probability setting is being confirmed (A1033).

Effect control device 300, when it is determined to have received the command of the probability setting change end (result of B3004 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting change is completed, whether the command has not been received is determined (B3006). On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when it is determined that the command for ending the probability setting change is not received (the result of B3004 is "N"), that is, during the probability setting change (in the variable setting state) , the initial operation is prohibited (regulated, restricted) (B3005).

When the effect control device 300 determines that the command has not been received (the result of B3006 is "Y"), the initial operation is prohibited (B3005). Thus, the effect control device 300, when not receiving commands such as error / fraud system command (B1315) and setting change system command (B1325) and setting confirmation system command (B1327), the movable role It functions as a restricting means that restricts the initial motion of the object (movable member) and prevents it from being executed. In addition, the display device 41 displays, for example, "preparing" when no command is received, and does not shift to the setting variable state or setting confirmation state. Although the display mode is different, the display mode (customer waiting demo) may be the same as the display at command reception at the time of normal power-on. Each LED is turned off when no command is received, for example, but it may be in the same common light emission mode (light emission mode related to the presentation of the customer waiting demonstration) as when the command is received at normal power-on. If there is a sub-reset during the game, the command (effect command) will be received immediately after the sub-reset, and the time during which the command is not received will be extremely short. The display device 41 and each LED at the time of reception may have a common display mode or light emission mode, or may be different.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the command has not been received (the result of B3006 is "N"), the initial motion control process for initializing the movable accessory (movable member) is started ( B3007).

With such a movable object control process, the initial action of the movable accessory is restricted (prohibited) when the setting is being changed (during the setting variable state) as shown in FIGS. If it is not being changed, after receiving some command after turning on the power (the result of B3006 is "N"), the initial action of the movable role is executed as shown in FIGS. be.

Similarly, the initial action of the movable accessory may be restricted (prohibited) while the setting is being checked (during the setting confirmation state). In step B3004, it is determined whether or not a command to end probability setting confirmation or a command to end probability setting change (announcement end command) has been received.

Moreover, regardless of the reception of the command, the production control device 300 may arbitrarily execute the initial action of the movable accessory. At the stages of (A) and (B), the initial motion of the movable accessory ends, and the movable accessory returns to the initial position.

[Display examples of hold display form and mode display form]
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 and an example of a pending display mode and a mode display mode in relation to the fifth embodiment.

In FIG. 96(A), in the time saving state, a mode display 679 corresponding to the time saving mode as the production mode is displayed according to the probability set value. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the display device 41, for example, the mode display 679 corresponding to the time saving mode is displayed as "full moon mode" when the probability setting value is 6. As a background corresponding to the display content of the mode display 679, an image of a flowered tree illuminated by a full moon image may be displayed as a background image. The tree image can include flowers as characters.

In addition, as the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special pattern (large pattern) as identification information is being executed in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen, and the decoration reduction as identification information Variation (↓↓↓) of the pattern (small pattern) is being executed in the variation display area 615 at the lower right corner of the display screen. In the left region 610A, right region 610B, and middle region 610C of the variable display region 610, the left pattern (decoration pattern A), the right pattern (decoration pattern B), and the middle pattern (decoration pattern C) are fluctuating, respectively.

Four pending displays 683a (second pending displays) are displayed in the second pending display portion 630b (waiting area) that displays the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory) before execution of the variable display game as the second pending display. be done. The pending display 683a has, for example, a display mode (first display mode) corresponding to a flower character in the tree image of the background image. In addition, in the pending digestion area 640, a variable pending display 683b indicating the variable pending related to the special figure variable display game being executed (starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure variable display game) is displayed. there is Note that the reserved digestion area 640 may be indicated by a rectangular frame or platform. In addition, nothing is displayed here in the first suspension display portion 630a that displays the first start memory (special figure 1 start memory) before the execution of the variable display game as the first reservation display (first start memory display). do not have.

In the special figure 1 reserved number display part 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display part 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen, the number "0" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "4" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number respectively ” is displayed. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "x" indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variation display game being executed (fluctuation). The symbol "○" indicates that A fourth symbol variation may be performed as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) by blinking the symbol "○".

FIG. 96(B) is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the second pending display and mode display that change according to the set probability value. The probability set value (set value) is set as a natural number from 1 to 6, and the probability (winning probability) that the variable display game will result in a special result can be changed according to the set value. In FIG. 96B, for example, the smaller the set value (closer to 1), the smaller the winning probability, and the larger the set value (closer to 6), the greater the winning probability.

The display mode (holding display mode) of the holding display of the second holding is, for example, a triangle ("△") when the setting value is 1, and a circle ("○") when the setting value is 2 or 3. When the set value is 4 or 5, it can be displayed as a hexagon, and when the set value is 6, it can be displayed as a flower character. In addition, the display mode of the mode display (mode display mode) is, for example, displayed in "moon mode" when the set values are 1 and 2, and displayed in "crescent mode" when the set values are 3 and 4, When the set value is 5, it can be displayed in "half moon mode", and when the set value is 6, it can be displayed in "full moon mode".

At that time, the pending display mode may be the same display mode for different set values, such as a circle display for set values 2 and 3, and a hexagonal display for set values 4 and 5. . In addition, the mode display mode can be such that, for example, the mode names of setting value 2 and setting value 4 are displayed in italics with the same mode names as those of setting value 1 and setting value 3, thereby making it difficult to distinguish the probability difference. . On the other hand, if the mode names are different, such as "half-moon mode" and "full-moon mode," the probability difference can be more easily discriminated.

In addition, although the example which changes the mode display 679 of time saving mode corresponding to a probability setting value was shown, similarly, you may change the mode display of other modes, such as normal mode, corresponding to a probability setting value.

[Test signal for probability setting change processing]
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the relationship (A2410) at the time of +1 update of the test signal and the work setting value (probability setting value) relating to the probability setting change/confirmation process in the fifth embodiment.

In FIG. 97, each time there is an input to the RAM initialization switch 112 (the result of A2409 is "Y"), a test signal is sent from the game control device 100 corresponding to the work set value updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 5. output. For example, by electrically connecting the game control device 100 and the test shot-shot device via the relay board 70, it becomes possible to output the test signal to the test shot-shot device. Also, when the working setting value is 0 (corresponding probability setting value is 1), a test signal of 00H in hexadecimal is output, and when the working setting value is 1 (corresponding probability setting value is 2), 01H is output. A test signal is output. Similarly, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the working set values are updated by +1 to 2 and 3 (the corresponding probability set values are 3 and 4), and the output test signals are also updated to 02H, 03H and +1. Updated.

[Functions and Effects of the Fifth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is provided with effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling effects related to games. The gaming machine 10 includes setting means (setting changing means (setting changing device 42)) capable of setting game-related setting values, and effect display means (display device 41, etc. (display device 41, frame An LED, a frame accessory LED, a board accessory LED, a board LED, and an LED of the production button 25)). The effect control means resets (sub-reset (initialization, RAM initialization, RAM clear)) in a settable state (setting variable state, setting change mode) in which the setting value can be set by the setting means. In this case, the effect display means has a different display mode (for example, "preparing" display) from the state before resetting (for example, "setting changing" display) and the power shutdown (power off) state (no display). to

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10, the effect display means displays a display mode after resetting in the variable setting state that is different from the display mode before resetting or during power shutdown. It is possible to inform the person (administrator or staff member) in an easy-to-understand manner that the sub-reset has been performed.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes confirmation means (setting change device 42) capable of confirming game-related set values, and effect display means (display device 41, etc.) capable of displaying effects. The effect control means resets (sub-reset (initialization, RAM initialization, RAM clear)) in a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed by the confirmation means. The display means is changed to a different display mode (for example, "preparing" display) from the state before resetting (for example, "setting checking" display) and the state (no display) during power shutdown (power off). to control.

According to such a game machine 10, since the display mode after the reset in the setting confirmation state is different from the state before the reset and the state during the power shutdown, the effect control means can be operated to confirm the setting. It is possible to inform the person (administrator or staff member) in an easy-to-understand manner that the sub-reset has been performed.

In addition, the game machine 10 includes an effect display means (display device 41, etc.) capable of displaying effects, and an abnormality capable of notifying a predetermined abnormality (main abnormality (RAM abnormality), etc.) of the game control means (game control device 100). and a notification means (performance display device 152, abnormality display means). During the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality of the game control means, when the production control means (production control device 300) is reset (sub-reset (initialization, RAM initialization, RAM clear)), the production control means, production display means is set to a different display mode (for example, "preparing" display) from the state before resetting (for example, "main abnormality" display) and the state (no display) during power shutdown (power off), and the game control means The abnormality notifying means is made to continue to notify of a predetermined abnormality (for example, error display "E1" corresponding to the main abnormality).

According to such a gaming machine 10, the display mode after the reset of the effect control means (the effect control device 300) is different from the state before the reset and the state during the power shutdown, while the predetermined display mode after the reset has occurred, and the error display (for example, "E1") of the abnormality notification means (performance display means 152) continues. Therefore, by continuing the error display of the abnormality notification means after the reset (after the sub-reset), even if the effect display means no longer displays a predetermined abnormality (for example, the main abnormality) due to the reset, the abnormality notification means This error display makes it easy for the operator to recognize that a predetermined abnormality (for example, a main abnormality) has occurred.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes game control means (game control device 100) for controlling games, and production means (display device 41, frame LED, frame role LED, board role LED, board LED , LED of the production button 25, the upper speaker 19a, the lower speaker 19b, etc.) production control means (production control device 300) and payout control means ( A payout control device 200) is provided. The game machine 10 is provided with abnormality reporting means (performance display device 152, abnormality display means) capable of reporting the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality (main abnormality (RAM abnormality)) of the game control means. The payout control means monitors errors related to the payout of game media (payout monitoring errors (shoot ball running out error, overflow error, disconnection error, etc.), and notifies the occurrence of the error when the error occurs. Possible error notification means (payout display device 203, error display means) is provided. The production means can notify the occurrence of the error when an error occurs, can notify the occurrence of the abnormality when the predetermined abnormality of the game control means occurs, and the abnormality notification means can notify the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality. When the occurrence of an error is reported and the error reporting means reports the occurrence of an error, the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality is reported.

According to such a game machine 10, the abnormality notification means notifies the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality, and even if an error related to payout occurs overlapping with the occurrence of the abnormality, the error notification means notifies the occurrence of the error. This makes it easier for the operator to recognize both the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality in the game control device and the occurrence of an error relating to payout. Further, since the occurrence of a more serious predetermined abnormality that has occurred in the game control device is displayed on the presentation means, the operator can easily notice the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality, and the management, restoration, etc. of the game machine 10 can be efficiently performed. It can be carried out.

The gaming machine 10 also includes effect display means (display device 41, etc.) that is included in the effect means and can display effects. During the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality (main abnormality (RAM abnormality)) of the game control means and an error (payout monitoring error) monitored by the payout control means, when the production control means resets (sub-reset), the production control means , the effect display means is set to a display mode (display of "preparing") different from the state before resetting (display of "main abnormality") and the state during power shutdown (no display, light off), and the game control means The notification means continues the notification of the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality ("E1"), and the payout control means causes the error notification means to continue the notification of the error occurrence ("4"). When the error monitored by the payout control means is resolved, the payout control means stops the notification of the occurrence of the error notified to the error notification means, and the effect control means changes the display mode of the effect display means ("preparing" display) to continue.

According to such a game machine 10, when the effect control means is reset, the display of the effect display means is switched to a different display mode ("preparing"), so that the operator can easily recognize the reset. In addition, even after the reset, the abnormality notification means and the error notification means continue to notify the predetermined abnormality ("E1") and error notification ("4"), so that the content of the abnormality or error can be notified even after the reset. It can be easily confirmed by the operator. Further, when the error is resolved, the error notification ("4") of the error notification means is stopped, so the operator can easily confirm whether or not the error continues to occur.

In addition, the game machine 10 is operated by game control means (game control device 100) for controlling a game, effect control means (performance control device 300) capable of controlling effects related to the game, and effect control means. and a movable member (side effect unit 40d, upper effect unit 40c). The gaming machine 10 includes setting means (setting changing means (setting changing device 42)) capable of setting game-related setting values, and storage means (RAM 111c) for storing information updated by the game control means. When the power is turned on, the performance control means enables the initial operation of the movable member regardless of whether the storage means is initialized (RAM clear, initialization), and when the power is turned on, the set value is set by the setting means. When moving to a settable state (setting variable state, setting change mode), the initial operation of the movable member is not performed, and when the settable state ends, the initial operation of the movable member is started, and in the settable state When the production control means (production control device 300) is reset (sub-reset), the initial operation of the movable member is not performed during the settable state.

According to such a game machine 10, even if the production control means (production control device 300) is reset when the state is shifted to the settable state when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the movable member is not performed. When the variable setting state ends, the initial operation is started. Therefore, since the movable member does not move during the setting change, it is possible to prevent interference with the operator's setting operation (setting change) and distraction during the setting operation because there is nothing moving within the operator's field of vision. can be prevented. In addition, except during setting change, the initial operation of the movable member is executed regardless of whether or not the storage means is initialized (for example, whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on) when the power is turned on. is quickly executed, and information can be notified without hiding the display means or the like. Thus, the initial operation of the movable member can be preferably performed.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes are possible within the scope of its technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. is. For example, it is also possible to replace the time saving state with a probability variable state. For example, various combinations of multiple embodiments and multiple modifications are possible. Also, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, and is intended to include all changes within the scope of the claims and equivalent meanings and contents.

For example, when the above-described embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the game media used in the game are medals (coins) instead of game balls, and the number of prize balls is replaced with the number of medals to be paid out. In slot machines, the ball payout rate (base) as performance information is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine, and the accessory ratio is the number of medals paid out during a predetermined period. Among them, the ratio (%) of the number paid out by various bonuses.

10 game machine 25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 34 normal figure start gate 36 first start winning opening (first starting winning area)
37 normal variable winning device (second starting winning area)
38 First special variable winning device 39 Second special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
86 Specific area 86 (V prize opening)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Effect control device (sub board)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control means capable of controlling an effect related to a game,
Confirmation means for confirming setting values related to games;
and an effect display means capable of displaying the effect,
The production control means is
In the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed by the confirmation means, when the production control means resets,
A gaming machine characterized in that the effect display means displays different display modes between a state before resetting and a state during power shutdown.

Images